T.O.

1B-52H-1-13

Electronic Warfare Officer’s Manual

USAF SERIES B-52H AIRCRAFT
THE BOEING COMPANY
F33657-79-C-0416
F34601-03-D-0066

This manual contains unverified procedures. Refer to the validation/verification status

page(s) prior to performing any operation or maintenance procedure.

THIS PUBLICATION IS INCOMPLETE WITHOUT T.O. 1B-52H-1 AND T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 AND IS USED WITH T.O. 1B-52H-1-12.
SUPPLEMENTARY PUBLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED TO SUPPLY OPERATIONAL COVERAGE IN NONSTANDARD CONFIGURATIONS.
SEE T.O. 0-1-CD-1 FOR NUMERICAL INDEX OF BOMBER TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS.

SEE T.O. 0-1-CD-1 FOR CURRENT STATUS OF FLIGHT MANUALS, SAFETY SUPPLEMENTS, OPERATIONAL SUPPLEMENTS, AND
FLIGHT CREW CHECKLISTS.

COMMANDERS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR BRINGING THIS PUBLICATION TO THE ATTENTION OF ALL AIR FORCE PERSONNEL
CLEARED FOR OPERATION OF SUBJECT AIRCRAFT.

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT E – Distribution authorized to the Department of Defense Components only, due to Direct Military Support, 29
October 1996. Other requests shall be referred to 327 BMSG/EN, Tinker AFB, OK 73145-3021.

WARNING –This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms Export Control Act (Title 22, U.S.C., Sec 2751, et seq.)
or the Export Administration Act of 1979, as amended, Title 50, U.S.C., App. 2401 et seq. Violations of these export laws are subject to severe
criminal penalties. Disseminate in accordance with provisions of DoD Directive 5230.25.

HANDLING AND DESTRUCTION NOTICE – Comply with distribution statement and destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of
contents or reconstruction of the document. Demil code D.

PUBLISHED UNDER AUTHORITY OF THE SECRETARY OF THE AIR FORCE

31 AUGUST 1996
CHANGE 14 – 1 JUNE 2006
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Technical orders are normally distributed promptly after printing. Date(s) shown on the title page (lower right corner) are for identification only. These
are not distribution dates. Processing time sometimes causes distribution to only appear to have been delayed.

INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES NOTE: The portion of the text affected by the changes is indicated by a
vertical line in the outer margins of the page. Changes to illustrations
are indicated by miniature pointing hands. Changes to wiring
diagrams are indicated by shaded areas.

Dates of issue for original and changed pages are:

Original 0 31 Aug 96 Change 4 1 Mar 00 Change 8 1 Mar 02 Change 12 1 Dec 04

Change 1 30 Dec 98 Change 5 30 Dec 00 Change 9 1 Sep 02 Change 13 1 Jul 05
Change 2 1 May 99 Change 6 30 Jun 01 Change 10 1 Apr 03 Change 14 1 Jun 06
Change 3 30 Jun 99 Change 7 1 Oct 01 Change 11 1 Apr 04

TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS PUBLICATION IS 272 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:

Page Change Page Change Page Change Page Change

No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No.

* Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 1-27 – 1-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1-106 – 1-107 . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2-35 – 2-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

* A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Flyleaf-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Flyleaf-2 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . 0
V/VS-1 Added . . . . . . . . . . . 13
V/VS-2 Blank Added . . . . . 13
i – ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
iii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
iv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
v ....................... 4
vi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
vii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
viii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1-2 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
* 1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1-6A – 1-6B Added . . . . . . . 9
1-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1-8 – 1-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1-10 – 1-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-12 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1-14 – 1-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1-16A Added . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1-16B Blank Added . . . . . . . 2
1-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1-19 – 1-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1-23 – 1-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1-26A – 1-26D Added . . . . . 2
1-26E – 1-26H . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-34 – 1-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-42A – 1-42H Added . . . . .
1-42J – 1-42L Added . . . . .
1-42M Blank Added . . . . . .
1-43 – 1-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-45 – 1-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-49 – 1-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-54 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-55 – 1-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-59 – 1-61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-62 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-63 – 1-66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-66A Added . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-66B Blank Added . . . . . . .
1-67 – 1-72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-72A – 1-72H Added . . . . .
1-72J – 1-72N Added . . . . .
1-72P – 1-72V Added . . . . .
1-73 – 1-74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-74A – 1-74D Added . . . . .
1-75 – 1-76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-78 – 1-91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-93 – 1-101 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-102 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-103 – 1-105 . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 1-108 – 1-111 . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
7 1-112 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
7 1-113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
7 1-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
7 1-115 – 1-116 . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
7 1-117 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
0 1-118 – 1-119 . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
7 1-120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1 2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
7 2-2 – 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
0 2-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
7 2-5 – 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
0 2-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
7 2-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
0 * 2-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
9 2-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
0 2-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
0 2-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
9 2-13 – 2-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
9 2-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
9 2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
9 2-17 – 2-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
9 2-19 – 2-20 Deleted . . . . . . . 9
9 2-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
9 2-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
9 2-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
9 2-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
0 2-25 – 2-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
9 2-26A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
0 2-26B Blank Added . . . . . . . 5
1 2-27 – 2-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
0 2-31 – 2-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
0 2-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
0 2-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2-38 – 2-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2-42 – 2-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2-45 – 2-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3-2 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3-6 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
3-7 – 3-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
3-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
3-14 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
3-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
3-16 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
3-17 – 3-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3-20A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3-20B – 3-20F Added . . . . . 9
3-21 – 3-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
3-26 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
3-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Glossary-1 Added . . . . . . . 10
Glossary-2 Blank Added . . 10
Index-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Index-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Index-3 – Index-4 . . . . . . . . . 9

CURRENT FLIGHT CREW CHECKLIST

Electronic Warfare Officer’s Abbreviated Checklist T.O. 1B-52H-1-13CL-1 31 Aug 96 Change 11 - 1 Jun 06

Upon receipt of the second and subsequent changes to this technical order, personnel responsible for maintaining this publication in current
status will ascertain that all previous changes have been received and incorporated. Action should be taken promptly if the publication is
incomplete.
*The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.

ADDITIONAL COPIES OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE OBTAINED BY USAF ACTIVITIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH T.O. 00-5-1.

A Change 14 USAF
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

STATUS OF SAFETY AND OPERATIONAL SUPPLEMENTS

This supplement status page is based on information available to the manual editor as of the date of
this publication. The information may not be current as it must be updated by any subsequent supple-
ment status pages and by reference to T.O. 0-1-1-2.

SUPPLEMENTS IN THIS CHANGE

Number Date Short Title Section Affected

S-4 30 Dec 00 Installation Of DUAL MODEM Rescinded

AFSATCOM

OUTSTANDING SUPPLEMENTS

Number Date Short Title Section Affected

Change 9 Flyleaf-1/(Flyleaf-2 blank)

BLA
 WARNING

This manual contains unverified procedures. Unverified procedures shall only be performed during verification, in accor-
dance with TOs 00-5-1 and 00-5-3. Performance of unverified procedures may result in injury to personnel or damage to
equipment.

TECHNICAL ORDER VALIDATION/VERIFICATION STATUS PAGE

T.O. NO. BASIC DATE CHANGE NO. – DATE PTO CHANGE NO. – DATE

T.O 1B-52H-1-13 31 AUG 1996 13 – 1 JUL 2005 AMI

VERIFICATION
VALIDATION
METHOD

METHOD
DATA ELEMENT DATE DATE REMARKS
VALIDATED VERIFIED

(A) (B) (B)

TCTO Listings
(P, PG vii) 7/15/02 A
ALQ-172 Fault Status
(P: PG 3-20A) 7/10/02 A

LEGEND:

(A) DATA ELEMENT: (S) = SECTION, (PG) = PAGE, (P) = PARAGRAPH, (F) = FIGURE, (T) = TABLE

(B) VALIDATION OR VERIFICATION METHOD: (P) = PERFORMANCE, (S) = SIMULATION, (A) = ANALYSIS (TABLE-TOP)

V/VS-1/(V/VS-2 blank)
BLA
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Table of Contents

PAGE

SECTION I Systems Description and Operation 1-1*

SECTION II Normal Procedures 2-1

SECTION III Defensive Systems Abnormal Operations

and Malfunction Analysis 3-1

SECTION IV Crew Duties **

SECTION V Operating Limitations **

SECTION VI Flight Characteristics **

SECTION VII All Weather Operation **

Glossary Glossary 1

Alphabetical Index Index 1

* Classified Defensive Systems Information is contained in T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1

** Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1.

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS - Titles included in alphabetical index

Change 10 i
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Before operating the B-52 aircraft

read the following pages carefully!
SCOPE. This manual provides the electronic warfare officer with a general knowl-
edge of the defensive systems on the B-52H aircraft, their characteristics, and specif-
ic normal procedures, systems abnormal operating procedures and systems malfunc-
tion analysis. This manual, when used with T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1, provides detailed
operating procedures and technical description of the defensive systems. Instruc-
tions in this manual are for a crew inexperienced in the operation of this aircraft.
This manual provides the best possible operating instructions under most circum-
stances, but it is a poor substitute for sound judgment.

COMPLEMENTARY MANUALS. This manual must be used with one or more of the fol-
lowing manuals to obtain all the information necessary for safe and efficient
operation of the B-52H aircraft. These manuals have been separated from this man-
ual for your convenience in handling information which may be classified, applicable
only to certain aircraft configurations, or used only by certain crewmembers.
T.O. 1B-52H-1 B-52H Flight Manual
T.O. 1B-52H-1-12 B-52H Radar Navigator’s/Navigator’s Manual
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 B-52H Electronic Warfare Officer’s Manual Classified
Supplement (SECRET) (Title Unclassified)

PERMISSIBLE OPERATIONS. The Flight Manual takes a ‘‘positive approach’’ and

normally states only what you can do. Unusual operations or configurations are
prohibited unless specifically covered herein. Clearance from the using command
must be obtained before any questionable operation, which is not specifically per-
mitted in this manual, is attempted. Before granting the clearance, the using com-
mand may request coordination or engineering assistance/approval from Oklahoma
City ALC. Request should be made through the Flight Manual Manager.

HOW TO BE ASSURED OF HAVING LATEST DATA. Refer to T.O. 0-1-1-2 for a listing of
all current flight manuals, safety, or operational supplements, and checklists. Also,
check the flight manual cover page, the title block of each safety and operational
supplement and all status pages attached to formal safety and operational supple-
ments. Clear up all discrepancies before flight.

ii Change 10
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ARRANGEMENT. The manual is divided into seven fairly independent sections to sim-
plify reading it straight through or using it as a reference manual.

SAFETY SUPPLEMENTS. Information involving safety will be promptly forwarded to

you in a safety supplement. Urgent information is published in interim safety sup-
plements and transmitted by teletype. Formal supplements are mailed. The supple-
ment title block and status page (published with formal supplement only) should be
checked to determine the supplement’s effect on the manual and other outstanding
supplements.

OPERATIONAL SUPPLEMENTS. Information involving changes to operating proce-

dures will be forwarded to you by operational supplements. The procedure for han-
dling operational supplements is the same as for safety supplements.

CHECKLISTS. The flight manual contains itemized procedures with necessary ampli-
fications. The checklist contains itemized procedures without the amplification. Pri-
mary line items in the flight manual and checklist are identical. If a formal safety or
operational supplement affects your checklist, the affected checklist page will be at-
tached to the supplement. Cut it out and insert it over the affected page but never
discard the checklist page in case the supplement is rescinded and the page is need-
ed.

FLIGHT MANUAL BINDERS. Looseleaf binders and sectionalized tabs are available for
use with your manual. They are obtained through local purchase procedures and are
listed in the Federal Supply Schedule (FSC Group 75, Office Supplies, Part 1).
Check with your supply personnel for assistance in procuring these items.

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES. The following definitions apply to ‘‘Warnings,’’

‘‘Cautions,’’ and ‘‘Notes’’ found throughout the manual.

Operating procedures, techniques, etc, which could result in personal

injury or loss of life if not carefully followed.

Operating procedures, techniques, etc, which could result in damage to

equipment if not carefully followed.

NOTE

An operating procedure, technique, etc, which is considered essential to

emphasize.

SHALL, WILL, SHOULD, and MAY. The following definitions apply to the words:

SHALL or WILL The instructions or procedures prefaced by ‘‘shall’’ or ‘‘will’’

are mandatory.

SHOULD Normally used to indicate a preferred but nonmandatory

method of accomplishment.

MAY An acceptable or suggested means of accomplishment.

iii
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CHANGE SYMBOLS. Changes to existing material and addition of new material are
indicated by one of three types of symbols determined by the nature of the material
affected. Text material utilizes a vertical line in the margin adjacent to the affected
area. New illustrations (figures) utilize a vertical line in the outer margin of the
page. Photographs and line drawings use a miniature pointing hand to highlight the
affected area. Diagrams and schematics utilize a grey tone (screening) to highlight
the affected area. Change symbols are not used for blank space resulting from dele-
tions, indexes, and tabular data where changes cannot be identified, relocation of
material, or correction of minor inaccuracies unless such correction changes the
meaning.

YOUR RESPONSIBILITY – TO LET US KNOW. Every effort is made to keep the Flight
Manual current. Review conferences with operating personnel and a constant review
of accident and flight test reports assure inclusion of the latest data in the manual.
However, we cannot correct an error unless we know of its existence. In this regard,
it is essential that you do your part. Comments, corrections, and questions regarding
this manual, supplementary manuals, checklists, or any phase of the Flight Manual
program are welcomed. These should be forwarded to your local standardization/eva-
luation unit and routed as directed by AFI 11-215 to the Flight Manual Manager,
327 BMSG/EN, Tinker AFB, Oklahoma 73145-3021.

iv Change 13
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Aircraft Coding

The information contained in this manual covers all B-52H aircraft. USAF Serial numbers
are used to distinguish information related to one aircraft or group of aircraft from that
which is applicable to the other aircraft. When serial numbers appear by a paragraph or
illustration, the information applies only to the aircraft represented by the serial numbers.
Where no serial numbers appear on a paragraph or illustration, the information is applicable
to all B-52H aircraft.
• Symbol means ‘‘thru’’ or ‘‘on.’’ Example:
60-001 60-015 – Identifies B-52H AF60-001 thru AF60-015
61-016 – Identifies B-52H AF61-016 and on
• AIRCRAFT NO LONGER IN SERVICE
• CS Aircraft modified by TCTO 1B-52H-756 (Integrated Conventional Stores
Management System)
• # Aircraft not CSRL capable

USAF B-52H Serial No.

60-001 CS 60-022 CS 60-043 CS 61-001 61-021 CS

60-002 # 60-023 CS 60-044 CS 61-002 CS 61-022 CS
60-003 CS 60-024 # 60-045 CS 61-003 CS 61-023 CS
60-004 CS 60-025 CS 60-046 CS 61-004 CS 61-024 CS
60-005 # 60-026 CS 60-047 61-005 # 61-025 #
60-006 60-027 60-048 # 61-006 CS 61-026
60-007 CS 60-028 60-049 CS 61-007 CS 61-027 CS
60-008 60-029 CS 60-050 CS 61-008 CS 61-028
60-009 CS 60-030 60-051 CS 61-009 CS 61-029 CS
60-010 CS 60-031 CS 60-052 CS 61-010 CS 61-030
60-011 CS 60-032 CS 60-053 61-011 CS 61-031 CS
60-012 # 60-033 CS 60-054 61-012 # 61-032 CS
60-013 CS 60-034 CS 60-055 61-013 CS 61-033
60-014 CS 60-035 CS 60-056 61-014 # 61-034 #
60-015 CS 60-036 60-057 CS 61-015 # 61-035 #
60-016 CS 60-037 CS 60-058 CS 61-016 CS 61-036
60-017 CS 60-038 CS 60-059 CS 61-017 CS 61-037
60-018 CS 60-039 60-060 CS 61-018 # 61-038 CS
60-019 CS 60-040 60-061 CS 61-019 CS 61-039 CS
60-020 CS 60-041 CS 60-062 CS 61-020 CS 61-040
60-021 # 60-042

Change 4 v
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Personnel Coding

Where necessary to distinguish (P) Pilot (IP) Instructor Pilot

crewmembers, the following (CP) Copilot (IN) Instructor Navigator
code letters will be used (N) Navigator (DI) Defense Instructor
(G) Gunner (GC) Ground Crew
(RN) Radar Navigator (10th) Tenth Crewmember
(EW) EW Officer

The amplified checklist describes in detail the steps to be completed. Each major
part of multi-crewmember checklists has been assigned to a crewmember to be read
by that crewmember, and to be accomplished by others in the crew. When necessary
to show which crewmember will accomplish certain steps, the normal crew coding is
used and the code letters will appear after the response to each step. Where a dash
(-) is used in crew coding, such as P-CP, P-CP-RN, or any combination of crewmem-
bers, each crewmember will accomplish the step. Where a slash (/) is used, such as
P/CP, either crewmember will accomplish the step. A verbal response will be given
by the crewmember(s) performing the action. There are exceptions to the verbal re-
sponse as some of the checklists are to be accomplished silently. When a single crew-
member is responsible for a checklist and accomplishment of all items, no crew cod-
ing will appear. All duties and responsibilities of the aerial gunner are deleted. Any
crew member occupying the gunner’s ejection seat will continue to be referred to as
“Gunner”.

vi
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Retrofit Coding

The following code symbols along with the word ‘‘Less’’ are used to distinguish information
related to aircraft that have the described retrofit change incorporated from that which is
applicable to aircraft not yet retrofitted. This list contains only TCTO’s currently active.
Those known to be completed are not included.
CODING EXAMPLE: DR T.O. 1B-52H-792, Installation of IU/TACAN Replacement on
B-52H aircraft. Information applicable to aircraft until they are modified in accordance with
T.O. 1B-52H-792 will be coded Less DR . Information applicable to aircraft modified in accor-
dance with T.O. 1B-52H-792 will be coded DR .

SYMBOL T.O. NO. TITLE

⎧1B-52H-753 Installation of Global Positioning System (GPS) on B-52H Aircraft (ECP 0109).
CS ⎨
⎩1B-52H-756 Installation of Integrated Conventional Stores Management System (ICSMS) on
B-52H Aircraft (ECP 0109).
CH
DJ 1B-52H-749 Installation of AN/ARC-210(V) V/UHF Radio on B-52H Aircraft.
CH
DS None Replacement of ALR-20 Indicator (IP-1168) with ALR-20 Indicator (IP-1168B) on
B-52H Aircraft.

CH
DT 1B-52H-798 Installation of Electronic Countermeasures Improvement on all B-52H Aircraft.

CH
DZ 1B-52H-796 Removal of CM-442 Signal Processor, Part Number 327370-6 and Replacement
with CM-479 Signal Processor, Part Number 9284225-2 on all B-52H Aircraft.
[AMI] 1B-52H-830 Replacement of Ballistics Computer Set AN/AYQ-10 and Inertial Navigation System
AN/ASN-136 on B-52H Aircraft. Baseline for [AMI] includes DJ .

Change 13 vii
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

The B-52H Stratofortress

viii
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Defensive Systems
Operation and Procedures section I

table of contents page

THE AIRCRAFT 1-3

RECEIVER SYSTEMS 1-13

AN/ALR-20A SEARCH RECEIVER 1-13

RADAR WARNING RECEIVER 1-27

SENSOR INTEGRATION SYSTEM 1-43

BLANKING SYSTEM 1-55

TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS 1-57

AN/ALT-16A 1-57

AN/ALT-28(V) JAMMING TRANSMITTER 1-57

AN/ALT-32A JAMMING TRANSMITTER 1-57

RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS 1-63

AN/ALQ-172 COUNTERMEASURES SET 1-63

AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEM 1-75

AN/ALQ-153(V) TAIL WARNING SYSTEM 1-83

AN/ALQ-155(V) POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 1-92

EXPENDABLE COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEMS 1-103

AN/ALE-24 DISPENSER SET 1-103

AN/ALE-20 FLARE EJECTOR SET 1-113

Change 7 1-1/(1-2 blank)

BLA

THE AIRCRAFT
DESCRIPTION
The Boeing B-52 ‘‘Stratofortress’’ aircraft is of the
land based heavy bombardment class designed for
long range flight at high speed and altitude. The
tactical mission is the destruction of surface objec-
tives by bombs and missiles. The aircraft has provi-
sions for ten crewmembers: a basic crew of five,
three instructors and two additional crewmembers.
The basic crew consists of pilot, copilot, radar navi-
gator, navigator and electronic warfare officer. The
instructor crew includes an instructor pilot, instruc-
tor navigator and instructor electronic warfare offi-
cer. Finally, the gunner and tenth man positions are
also available for additional seating. A highly vari-
able weapons load may be carried on external py-
lons in combination with internal cluster, multiple
carriage clip-in or CSRL mounted weapons loads.
NOTE
AGM-86C/D missiles will not be carried in
mixed loads with AGM-86B or AGM-129.
The CSRL can carry up to eight AGM-86B/86C/D,
B-61, or B-83 weapons internally. These weapon
loads cannot be mixed on the CSRL.
The aircraft can suspend a variety of gravity weap-
ons internally on either clip-in (two MHU-20 racks,
up to eight weapons total) or cluster rack assem-
blies (three cluster rack assemblies, up to 27 weap-
ons total). Externally, the B-52 can suspend weap-
ons using an AGM-28 pylon under each wing with
standard rack adapter beams attached to each py-
lon and two sets of multiple ejector racks (MER)
giving a total external carriage capability of 24
weapons. The heavy stores adapter beam (HSAB)
can be attached to a stub pylon and up to nine
MAU-12 bomb racks can be attached to each HSAB
for a total external carriage capability on the HSAB
of up to 18 weapons.
SPECIAL FEATURES
The aircraft is characterized by swept wings and
empennage, four underslung nacelles housing eight
turbofan engines, a quadricycle main landing gear,
and a tip gear near each outboard engine nacelle.
Engine bleed air provides the air supply for air con-
ditioning and anti-icing. Cartridge starters are in-
stalled to provide for engine starts without assis-
tance from an auxiliary air cart or auxiliary electri-
cal power cart. Primary electrical power is 205-volt
ac and is provided by four engine-driven genera-
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
tors. Hydraulic pressure is supplied by six engine-
driven hydraulic pumps and two electric motor-
driven hydraulic pumps. Primary pitch and yaw
control is maintained by hydraulically actuated
rudder and elevators. Lateral control is maintained
by operation of hydraulically actuated spoilers. By
varying the method of control, these same spoilers
serve as airbrakes. The entire horizontal stabilizer
is moved by a hydraulic mechanism to provide pitch
trim. A steering and crosswind crab system pro-
vides steering of the forward main landing gear and
also properly positions both forward and rear main
landing gear for crosswind landings. A hydraulical-
ly driven revolver-type launcher installation in the
aft bomb bay provides umbilical and ejector rack
connections for the weapons which may be
launched/released automatically or manually by the
navigators. The weapon/missile equipment inter-
faces with the AN/ASQ-176 offensive avionics sys-
tem, AN/APN-224 radar altimeter, and the aircraft
electrical, bleed air, and body hydraulic systems.
Weapon selective jettison capability is available to
the navigator and radar navigator. Either the
Weapons Control Panel (WCP) or backup MFD dis-
play and the keyboard may be used for computer
controlled safe jettison of individual or multiple
weapons. The pilot is provided with an ejector un-
lock consent switch and a prearm consent switch
(cooperative with the WCP on the navigators’ front
panel), a launcher hydraulic system selector switch,
and a bomb bay and missile jettison control which
will jettison all weapons from the aircraft. The pilot
is also provided with pylon jettison switches and
pylon jettison consent switches. The Radar Naviga-
tor is provided with a bomb bay and missile jettison
switch, which will jettison only conventional gravity
weapons. This switch is inoperative for all CSRL
gravity weapons and all nuclear and conventional
missiles.
For additional information with missiles installed
refer to T.O. 1B-52H-30-1 for AGM-129 missiles;
T.O. 1B-52H-30-4 for AGM-86B missiles; and T.O.
1B-52H-34-2-9 for AGM-86C/D missiles.
An electro-optical viewing system (EVS) is installed
to provide pilots and navigators with a visual pre-
sentation of the area ahead of the aircraft during
both day and night missions.
A GPS Navigation System which provides position
updates and emulated TACAN data to the crew and
a moving map display to the pilots has been added.
Change 14 1-3
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

An Air Force Satellite Communications System AN/ALE-20 Flare Ejector Set

(AFSATCOM) terminal is installed and is a half-du-
plex UHF terminal providing communications in The following B-52H aircraft systems which may be
both line-of-sight (LOS) and satellite modes. A dual applicable to the EW Officer are contained in T.O.
modem capability DL has been added to the 1B-52H-1.
AFSATCOM. The Airborne Miniature Receive Ter-
minal (MRT) AN/ARR-85(V) is installed to provide
• DOORS AND WINDOWS
reliable VLF/LF reception and printout of secure • OXYGEN SYSTEM
and nonsecure messages at extended ranges in nu- • EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
clear and/or jamming environments. • ESCAPE SYSTEMS
DIMENSIONS
• ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS
• LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
Wing Span 185 feet • PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS (Air Conditioning and
Fuselage Length 159 feet 4 inches Pressurization)
Height
To top of fin 40 feet 8 inches
• INSTRUMENTS
Fin folded 21 feet 6 inches • NAVIGATION RADIOS
Tread • COMMUNICATION AND ASSOCIATED
Centerline outboard ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
main tires 11 feet 4 inches • MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT.
Centerline tip gear
to tip gear 148 feet 5 inches For classified information on B-52H defensive sys-
tems refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1.
For aircraft turning radius and minimum ground
clearance, refer to Section II of T.O. 1B-52H-1. GROUND COOLING
DEFENSIVE SYSTEMS The critical cooling requirements of the ECM equip-
ment demand some precautions during ground
The following B-52H defensive systems are covered operation. Ground cooling must be supplied to the
in this manual: applicable ram air inlet or aircraft compartment
• RECEIVER SYSTEMS when extended ground operation of ECM equip-
ment is conducted. For ECM equipment time and
AN/ALR-20A Search Receiver temperature limitations without ground cooling
Radar Warning Receiver (RWR) equipment, see Section II, ECM EQUIPMENT
Sensor Integration System OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS.
• BLANKING SYSTEM
• TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT CIRCUIT PROTECTION
SYSTEM DATA FLOW DIAGRAMS
AND
AN/ALT-16A
AN/ALT-28(V) Jamming Transmitter The description section of each piece of defensive
AN/ALT-32A Jamming Transmitter equipment contains basic system power require-
• RECEIVER TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS ments and the location of inflight accessible circuit
breakers. Defensive systems circuit breakers and
AN/ALQ-172 Countermeasures Set their locations are listed in Section III of this manu-
AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A Countermeasures al. For more detailed information on power require-
System ments and system data flow diagrams, refer to
AN/ALQ-153(V) Tail Warning System T.O.’s 1B-52H-1-13-1, 1B52G-2-20 and -20-1. For
AN/ALQ-155(V) Power Management System locations of all circuit breakers accessible in flight
• EXPENDABLE COUNTERMEASURES
and additional circuit protection information, refer
to the applicable subsection in Section I of T.O.
SYSTEMS 1B-52H-1.
AN/ALE-24 Dispenser Set

1-4 Change 11

PREFLIGHT AND OPERATIONAL CHECKS
ECM equipment preflight, operational checks,
safety checks, and the dispensing of expendables
will be in accordance with the EW officer’s check-
lists contained in Section II and procedures out-
lined in other governing directives.
AIRCREW EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
Section III of T.O. 1B-52H-1 contains the aircrew
emergency procedures for all crewmembers.
ABNORMAL OPERATION AND
MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS
For abnormal operation and malfunction analysis of
B-52H defensive systems see Section III. For clas-
sified information on B-52H defensive systems refer
to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1.
EW OFFICER’S STATION
Figure 1-1 illustrates the layout of a typical EW of-
ficers station.
ECM ANTENNAS
The antennas illustrated in figure 1-2 reflect stan-
dard loading for B-52H aircraft. Actual aircraft con-
figuration may vary with antenna availability, for
ECM systems configuration, and special mission
requirements. For more detailed information of
ECM jamming antennas and antenna radiation
patterns, refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1.
TRANSMITTER ANTENNA TYPES
Figure 1-3 antenna drawings are provided to famil-
iarize the EW officer with the physical shape and
orientation of the externally mounted transmitter
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
antennas. Those transmitter antennas completely
enclosed in shrouds and/or with no distinctive
shape have not been pictured. Due to loading stabil-
ity and enclosed locations, individual receiver
antennas have not been included.
ANTENNA PATTERNS
The antenna patterns contained in T.O.
1B-52H-1-13-1 are antenna gain patterns illus-
trated in terms of isotropic gain (maximum sensi-
tivity of the antenna in all directions). The antenna
patterns are typical and their limitations must be
recognized if they are to be used effectively. The iso-
tropic gain of unity for each antenna is established
by determining the maximum omnidirectional sen-
sitivity of the antenna. The complete three dimen-
sional pattern coverage determines this value for
each pattern. The basis for this measurement
therefore is relative only to one antenna. Compari-
son of one antenna pattern with another to estab-
lish relative merit is not possible since the isotropic
value for each antenna will differ. It should be
emphasized that these patterns indicate only the
degree of efficiency of a particular antenna installa-
tion in different elevations and azimuths. The dis-
tance values on the patterns are merely distanced
to the ground for a particular elevation angle when
flying at 50,000 feet altitude and do not necessarily
indicate the receiving capability of a particular set.
While antenna gain has a direct bearing on receiv-
ing capabilities of the aircraft, other parameters
such as threat radar transmitted power, sensitivity
of receiver aboard the aircraft, losses involved in
transmission lines, frequency, etc, must be known
to obtain actual receiving capabilities. For example,
a threat radar with a very strong signal might be
effectively received by an antenna with one-half iso-
tropic gain at the threat distance and direction
while a threat radar with a very weak signal might
not be detected by an antenna with twice isotropic
gain at the threat distance and direction.
1-5
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

EW Officer’s Station (Typical)

DT

Figure 1-1 (Sheet 1 of 4)

1-6 Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

1 LIGHT CONTROL PANEL 28 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER

2 SPOTLIGHT (SYSTEMS 1 & 2)
3 ALT-32L CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 20) 29 MAIN REFUEL VALVE EMERGENCY CONTROL
4 ALE-24 SELECTOR CONTROL PANEL LEVER
5 ALE-20 FLARE PROGRAMMING CONTROL 30 SPECIAL WEAPONS MANUAL LOCK HANDLE
PANEL STOWAGE BRACKET
6 ALT-16A CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 21) 31 SPECIAL WEAPONS MANUAL LOCK HANDLE
7 ESCAPE HATCH 32 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
8 OXYGEN REGULATOR (SYSTEMS 3 & 5)
9 ALQ-122 CONTROL MONITOR 33 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
10 ALR-20A CONTROL PANEL (SYSTEMS 4 & 8)
11 SIDE PANEL FLOOD LIGHTS 34 INTERPHONE FOOT SWITCH
12 DT ALQ-172 AUXILIARY PANEL 35 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
13 DT ALQ-172 CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (CDU) (SYSTEMS 6 & 13)
14 UPPER AISLE AND ENTRY LIGHT 36 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
15 UPPER AIR OUTLET (SYSTEMS 7 & 14)
16 ALR-20A INDICATOR 37 ALT-16A CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 9)
17 ECM CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL 38 INTERPHONE CONTROL PANELS (2)
18 ALQ-172 LOW PRESSURE WARNING AND 39 ALE-24 PROGRAMMER CONTROL PANEL
BLANKING PANEL 40 AERP BLOWER ELECTRICAL CONNECTER
19 RWR CONTROL INDICATOR 41 AERP BLOWER MOUNTING BRACKET
20 EMERGENCY ALARM LIGHT 42 ASHTRAY
21 ALQ-153 CONTROL INDICATOR PANEL 43 ALT-32H CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 11)
22 SI MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY 44 ALT-32H CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 12)
23 TEMPERATURE CONTROL PANEL 45 MAIN CONSOLE LIGHT CONTROL PANEL
24 SI CONTROL PANEL 46 OXYGEN BOTTLE RECHARGER
25 MASTER EXPENDABLES CONTROL PANEL 47 PORTABLE OXYGEN BOTTLE
26 ALR-20A LOOK THRU PANEL 48 GROUND EMERGENCY EGRESS HANDLE
27 ALT-28 ANTENNA SELECTOR PANEL 49 ESCAPE ROPE CONTAINER

Figure 1-1 (Sheet 2 of 4)

Change 9 1-6A
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

EW Officer’s Station (Typical) (Cont)

Less DT

Figure 1-1 (Sheet 3 of 4)

1-6B Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

1 LIGHT CONTROL PANEL 28 ALT-28 ANTENNA SELECTOR PANEL

2 SPOTLIGHT 29 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
3 ALQ-122 CONTROL MONITOR (SYSTEMS 1 & 2)
4 OXYGEN REGULATOR 30 MAIN REFUEL VALVE EMERGENCY CONTROL
5 ALT-32H CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 12) LEVER
6 ALT-32L CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 20) 31 SPECIAL WEAPONS MANUAL LOCK HANDLE
7 ALE-20 FLARE PROGRAMMING CONTROL STOWAGE BRACKET
PANEL 32 SPECIAL WEAPONS MANUAL LOCK HANDLE
8 ESCAPE HATCH 33 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
9 RWR CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEMS 3 & 5)
10 ALR-20A CONTROL PANEL 34 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
11 SIDE PANEL FLOOD LIGHTS (SYSTEMS 4 & 8)
12 ALE-24 PROGRAMMER CONTROL PANEL 35 INTERPHONE FOOT SWITCH
13 ALE-24 SELECTOR CONTROL PANEL 36 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
14 UPPER AISLE AND ENTRY LIGHT (SYSTEMS 6 & 13)
15 UPPER AIR OUTLET 37 ALQ-155 CONTROL INDICATOR PROGRAMMER
16 ALR-20A INDICATOR (SYSTEMS 7 & 14)
17 ECM CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL 38 INTERPHONE CONTROL PANELS
18 ALQ-172 LOW PRESSURE WARNING AND 39 ALT-32H CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 11)
BLANKING PANEL 40 AERP BLOWER ELECTRICAL CONNECTER
19 ALQ-172 CONTROL INDICATOR 41 AERP BLOWER MOUNTING BRACKET
20 EMERGENCY ALARM LIGHT 42 ASHTRAY
21 ALQ-172 CONTROL MONITOR 43 ALT-16A CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 9)
22 ALQ-153 CONTROL INDICATOR PANEL 44 ALT-16A CONTROL INDICATOR (SYSTEM 21)
23 SI MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY 45 MAIN CONSOLE LIGHT CONTROL PANEL
24 TEMPERATURE CONTROL PANEL 46 OXYGEN BOTTLE RECHARGER
25 SI CONTROL PANEL 47 PORTABLE OXYGEN BOTTLE
26 MASTER EXPENDABLES CONTROL PANEL 48 GROUND EMERGENCY EGRESS HANDLE
27 ALR-20A LOOK THRU PANEL 49 ESCAPE ROPE CONTAINER

Figure 1-1 (Sheet 4 of 4)

Change 9 1-7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ECM Antenna Locations

1A TRANSMIT ANTENNA (ALQ-172, SYSTEM 16) 11 G/H-BND CONICAL HORN/SLOT ALQ-155 SYS 6
1 PHASED ARRAY (ALQ-172 TRANSMIT/ 12 G/H-BND CONICAL HORN/SLOT ALQ-155 SYS 4
RECEIVER, SYSTEM 16) (ONE EACH SIDE) 13 G/H-BND CONICAL HORN/SLOT ALQ-155 SYS 2
2 SCIMITAR OR DIPOLE (ALR-20A, TN-390A, 14 HORN (ALQ-172 OMNI RECEIVE SYSTEM 16)
AND TN-391A) (ALT-28 MONITOR) 15 H/I-BAND (ALQ-155, SYSTEM 2)
3 A/B BAND SCIMITAR (ALR-20A, TN-386A) 16 H/I-BAND (ALQ-155, SYSTEM 1)
4 LEFT WINGTIP (ALT-32A, SYSTEM 20) 17 RWR ANTENNA
5 RIGHT WINGTIP (ALR-20A, TN-386A) 18 HELIX (ALR-20A, TN-388A)
6 G/H-BND CONICAL HORN/SLOT ALQ-155 SYS 1 19 SPIRAL (ALR-20A, TN-387A)
7 G/H-BND CONICAL HORN/SLOT ALQ-155 SYS 3 20 HELIX (ALR-20A, TN-389A)
8 E/F-BND CONICAL HORN/SLOT ALQ-155 SYS 5 21 HORN (ALR-20A, TN-390A)
9 D/E-BND CONICAL HORN/SLOT ALQ-155 SYS 7 22 I/J-BAND HORN (ALR-20A, TN-391A FWD)
10 E/F-BND CONICAL HORN/SLOT ALQ-155 SYS 8 23 C-BAND DIPOLE ARRAY (ALT-16A, AS-3087A)

Figure 1-2 (Sheet 1 of 2)

1-8 Change 10
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

24 C-BAND WINGED BLADE 30 D/E-BAND CONICAL HORN/SLOT

(ALQ-122/ALT-16A, SYSTEM 9) (ALQ-155, SYSTEM 14)
25 ALQ-153 (AS-3193) ANTENNA (LEFT SIDE VIEW, 31 A/B-BAND BLADE (ALT-32A, SYSTEM 12)
RIGHT SIDE OPPOSITE) 32 I/J-BAND HORN (ALR-20A, TN-391A AFT)
26 HORN (ALQ-172 OMNI RECEIVE SYSTEM 15) (ONE EACH SIDE FUSELAGE)
27 RWR ANTENNA (ONE EACH SIDE) 33 PHASED ARRAY (ALQ-172 TRANSMIT/
28 A/B-BAND BLADE (ALT-32A, SYSTEM 11) RECEIVER, SYSTEM 15)
29 E/F-BAND CONICAL HORN/SLOT
(ALQ-155, SYSTEM 13)

Figure 1-2 (Sheet 2 of 2)

Change 10 1-9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Transmitter Antenna Types

Figure 1-3 (Sheet 1 of 2)

1-10
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Figure 1-3 (Sheet 2 of 2)

1-11/(1-12 blank)
BLA

RECEIVER SYSTEMS
AN/ALR-20A SEARCH RECEIVER
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
RADAR WARNING RECEIVER
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
OPERATIONAL MODES
GUNNER STATION
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
NORMAL OPERATION
SENSOR INTEGRATION SYSTEM
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
NORMAL OPERATION
AN/ALR-20A SEARCH RECEIVER
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The AN/ALR-20A receiving set provides the capa-
bility of simultaneously surveying, detecting, and
displaying all radio frequency transmissions in the
frequency band covered. Onboard OAS Radar Set
transmitter is blanked to prevent display of the
transmitted signals. The receiving set is tied in
with the ALT-32A and ALT-16A jamming transmit-
ters to enable the EW officer to look through the
jamming signal. Audio examination of the received
signals is accomplished through tie-in with the in-
terphone system. Self-test features provide compre-
hensive checks of the receiving set on the ground or
during flight. AN/ALR-20A component locations are
shown in figure 1-4. The AN/ALR-20A controls and
indicators are contained in figure 1-10.
System Function
Seven radio frequency tuners are provided to cover
the system frequency spectrum. System operation
is controlled from the C-9449/ALR-20A receiving
set control and the IP-1168/ALR-20A indicator Less
DS , or IP-1168B/ALR-20A indicator DS .
Two modes of operation are provided to operate the
tuners and the display of the ALR-20A receiving
system. The primary mode is the automatic mode
(SWEEP WIDTH control in MAX). In this mode, all
tuners are tuned by a linear rising sawtooth. The
system responds to both cw and modulated signals.
Special circuits are used to intensify the received
signals for ease of identification on the indicator.
The secondary mode of operation is the manual
mode (SWEEP WIDTH control less than MAX).
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
1-13
1-13
1-15
1-23
1-27
1-27
1-28
1-31
1-31
1-36
1-42K
1-43
1-43
1-43
1-46
1-53
This mode allows the operator to singularly tune a
selected tuner through the use of the MAN FREQ
CONTROL. In order to facilitate frequency identifi-
cation, an intensified spot is placed on the selected
trace at a position corresponding to the tuner fre-
quency. Special provisions for audio examination of
the received signals are also provided when
SWEEP WIDTH control is in AUDIO. The audio
output feeds into the interphone system enabling
the operator to further evaluate the received signal
and aid in the determination of approximate pulse
repetition frequency.
The C-4782/ALR-20 control enables the operator to
look through his own jammer signals to survey
other signals in the band. This look through is
accomplished with a minimum of jammer signal
interruption. In look through operation, the jam-
mers remain on continuously for 50% of the sweep
time. During the 50% look through period, the jam-
mers are chopped on and off. The 50% look through
period shifts from left to right such that in not less
than 10 sweep periods, it is possible to look at sig-
nals across the full band.
POWER DISTRIBUTION
The master power supply, PP-3406A/ALR-20A, pro-
vides the main low voltage regulated power for the
system. Input aircraft electrical power supplied to
the power supply is 115-vac, three-phase, 400-Hz
power and 28-vdc power. Special high voltage power
supplies are provided for each tuner and for the
cathode ray tube in the indicator. System power
and operation are controlled from the IP-1168/
ALR-20A indicator Less DS , or IP-1168B/ALR-20A
indicator DS and the C-9449/ALR-20A receiver
control.
Change 7 1-13
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
RECEIVING AND DISPLAY
The receiving and display circuits are comprised of
those circuits which receive, process, and display
detected RF energy within the frequency range of
the RF tuners. Two modes of operation are used to
control the tuners and the display of the ALR-20A
system. The primary mode of operation is the auto-
matic mode (SWEEP WIDTH control in MAX). In
this mode, all tuners are tuned throughout their
frequency range by a linear rising sawtooth signal
(tuning signal). The secondary mode of operation is
the manual mode (SWEEP WIDTH control less
than MAX). This mode allows the operator to
manually tune a selected tuner by selecting the
sweep length with the SWEEP WIDTH control and
positioning the selected sweep length with the
MAN FREQ CONTROL. In order to facilitate fre-
quency identification, an intensified spot (audio
dot) is displayed on the selected trace at a position
corresponding approximately to the tuner fre-
quency when the SWEEP WIDTH control is in
AUDIO.
DS
An arrow is displayed below the audio dot. The fre-
quency corresponding to the location of audio dot is
displayed below the left side of the trace.
The low frequency tuner TN-386A/ALR-20A is func-
tionally different from the other tuners. The input
circuitry to this tuner is such that RF energy from
two antennas is applied to six tuner modules which
make up the tuner bandwidth.
Each of the TN-387A/ALR-20A thru TN-391A/
ALR-20A RF tuners is identical in function. Each
unit is tuned across its frequency range by means
of a magnetically tunable filter.
The C-9449/ALR-20A receiver control contains all
circuitry necessary to generate the top-chop and
bottom-chop signals, the main sweep (tuning sig-
nal), main sweep retrace blanking and wobble, and
indicator intensity signals. In addition, circuitry for
processing video, video test signals expanded video
and audio is contained within the control unit.
Less DS
The display of video on the IP-1168/ ALR-20A indi-
cator received from the seven system tuners is
accomplished through the use of a special six-gun
cathode ray tube. Trace 1 displays video received
from the TN-386A/ALR-20A tuner through the use
of gun 1. Traces 2 and 3 display video received from
TN-387A/ALR-20A and TN-388A/ ALR-20A tuners
1-14 Change 2
respectively through the use of gun 2. In order to
use a single gun to display two traces, the time
share chopper function generator generates a bot-
tom-chop and then a top-chop signal in a repeating
sequence. When the bottom-chop signal is received
video from the TN-387A/ALR-20A tuner is dis-
played on trace 2. When the top-chop signal is
received, video from the TN-388A/ALR-20A tuner is
displayed on trace 3. Thus, gun 2, on a time-sharing
basis, is used to generate two traces. Indicator guns
3 and 4 are likewise used to display video from the
other four tuners. Indicator guns 5 and 6 are used
in the expand mode only.
DS
The display of video on the IP-1168B/ALR-20A indi-
cator received from the seven system tuners is
accomplished through the use of an anolog to digi-
tal conversion and displayed on the monochrome
cathode ray tube.
Special provisions are made for audio examination
of the received signal while operating in the
manual mode. With the SWEEP WIDTH control in
AUDIO, an intensified spot will be displayed on the
indicator for the corresponding trace. The horizon-
tal position of the intensified spot is controlled by
the MAN FREQ CONTROL. Any received signal at
the frequency indicated by the position of the inten-
sified spot will produce an audio output. The audio
output is routed to the aircraft interphone system.
The operator can evaluate the received signal and
determine the approximate pulse repetition fre-
quency or general type of other modulation.
EXPAND MODE
The expand mode allows the operator to simulta-
neously select received video from any two RF tun-
ers for expansion display on the indicator.
Less DS
Two separate guns within the indicator are used for
the expansion display; gun 5 for expansion trace B
and gun 6 for expansion trace A. Guns 5 and 6 are
also used to display the markers used with expan-
sion A and B traces.
DS
Two separate traces are used for the expansion dis-
play.
The portion of the trace that is expanded is deter-
mined by the settings of the SWEEP WIDTH con-
trol and the MAN FREQ CONTROL.

JAMMER BLANKING
The C-4782/ALR-20 jammer control (figure 1-6)
enables the operator to look through selected on-
board jammer signals to survey other signals in the
band. This look through is accomplished with mini-
mum interruption of the jammer signals. In the
look through mode, the jammers remain on for 90%
of the normal receiver sweep time and the tuners
are blanked out. During the 10% look through time,
the jammers and tuners are chopped on and off at
alternate intervals such that each is on for 100 mi-
croseconds and off for 100 microseconds. The 10%
look through period shifts from left to right such
that in not less than 10 sweep periods, it is possible
to look at signals across the full band.
The four pushbuttons on the front of the jammer
control are spring loaded to the off position. When
look through of a particular jamming signal is de-
sired, the corresponding switch on the front of the
jammer control must be held depressed.
RF TEST MODE
The RF test mode provides a coarse check on the
overall operation of the system. The RF TEST
switch is located on the front of the ALR-20A indi-
cator. Depressing this switch results in an RF test
enable signal being routed through the
PP-3406A/ALR-20A power supply to oscillators
within each of the RF tuners.
VIDEO TEST MODE
Video test permits a complete test of the video cir-
cuits exclusive of the tuner inputs. The video test
circuits are activated by depressing the VIDEO
TEST switch located under the adjustment cover at
the top of the indicator Less DS , or the top of the
front panel DS .
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Receiver-Control (C-9449/ALR-20A)
The receiver-control (figure 1-5) is located in the
left side of the EW officer front panel. The control
panel contains seven sets of three controls, one set
for each of seven tuners. The three controls consist
of a SWEEP WIDTH control, a MAN FREQ CON-
TROL, and an RF LEVEL control. The SWEEP
WIDTH control controls the sweep width of the as-
sociated trace as displayed on the IP-1168/
ALR-20A indicator Less DS , or IP-1168B/ALR-20A
indicator DS and supplied to the tuner when ro-
tated from MAX to AUDIO. When the SWEEP
WIDTH control is in AUDIO, the sweep width will
be approximately zero and an intensified dot will be
displayed on the indicator. The MAN FREQ CON-
TROL is used to position the sweep for a particular
trace, with SWEEP WIDTH control not in AUDIO;
or position the intensified dot for a particular trace,
with the SWEEP WIDTH control in AUDIO. Any
processed video at the frequency indicated by the
intensified dot will be routed to audio amplifier cir-
cuits for analysis by the EW officer through the
interphone system. The RF LEVEL control is used
to adjust the gain of a traveling wave tube amplifi-
er and thus, in turn, the display of received video
on the indicator.
Look Through Panel (C-4782/ALR-20)
The look through panel (figure 1-6) initiates the
“look through” function for the ALR-20A. This func-
tion permits the EW officer to look through his own
jamming transmitter signals. In look through mode
of operation, the jamming effectiveness of the se-
lected aircraft transmitters is reduced by only 10%
of the transmitter duty cycle. This minimizes the
effect of look through on jammer effectiveness and
permits the EW officer to observe and track a
threat signal frequency shift. Controls on the look
through panel consist of four buttons: one for high
frequency ALT-32A, one for low frequency ALT-32A,
one for the ALT-16A and one for all ALT-32A and
ALT-16A transmitters. When any button is
depressed, the output is routed to the look through
logic circuit board of the receiver control which
operates in conjunction with the look through gen-
erator and driver circuits to perform the look
through function.
Change 2 1-15
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
ALR-20A Indicator (IP-1168) And Controls Less DS
The IP-1168 indicator (figure 1-10) is located in the
lower center of the EW officer front panel. In addi-
tion to displaying received signal information, the
panel contains eight primary controls: SCALE
ILLUM, RF TEST, VOLUME, POWER, EXPAN-
SION A, EXPANSION B, LEFT MARK, and
RIGHT MARK. The SCALE ILLUM control is used
for obtaining desired graticule illumination. The RF
TEST switch activates test oscillators located in
each tuner. The signals injected into the tuners by
the oscillators are processed and displayed on the
indicator. If all test signals are present and rela-
tively equal in amplitude, the system can be
assumed to be operating normally. The VOLUME
control sets the desired level of the processed audio
occurring as a result of received video. The POWER
switch has three positions: OFF, STBY, and ON.
OFF position prohibits power from being applied to
any ALR-20A circuits. STBY position permits the
application of power to filaments, heaters, and all
system devices requiring warmup prior to opera-
tion. The two expansion switches, EXPANSION A
and EXPANSION B, have an OFF position and
seven numerical positions, one for each trace. These
two switches permit the expansion of received video
from any two selected traces. The LEFT MARK
control and the RIGHT MARK control positions the
reference markers for expand traces A and B.
NOTE
Some trace 6 strobing and marker jittering
should be considered normal operation and
the degree of strobing requiring mainte-
nance will be determined by the electronic
warfare officer in coordination with the
maintenance technician.
ALR-20A Indicator (IP-1168B) And Controls DS
The IP-1168B indicator (figure 1-10A) is located in
the lower center of the EW officer front panel. In
addition to displaying received signal information,
the panel contains eleven primary controls: MAS-
TER ILLUMINATION, EDGE ILLUMINATION,
SCALE ILLUMINATION, EMITTER PERSIS, RF
TEST, POWER, RIGHT MARK, EXPANSION A,
EXPANSION B, LEFT MARK, and VOLUME. The
three ILLUMINATION controls are used to obtain
the desired display illumination. EMITTER PER-
SIS is used to vary the length of time a signal is
displayed after the actual intercepted signal has
disappeared. The RF TEST switch activates test
1-16 Change 2
oscillators located in each tuner. The signals
injected into the tuners by the oscillators are pro-
cessed and displayed on the indicator. If all test sig-
nals are present and relatively equal in amplitude,
the system can be assumed to be operating nor-
mally. The POWER switch has three positions:
OFF, STBY, and ON. OFF position prohibits power
from being applied to any ALR-20A circuits. STBY
position permits the application of power to fila-
ments, heaters, and all system devices requiring
warmup prior to operation. The LEFT MARK con-
trol and the RIGHT MARK control positions the
reference markers for expand traces A and B. The
two expansion switches, EXPANSION A and
EXPANSION B, have an OFF position and seven
numerical positions, one for each trace. These two
switches permit the expansion of received video
from any two selected traces. The VOLUME control
sets the desired level of the processed audio occur-
ring as a result of received video. In addition, the
indicator BIT SELECT switch in the BIT 1 position
generates a static test screen that provides both in-
dicator internal status information and permits an
assessment of indicator video performance. BIT
Selections BIT 2, BIT 3, and ALIGN are mainte-
nance functions. For a BIT failure, a BIT FAIL mes-
sage is displayed in reverse video below the right
end of Expansion Trace A for both normal and BIT
2 displays.
Power Supply (PP-3406A/ALR-20A)
The power supply (figure 1-7) is located in the up-
per left electrical equipment rack below the crew
bunk. The power supply provides the necessary
supply voltages required by the ALR-20A system,
serves as a junction box for all components of the
system, and contains timing and protection circuits.
The power supply receives prime input power from
the aircraft electrical system consisting of 115-volt
three-phase ac and TR power. Input and output
voltages are protected by fuses located on the front
panel. A voltmeter and selector switch are also
located on the front panel for manual monitoring of
the operating condition of the power supply. When
the ALR-20A system is initially placed ON or in
STBY, a time delay of approximately 1 minute is
actuated which delays application of voltages to all
circuits except system heater circuits, and DS in
addition STBY applies 115 vac to fully power the in-
dicator. The delay will occur automatically even if
the power selector is placed in ON position initially.
The 1-minute time delay is fully reset in the event
power selector is placed to OFF position and then
back to STBY or ON.

RF Tuner (TN-386A/ALR-20A)
The TN-386A/ALR-20A RF tuner (figure 1-8) is lo-
cated in the EW officer compartment. This unit
tunes across its frequency range through the use of
tuner modules. Each of the tuner modules is
switched on electrically at preset intervals of time
and tuned by the voltage-controlled capacitance
tuning elements. In addition to the tuner modules,
the unit contains a video amplifier, ramp pick-off
circuit, frequency control circuits, and a test oscilla-
tor. The test oscillator provides test signals at fre-
quencies.
RF Tuners (TN-387A/ALR-20A through TN-391A/
ALR-20A)
The tuners (figure 1-8) are located as shown in fig-
ure 1-4. Each unit tunes across its frequency range
by means of electronically tunable solid-state fil-
ters. Each unit contains a RF amplifier and asso-
ciated power supply, video detector, log video ampli-
fier, and a test signal generator for self-test.
Blanking Amplifier
ALR-20A OAS blanking is provided through the
blanking amplifier (figure 1-9) which prevents the
triggering of the ALR-20A receiver circuits by the
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
OAS radar. This eliminates the possibility of con-
fusing the aircraft OAS signal with external sig-
nals.
Antennas
Antennas used with the ALR-20A receiving set con-
sist of a scimitar antenna in the forward wheel well
area, a wingtip antenna on the right wing; two
RX-1 antennas located in external blisters on the
left and right sides of section 49; and two RL-1 an-
tennas, two RS-1 antennas, and a 10-30257 anten-
na located in the nose radome. A 4125A monitoring
scimitar or dipole antenna is installed on the un-
derside of the fuselage just forward of the crew en-
trance hatch.
Monitoring Antenna
The monitoring antenna allows monitoring of the
systems operating in the frequency range of the
TN-390A and TN-391A tuners. The monitoring
antenna can be momentarily disconnected, when
look through of jamming signals is desired, by
pressing the ALT-28 MONITOR (OMNI)
pushbutton on the ALT-28 antenna selector panel.
(See ALT-28 ANTENNA SELECTOR PANEL, in
this section.)
Change 2 1-16A/(1-16B blank)
BLA
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-20A Component Locations

Figure 1-4 (Sheet 1 of 2)

1-17
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-20A Component Locations (Cont)

ALR 20A
INDICATOR (A6666)
C 9449/ALR 20A
RECEIVER CONTROL (A6665)

C 4782/ALR 20
JAMMER
CONTROL
(A6695)

EW OFFICER’S STATION

TN 386A/ALR 20A
RF TUNER (A6668)

TO WING TIP
ANTENNA VR 1

ANTENNA AS3102/A
(E6254)
LEFT LOAD CENTRAL ADAPTER UG27D/U

SECTION 41
BLANKING MODULE

PP 3406A/ALR 20A
POWER SUPPLY (A6667)

TN390A/ALR 20A
RF TUNER (A6672)

BLANKING AMPLIFIER (A6585)

TN 389A/ALR 20A RF TUNER (A6671)

TN 388A/ALR 20A RF TUNER (A6670)

TN 387A/ALR 20A RF TUNER (A6669)

UPPER LEFT EQUIPMENT RACK A67339

Figure 1-4 (Sheet 2 of 2)

1-18 Change 2
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

C-9449/ALR-20A Receiver-Control

1 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROL 12 RF LEVEL CONTROL (TN-387A/ALR-20A RF

(TN-391A/ALR-20A RF TUNER, AFT) TUNER)
2 RF LEVEL CONTROL (TN-391A/ALR-20A RF 13 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROL
TUNER, AFT) (TN-386A/ALR-20A RF TUNER)
3 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROL 14 RF LEVEL CONTROL (TN-386A/ALR-20A RF
(TN-391A/ALR-20A RF TUNER, FWD) TUNER)
4 RF LEVEL CONTROL (TN-391A/ALR-20A RF 15 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROL (TN-386A/ALR-20A RF
TUNER, FWD) TUNER)
5 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROL 16 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROL (TN-387A/ALR-20A RF
(TN-390A/ALR-20A RF TUNER) TUNER)
6 RF LEVEL CONTROL (TN-390A/ALR-20A RF 17 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROL (TN-388A/ALR-20A RF
TUNER) TUNER)
7 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROL 18 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROL (TN-389A/ALR-20A RF
(TN-389A/ALR-20A RF TUNER) TUNER)
8 RF LEVEL CONTROL (TN-389A/ALR-20A RF 19 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROL (TN-390A/ALR-20A RF
TUNER) TUNER)
9 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROL 20 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROL (TN-391A/ALR-20A RF
(TN-388A/ALR-20A RF TUNER) TUNER, FWD)
10 RF LEVEL CONTROL (TN-388A/ALR-20A RF 21 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROL (TN-391A/ALR-20A RF
TUNER) TUNER, AFT)
11 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROL
(TN-387A/ALR-20A RF TUNER)
Figure 1-5

1-19
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-20A Look-Thru Panel

1 ALT-32A LOW BAND LOOK THRU BUTTON

2 ALT-32A HIGH BAND LOOK THRU BUTTON
3 ALT-16A LOOK THRU BUTTON
4 “ALL” LOOK THRU BUTTON
Figure 1-6

1-20
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PP-3406A/ALR-20A Power Supply

1 POWER SUPPLY PROTECTION FUSES 5 ELAPSED TIME INDICATOR

2 VOLTAGE MONITOR METER 6 INPUT POWER CONNECTOR
3 EXTERNAL METER CONNECTORS 7 SPARE FUSES
4 VOLTAGE MONITOR METER SELECTOR SWITCH
Figure 1-7

RF Tuners

RF TUNER TN-386A/ALR-20A RF TUNER TN-( )A/ALR-20A

Figure 1-8

1-21
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Blanking Amplifier

1 AN/ALQ-172(V) NO. 15, NO. 16

2 BLANKING OUTPUT TO RWR SIGNAL PROCESSOR
3 BLANKING OUTPUT TO AN/ALR-20A RECEIVER
4 OAS BLANKING INPUT
5 POWER-ON INDICATOR LIGHT
6 POWER RECEPTACLE
7 OPERATING FUSE
8 SPARE FUSE
Figure 1-9

1-22 Change 7
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-20A Controls and Indicators Less DS

IP-1168 CONTROL-INDICATOR
1 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROLS (7) 11 INOPERATIVE
2 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROLS (7) 12 CRT SCREEN
3 RF LEVEL CONTROLS (7) 13 POWER SELECTOR
4 SCALE ILLUMINATION CONTROL 14 RIGHT MARKER CONTROL
5 INTENSITY AND FOCUS ADJUSTMENTS 15 EXPANSION TRACE SELECTOR (B TRACE)
6 HP, V, AST, AND WIDTH ADJUSTMENTS 16 EXPANSION TRACE SELECTOR (A TRACE)
7 VIDEO TEST BUTTON 17 LEFT MARKER CONTROL
8 RF TEST BUTTON 18 VOLUME CONTROL
9 ELAPSED TIME INDICATOR 19 LEFT MARKS
10 RIGHT MARKS
Figure 1-10 (Sheet 1 of 3)

Change 2 1-23
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-20A Controls and Indicators Less DS (Cont)

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

C-9449/ALR-20A CONTROL

1 SWEEP WIDTH Controls (7 places)
Seven sweep width controls, one for each trace, control the width of
sweep of the tuners. The controls are adjustable from 0 to 100%. Only the
selected position of the band is available for viewing and the rest of the
trace is lost. When the control is in MAX position (full CW), the full tuning
range (100%) of the tuner is displayed. When the control is in AUDIO det-
ent (full CCW), a dot will appear at the frequency selected by the manual
frequency control and audio of that frequency is available.

2 Manual Frequency Controls (7 places)
Seven manual frequency controls, one for each trace, control the position
of the tuning range on the main trace when the sweep width control is out
of AUDIO detent. When the sweep width control is in the AUDIO detent,
the manual frequency control controls the position of the dot (frequency)
on the main trace.

3 RF LEVEL Controls (7 places) Seven RF level controls, one for each trace, provide a means of adjusting
the signal strength of the associated bands.

IP-1168/ALR-20A INDICATOR

4 Scale Illumination Control Provides a means of adjusting the illumination of the frequency scale.

5 Intensity and Focus Adjustments Provides means of adjusting trace intensity and focus.

6 HP, V AST, and Width Adjustments Provides means of adjusting trace position, astigmatism, and width.

Adjustments of the intensity, focus, HP, V, AST, and width con-

trols should be accomplished only by ground maintenance per-
sonnel or during SIOP/contingency operations. The use of
extreme care and an insulated screwdriver is recommended
due to the fragile potentiometers and possible contact with high
voltages.

7 VIDEO TEST Button Provides a means of testing the video circuitry exclusive of the tuners.
When depressed, a signal of 3/16 inch minimum in amplitude should
appear at the left edge of each trace (with the RF level control in MAX
position).

8 RF TEST Button For RF test frequencies, refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1)

9 Elapsed Time Indicator Indicates the total elapsed time that the IP-1168/ALR-20A indicator has
been in operation.

10 Right Marks Right reference marks for expand trace A and B.

11 Inoperative

Figure 1-10 (Sheet 2 of 3)

1-24 Change 2
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

IP-1168/ALR-20A INDICATOR (Cont)

12 CRT Screen Provides a panoramic display of intercepted radar signals present within
the frequency range of the ALR-20A system. The CRT screen has seven
main traces representing seven individual bands of frequencies plus two
expansion traces used for closer analysis of any signal appearing on any
of the seven main traces. Intercepted signals are shown as vertical spikes
extending from the baseline of each trace. Signals appearing on the lower
six main traces and the expansion traces appear above the baseline
while signals on main trace No. 7 appear below the baseline. Traces 6
and 7 cover the same frequency range and will display signals received
on the forward and aft tuners, respectively. The height of the spike is an
indication of signal strength and the position of the spike along the base-
line is a measure of the center frequency of the intercepted radar signal.

13 Power Selector STBY position applies power to filaments, heaters, and all system
devices requiring warmup prior to operation. ON position applies all sys-
tem voltages for full operation. OFF position removes all power from the
ALR-20A circuits.

14 Right Marker Control Controls the position of the right marker on both expansion traces.

15 Expansion Trace Selector (B Trace) Provides a means for selecting a main trace for expansion on B trace.
When moved from OFF position to a numbered position, that portion
selected by the sweep width control will be displayed on the appropriate
expansion trace.

16 Expansion Trace Selector (A Trace) Provides a means for selecting a main trace for expansion on A trace.
When moved from OFF position to a numbered position, that portion
selected by the sweep width control will be displayed on the appropriate
expansion trace.

17 Left Marker Control Controls the position of the left marker on both expansion traces.

18 VOLUME Control Provides a means of adjusting the volume of audio received in the
intercom system. Operative only when sweep width control is full CCW
(in detent).

19 Left Marks Left reference marks for expand trace A and B.

Figure 1-10 (Sheet 3 of 3)

Change 2 1-25
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-20A Controls and Indicators DS

IP-1168B CONTROL-INDICATOR
1 SWEEP WIDTH CONTROLS (7) 10 RF TEST BUTTON
2 MANUAL FREQUENCY CONTROLS (7) 11 CRT SCREEN
3 RF LEVEL CONTROLS (7) 12 POWER SELECTOR
4 MASTER ILLUMINATION CONTROL 13 RIGHT MARK CONTROL
5 EDGE ILLUMINATION CONTROL 14 EXPANSION TRACE SELECTOR (B TRACE)
6 SCALE ILLUMINATION CONTROL 15 EXPANSION TRACE SELECTOR (A TRACE)
7 EMITTER PERSISTENCE SELECTOR 16 LEFT MARK CONTROL
8 BIT SELECT SWITCH 17 VOLUME CONTROL
9 VIDEO TEST BUTTON
Figure 1-10A (Sheet 1 of 4)

1-26 Change 2

NO. CONTROL-INDICATOR
C-9449/ALR-20A CONTROL
1 SWEEP WIDTH Controls (7 places)
2 Manual Frequency Controls (7 places)
3 RF LEVEL Controls (7 places)
IP-1168B/ALR-20A INDICATOR
4 MASTER ILLUMINATION Control
5 EDGE ILLUMINATION Control
6 SCALE ILLUMINATION Control
7 EMITTER PERSIS Selector
Figure 1-10A (Sheet 2 of 4)
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
FUNCTION
Seven sweep width controls, one for each trace, control the width of
sweep of the tuners. The controls are adjustable from 0 to 100%. Only the
selected position of the band is available for viewing and the rest of the
trace is lost. When the control is in MAX position (full CW), the full tuning
range (100%) of the tuner is displayed. When the control is in AUDIO det-
ent (full CCW), a dot will appear at the frequency selected by the manual
frequency control and audio of that frequency is available. An arrow is dis-
played below the audio dot. The frequency corresponding to the location
of audio dot is displayed below the left side of the trace.
Seven manual frequency controls, one for each trace, control the position
of the tuning range on the main trace when the sweep width control is out
of AUDIO detent. When the sweep width control is in the AUDIO detent,
the manual frequency control controls the position of the dot (frequency)
on the main trace.
Seven RF level controls, one for each trace, provide a means of adjusting
the signal strength of the associated bands.
Provides a means of adjusting the overall brightness of the CRT screen.
All displayed images including trace video, frequencies, and graticule are
equally affected.
Provides means of adjusting the writing surface edge lighting brightness.
Only user markings are affected.
A sixteen position (0-15) digital selector controls relative brightness of
displayed frequencies and graticule.
NOTE
Rapid movement of the Scale Illumination control may delay
the re-drawing of the displayed frequencies and the graticule.
A sixteen position selector selects one of 5 persistence values. As a mini-
mum, 5 rates are provided: P0 thru P4.
P0 - No electronic persistence. The emitter trace is visible only as long
as it is being received.
P1 - Persistence approximately equal to the IP1168 ALR-20A Indicator
P2 - Increased persistence over P1
P3 - Increased persistence over P2
P4 - Infinite persistence causes the displayed signals to remain displayed
until power is removed or persistence is changed.
NOTE
Operating the system with a P4 level of persistence may de-
grade the operators ability to detect new signals.
Change 2 1-26A
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-20A Controls and Indicators DS (Cont)

NO. CONTROL-INDICATOR FUNCTION

IP-1168B/ALR-20A INDICATOR (Cont)

8 BIT SELECT Switch The BIT SELECT Switch selects display operating mode

NOTE

• To prevent the inadvertent selection of a BIT mode (BIT 2,

BIT 3, or ALIGN) there is a five second delay between opera-
tor positioning of the switch and engagement of the selected
mode.

• The BIT 3 routine requires 5 minutes to complete. Once BIT

3 has completed, it requires approximately 70 seconds to exit
BIT 3 and return to normal operation after the BIT SELECT
SWITCH is placed to OFF.

OFF – Normal operation

BIT 1 – Static test screen with status (such as temperature, fan rotation,
firmware) displayed. See fig 1-10B.

BIT 2 – Normal screen layout but uses internally generated video/sweep

signals. See fig. 1-10C.

BIT 3 – Dynamic test of all memory and display circuits. This screen is
intended for factory testing only.

NOTE
If BIT 3 is entered and terminated early before the BIT auto-
matically completes, indicator alignment may be lost . In addi-
tion frequency data may be lost which cannot be reloaded in
flight.

ALIGN – Alignment mode allows maintenance personnel to adjust trace

height, width, and position. The parameters adjustable at this position
are: Video Offset, Video Gain, Sweep Offset, and Sweep Gain.

1. Move BIT SELECT control to ALIGN.

2. All traces will appear on screen with parameter selection text below
each line. Video Test function is automatically enabled. The currently
selected parameter will be displayed in reverse video. See figure
1-10D.
3. To select the parameter of interest, rotate the SCALE control until the
desired parameter is shown in reverse video. The SCALE control
rotation is continuous, moving from line to line in sequence through
the displayed traces.
4. Once the desired trace and parameter are selected, the EMITTER
PERSIS control is rotated to affect the desired change. The Operator
observes trace height, width, and position while making the
adjustment.

Figure 1-10A (Sheet 3 of 4)

1-26B Change 2
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

NO. CONTROL-INDICATOR FUNCTION

IP-1168B/ALR-20A INDICATOR (Cont)

9 VIDEO TEST Button Provides a means of testing the video circuitry exclusive of the tuners.
When depressed, a signal of 3/16 inch minimum in amplitude should
appear at the left edge of each trace.

10 RF TEST Button Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for RF test frequencies.

11 CRT Screen Provides a panoramic display of intercepted radar signals present within
the frequency range of the ALR-20A system. The CRT screen has seven
main traces representing seven individual bands of frequencies plus two
expansion traces used for closer analysis of any signal appearing on any
of the seven main traces. Intercepted signals are shown as vertical spikes
extending from the baseline of each trace. Signals appearing on the lower
six main traces and the expansion traces appear above the baseline
while signals on main trace No. 7 appear below the baseline. Traces 6
and 7 cover the same frequency range and will display signals received
from the forward and aft tunners respectively. The height of the spike is
an indication of signal strength and the position of the spike along the
baseline is a measure of the center frequency of the intercepted radar sig-
nal.The audio dot, arrow, and frequency (represented by XXXX) are
shown below the fourth main trace. The frequency is based on the calibra-
tion of the display.

12 Power Selector STBY position applies power to filaments, heaters, CRT display, and all
system devices requiring warmup prior to operation. The OFF to STBY
action takes approximately 50 seconds. ON position applies all system
voltages for full operation. STBY to ON action (full up display) takes 10
seconds. OFF to ON (full up display) takes approximately 60 seconds.
OFF position removes all power from the ALR-20A circuits.

13 Right Mark Control Controls the position of the right marker on both expansion traces.

14 Expansion Trace Selector (B Trace) Provides a means for selecting a main trace for expansion on B trace.
When moved from OFF position to a numbered position, that portion
selected by the sweep width control will be displayed on the appropriate
expansion trace.

15 Expansion Trace Selector (A Trace) Provides a means for selecting a main trace for expansion on A trace.
When moved from OFF position to a numbered position, that portion
selected by the sweep width control will be displayed on the appropriate
expansion trace.

16 Left Mark Control Controls the position of the left marker on both expansion traces.

17 VOLUME Control Provides a means of adjusting the volume of audio received in the
interphone system. Operative only when sweep width control is full CCW
(in detent).

Figure 1-10A (Sheet 4 of 4)

Change 2 1-26C
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

IP-1168B BIT 1 SCREEN DS Geometry

This screen (figure 1-10B) is displayed when the
unit is placed in the BIT 1 mode, by rotation of the
BIT SELECT knob located on the unit’s top front
panel. It presents unit internal status and part
number/revision information, provides feedback on
Persistence and Scale Illumination knob operation,
and provides images which aid in determining unit
video performance (including size, geometry, band-
width, focus, and intensity range).
The box that runs the perimeter of the screen is
drawn at the limits of the display. It is normal for
the box to disappear in the corners. The five circles
and squares located in the corners and center are
useful in determining the display’s geometry. The
circles should be nearly round, not egg shaped. The
squares should be nearly square and not rectangle.
A complete character list is displayed at the
screen’s bottom center. The characters should be
clear and readable.

IP1168B BIT 1 Screen DS

6 6
Temp Temp
Top FAN SPEED Bottom
°F RPM °F
SCALE PERSISTENCE

7
0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz

8
A67544

Figure 1-10B (Sheet 1 of 3)

1-26D Change 2
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

IP1168B BIT 1 Screen DS (Cont)

NO. CONTROL-INDICATOR FUNCTION

1 Unit and Firmware Information These boxes provide part number and other information about the dis-
play. None of this information changes or is affected by BIT.

2 Intensity Gradients (2 places) These two areas display all 16 levels of intensity, from full black to full
bright. They can be used to verify display range by direct observation of
the gradients.

3 Display Bandwidth (2 places)
4 Scale Readout
These two locations provide a means to determine the display’s band-
width. The top two boxes contain lines spaced at 128 lines per inch (LPI),
while the bottom two boxes are at 64 lines per inch. The individual lines
in all boxes should be distinguishable.
NOTE
The upper left box (128 vertical) is the most difficult to distin-
guish. To distinguish individual lines it is necessary to use mag-
nification (such as an eye loupe) and to adjust the Master Illumi-
nation control for optimal view-ability.
This display is intended for testing the IP-1168B front panel SCALE Illumi-
nation Control. The numbers in this box increment or decrement, depend-
ing on the rotation direction of the front panel control knobs. The specific
values range from 0 to 15, and they rollover. With each click of the knob
the displayed value will either increment or decrement by one and change
the scale illumination respectively. If knob is rotated quickly, some dis-
played values may be missed. Scale illumination will change when the
control is moved.

5 Fan Speed The number in this box is the measured speed of the display’s internal fan
or blower. At room temperature/sea level the fan speed should be 3400
to 3800 RPM. At air temperatures below about 50° F, an internal thermal
switch turns off the fan, producing a fan speed readout of 0000 RPM. If
the temperature is above 77° F (25° C) and fan speed is below 2000 RPM,
a failure condition exists and the BIT FAIL message will be displayed in
reverse video on the normal or BIT 2 display.

NOTE

The Fan Speed BIT failure condition requires maintenance ac-

tion as soon as possible. No fire hazard exists. However, contin-
ued usage of the system without repair will reduce the reliability
of a number of components in the system. Therefore, only con-
tinue to run the system in a tactically urgent situation. The sys-
tem may shut itself down at any time without warning following
this failure.

Figure 1-10B (Sheet 2 of 3)

Change 5 1-26E
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

IP1168B BIT 1 Screen DS (Cont)

NO. CONTROL-INDICATOR FUNCTION

6 Temperature (Top and Bottom)
These are temperature reading on the Trace Generator CCA, one located
at the top of the CCA and the other at the bottom of the CCA. After warm-
up, the temperatures read about 20° F higher than the ambient inlet air
temperature. If the average of the two temperature readings is 176° F (80°
C) or higher, a potential failure condition exists and the BIT FAIL message
will be displayed in reverse video on the normal or BIT 2 display.

NOTE

The Temperature BIT failure condition requires maintenance

action as soon as possible. No fire hazard exists. However, con-
tinued usage of the system without repair will reduce the reliabil-
ity of a number of components in the system. Therefore, only
continue to run the system in a tactically urgent situation. The
system may shut itself down at any time without warning follow-
ing this failure.

7 Persistence Readout
This display is intended for testing the IP-1168B front panel EMITTER
PERSIS selector. The numbers in this box increment or decrement, de-
pending on the rotation direction of the front panel control knobs. The spe-
cific values are meaningless, but range from 0 to 15, and they rollover.
With each click of the knob the displayed value will either increment or
decrement by one. If knob is rotated quickly, some displayed values may
be missed. The persistence of the display will not change.

8 Intensity Boxes (5 places)
The five intensity boxes, located in the four corners and in the center of
the screen, are intended for use during test and debug. The intensity of
the boxes is initially set to maximum and is controlled by the SCALE Illu-
mination control. The scale readout value equates to the intensity level,
where 15 is maximum brightness and 00 is minimum brightness.

Figure 1-10B (Sheet 3 of 3)

1-26F Change 5

IP1168B BIT 2 SCREEN DS
BIT 2 is intended to test as much of the hardware
as practical. All video generated during BIT 2 is in-
ternal to the display. It does not test the receiver
system controls: Audio Volume, Right/Left Markers,
A/B Expansion Select, Video Test, and RF Test.
IP1168B BIT 2 Screen DS
Figure 1-10C
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
Pass/Fail determination is left up to the operator or
technician through observation of the BIT 2 screen
and through operation of Master, Edge, Scale Illu-
mination, and Persistence controls. If the pattern
shown below is displayed and is constantly up-
dated, then BIT 2 is considered a PASS.
Change 5 1-26G
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

IP1168B Align Screen DS

Figure 1-10D

1-26H Change 5

RADAR WARNING RECEIVER
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The Radar Warning Receiver (RWR) is an improved
version over earlier RWR systems having an en-
larged memory and the capability to detect addi-
tional types and more sophisticated threats. An up-
graded CM-479 processor, employing reprogram-
mable Electrically Erasable Read Only Memory
(EEROM) is installed. The EEROM processor can
be reprogrammed in the aircraft by a portable
MK-2278/APM-379 conversion kit, signal processor,
ASM-695 Program Loader Verifier (PLV)Memory
Loader Verifier (MLV). The receiver alerts the EW
officer, and in some instances the gunner, when
particular threat radar signals are received. The
system is designed to protect the aircraft with mini-
mum inflight manipulation of the controls. That is,
most modes of operation are selected before takeoff
or before target ingress. AN/ALQ-172(V)2 PR trans-
mitters blank the warning receiver to prevent dis-
play of associated transmitted signals. Audio ex-
amination of received signals is accomplished
through tie-in with the interphone system. Self-test
features provide comprehensive checks of the warn-
ing receiver on the ground or during flight. Compo-
nent locations are shown in figure 1-11. RWR con-
trols and indicators are shown in figure 1-13.
Symbology
The symbology for the threat files in the RWR is
shown in figure 1-13. These files are stored in the
processor’s EEROM and can be reprogrammed in
the aircraft by a portable MK-2278/APM-379 con-
version kit, signal processor, MLV. The three files
can be briefly described as follows:
1. Normal File - Contains land and water based
surface-to-air missile, AAA systems, and all air-
borne interceptors.
2. Terrain File - Contains land based surface-to-
air missile systems, all airborne interceptors, and
land based AAA radars.
3. Sea File - Contains water based surface-to-air
missile systems, water based AAA, and all airborne
interceptors.
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
Scan Routines
The RWR provides both TWS and conical scan anal-
yses.
Antisymbol Splitting Routines
The RWR incorporates special routines to avoid
symbol splitting. Symbol splitting is an effect which
is due to aircraft rolls and banks. During these
maneuvers the same emitter is seen at new relative
angles by the antennas. Were it not for the anti-
symbol splitting routines, these changes in relative
angles would cause multiple symbols for the same
emitter to appear as the aircraft maneuvers. The
RWR antisymbol splitting routines minimize such
degradation. After an emitter has once been identi-
fied, the allowable angle variations during each
successive intercept are widened. This allows the
system to track an emitter through most aircraft
maneuvers.
Audio
The audio heard is a function of the environment
and operator selection.
NORMAL AUDIO
In normal operation, audio from all emitters which
are strong enough to be processed by the RWR will
be heard. Search radars (those of long pulse widths)
will only be heard when SEARCH is selected on the
indicator control. The amplitude of each PRF will
be proportional to the power received from the
threat. The AUDIO control on the indicator control
can be used to adjust the level of audio from maxi-
mum to completely off.
DIAMOND AUDIO
Any time the operator wishes to hear audio from
any one of the displayed emitters, he can do so by
pressing the HANDOFF button on the indicator-
control. He will then hear only the audio from the
symbol which has the diamond - diamond audio.
Audio amplitude will be constant regardless of
range to the threat. The AUDIO control on the indi-
cator-control can be used to adjust diamond audio
from maximum to completely off.
Change 7 1-27
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
Diamond Routines
Two routines are used in the RWR system.
FLOATING DIAMOND
In this mode, a diamond symbol is always on the
highest priority emitter displayed at that moment.
It floats with the highest display priority in a pre-
programmed order as the environment changes. In
this mode, normal audio will be heard.
LATCHED DIAMOND
In this mode, a diamond symbol is latched on the
displayed emitter selected by the operator. When
latched, the diamond will stay on that emitter
regardless of the state of the environment, until
that emitter is off the display, or the operator
selects another emitter, or emitter file. In this
mode, diamond audio will be heard.
OPERATIONAL MODES
Power On
The system is energized by pressing and releasing
the POWER button on the indicator-control.
POWER ON light should come on. A time-in period
of 9 seconds is allowed for azimuth indicator fila-
ment warmup. During this time the indicator-con-
trol lights may flash randomly. After time-in, the
system will be in open mode, normal file, floating
diamond, and normal audio. SEARCH will be off
and ALTITUDE will be in the position it held when
the warning receiver was last used.
Auto-Restart
If at any time after turn-on the system suffers a
momentary power loss or surge, the system will
momentarily turn itself off. When this occurs, the
system will auto-restart within 15 seconds. Auto-re-
start is followed by a 9 second time-in period. Fol-
lowing auto-restart and time-in, the system will be
in OPEN mode, normal file, floating diamond, and
normal audio. The SEARCH button will be out
(even if it were energized before the power shut-
down) while ALTITUDE will be in the position it
held before the power loss.
1-28 Change 7
Modes
Following initiation of system power and time-in,
the MODE button indicates the system is in OPEN
mode. In this mode, up to 16 threats may be pro-
cessed and displayed using appropriate alphanu-
meric symbols. Azimuth angles are displayed rela-
tive to aircraft heading. Distance from the aircraft
to the threat is displayed as a function of symbol
displacement from the center of the screen. This
distance is normalized in terms of the threats lethal
range. Threats beyond the outer ring of the azi-
muth indicator are beyond lethal range of the
weapon associated with that threat. Symbols which
appear inside the outer ring are within lethal
range. The threat from which audio can/will be
heard is emphasized by having a diamond placed
around it. The ALQ-155 Mode is controlled by the
Sensor Integration indicatorr control. The ALQ-155
mode is selected by pressing and releasing the
MODE pushbutton. There may be a momentary
delay before the system enters the ALQ-155 mode.
Do not press the button again during this delay.
This mode is indicated by illumination of the leg-
end.
Handoff
In normal operation, the diamond is floating. It fol-
lows a list of preprogrammed display priorities as
the environment changes. When the HANDOFF
pushbutton is depressed, any collocated targets are
separated and the diamond rotates through all dis-
played threats in a preprogrammed order and con-
tinues to do so as long as the pushbutton is held in.
If the pushbutton is released, the diamond stays
latched to the threat symbol it currently encloses
regardless of other environment activity. When the
diamond is latched, audio is diamond audio and the
diamond legend on the HANDOFF button comes on
(the HANDOFF legend is illuminated whenever
power is applied). As the diamond cycles through
the displayed threat priorities, the operator will
hear the audio of each emitter as the diamond
encloses it. The diamond is returned to floating
mode by (1) momentarily pressing the HANDOFF
button, (2) loss of the threat on which it was
latched, or (3) a change from one threat file to
another. If the HANDOFF button is pressed and
held, the diamond will continue cycling through the
displayed emitters.

Target Separate
BEFORE DZ Momentarily separates symbols
which are collocated on the azimuth indicator (but
not necessarily collocated on the ground) so that the
operator may clearly identify them. The symbols
are displaced along a 45° line whose direction is
determined by the location of the display on the azi-
muth indicator. The highest display priority threat
will always be at the bottom of the diagonal. Target
separate is obtained by depressing the T button,
which will illuminate the ON legend (the lower
TGT SEP legend will go out). The symbols will
remain separated for approximately 3 seconds after
release of the button. During the diamond HAND-
OFF mode, no apparent movement of the diamond
may be observed. In this case, T may be depressed
to determine if several collocated identical threats
are being displayed.
AFTER DZ Target Separate toggles separation of
displayed symbols collocated on the azimuth indica-
tor(but not necessarily collocated on the ground) to
more clearly identify them. The symbols move ra-
dially along the azimuth of threats. If the symbols
reach the indicator edge, they will wrap around the
outer edge of the display in a clockwise direction.
Target separate is obtained by depressing the T
button, which will illuminate the ON legend. The
lower TGT SEP legend will go out.
Unknown
Unknown assumes that the system has identified a
radar whose characteristics are not stored in the
processors threat files or which has not transmitted
enough parameters to make unambiguous identifi-
cation possible. The processor will identify this
radar as an unknown emitter. This will cause the U
legend on the UNKNOWN button to flash at a 16
Hz rate. (The UNKNOWN legend is always illumi-
nated). By pushing and releasing the UNKNOWN
button, a band coded symbol will be displayed at
the proper position on the azimuth indicator and
the U legend will be on steadily.
Search
BEFORE DZ The RWR is primarily a terminal
threat warning system. Terminal threats can be
characterized by narrow pulsewidths; nonterminal
threats have long pulsewidths. Long pulsewidth
threats can be added to the processing and display
cycle by pressing and releasing the SEARCH but-
ton on the indicator-control. (The S legend will
come on; the SEARCH legend is etched on the but-
ton). The system will remain in search until the
button is again pressed or power is removed.
Acquisition, GCI, and heightfinder radars will now
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
be displayed by the symbol S. All other existing
threats will remain displayed. It should be noted
that search radars can only be heard when the
search button is depressed.
NOTE
The S emitters have very low priority. Thus,
it is possible, particularly in the PRIORITY
mode, that no S symbols will appear even
though they exist in the environment, are
illuminating the aircraft, and are heard in
normal audio.
AFTER DZ System is primarily a terminal threat
RWR and activation of the SEARCH further identi-
fies less lethal threats. When depressed, this elec-
trically latching switch allows C to J Band Search
type Radars to be displayed with an S symbol on
the azimuth indicator. All other symbols on the azi-
muth indicator are retained. The S legend is illumi-
nated when the Search function is selected or dur-
ing the lamp check phase of system test. Certain
known Search Radars have narrow PW and will
display even if this mode is not selected. Selection
of the Search mode does not significantly impact
system response time, but could increase the num-
ber of symbols displayed on the azimuth indicator.
In a dense threat environment, the extra symbols
may clutter the display. This button, when de-
pressed during system test, activates the Extended
BIT.
Altitude Priority
By use of the ALTITUDE pushbutton the operator
can change the display priority as the mission
changes. That is, at low altitudes some AAA threats
and low altitude missiles can be given display prior-
ity, while at high altitudes, display priorities can be
assigned to SAMs. This display priority change is
accomplished by pressing the ALTITUDE button.
HI ALT or LO ALT legend will be illuminated,
whichever was selected last.
Excess Noise Strobes
As a maintenance assist, excess noise bars have
been added to the scope display at 9, 12, and 3
o’clock. During system test, a fourth bar may
appear at 6 o’clock. It has no meaning in the pres-
ent RWR configuration. Clockwise from 9 o’clock,
the presence of the bars indicates normal amplifier-
detector noise in the low-mid-high-bands. The bars
will be either off or on. Excess noise in any band
will extinguish that band bar. When a threshold
bar is missing, but SYS TEST for that band is good,
the detection range for that band has been reduced,
but the system is still usable with caution.
Change 7 1-29
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
Cycle Timer
At the left-hand end of the 3 o’clock noise bar will
appear a short vertical bar that alternately points
up and down. Each movement of the bar represents
the time used to input and process data from all
three frequency bands. The rate at which the cycle
timer moves will vary with pulse density of the
threat environment and the amount of time needed
by the computer to process the pulse data.
System Test
BEFORE DZ The frequency coverage provided by
the RWR is divided into three bands for the purpose
of improving signal to noise ratio. The three bands
are called 1, 2, and 3. During SYSTEM TEST bands
1, 2, and 3 symbols are displayed in each quadrant
indicating that the respective azimuth channel is
operational. There will also be a dot in each quad-
rant and at the center of the azimuth indicator.
Presence of the quadrant dots indicates that the
deflection circuitry in the signal processor is prop-
erly aligned when the dots appear on the outer ring
of the azimuth indicator. If the four dots are shifted
from the outer ring, the lethality envelope has been
shifted by that same amount. If one of the dots is
missing, that portion of the azimuth display is inop-
erable. The center dot serves to locate the center of
the azimuth indicator in darkened environments. A
fifth dot appears at the bottom of the azimuth indi-
cator during system test. Its only function is to
inform the operator that the system is an RWR.
The sensitivity of the complete system (except the
antennas and triplexers) is properly aligned when
the quadrant dots are near the centers of the sym-
bols. If a dot appears outside of the diamond by
more than 1/8 inch, the system requires alignment.
The diamond will cycle clockwise to each symbol
and a different diamond audio will be heard. A
number is printed at the top of the display indicat-
ing the software version being used. If the numeral
is flashing, it indicates the computer checksum
and/or memory tests failed. Illumination of the ON
legend on the SYS TEST button indicates that the
checksum and memory tests were successful.
1-30 Change 7
BEFORE DZ Bands 1, 2, and 3 system tests are
initiated by pressing the SYS TEST pushbutton for
at least 2 seconds. The SYS TEST legend is always
illuminated. The ON legend comes on if the
memory self-tests are successful. Total time of the
test is 15 seconds. Upon initiation of SYS TEST,
every light on the indicator-control may come on
briefly. Those which do not come on should be
pressed. If they come on when pressed, the lamp
test is successfully completed. During system test,
the antennas are not disabled from the processor so
that any other radars in the environment which are
illuminating the aircraft will be received and pro-
cessed. Any PRF received within the system test
limits will be displayed by the appropriate band
symbol and not by their real identifying symbology.
Thus, band symbols not associated with a processor
dot may be displayed. Except when it is known that
no other radars are in the area, these extra band
symbols can be ignored.
AFTER DZ The self-test of the RWR) system con-
sists of two levels of reports, self test (short summa-
ry) and extended self test (detail required for main-
tenance). Self test provides quick status of the sys-
tem and check of the operator indicators through
two Azimuth indicator screen displays that com-
plete in five seconds. Self test may be initiated and
repeated as often as necessary to verify proper op-
eration. Acceptable self-test results are indicated
by OK symbols. NOGO will be highlighted by
flashing BAD symbols. Indicators will change after
two seconds to screen one indicating SYS SWV
number, LAMPS ON and AUDIO ON then se-
quence automatically to screen two. Screen two pro-
vides detailed software versions for OFP and EID
and a comprehensive summary of system status.
An acceptable self-test will report all OK results.
INIT reports the hardware logic initialization re-
sults. Failure will be indicated by a flashing BAD
on Azimuth Indicator. MEMORY reports the ram
and non-volatile memory checksum results. During
self-test, memory locations are numerically
checked. Failure to pass check sum will be indi-
cated by a flashing BAD on Azimuth Indicator. DF
reports Band 1,2,3 video and Amplifier Detector
status. Failure will be indicated by a flashing BAD
on Azimuth Indicator. Antennas and associated
cabling are not included in self test and must be
tested by maintenance personnel using appropriate
test equipment.

Terrain File
For missions which are flown against only land-
based threats, terrain file is used. This file is
obtained by pressing and releasing SYS TEST fol-
lowed by pressing and releasing T within one sec-
ond. No legends will come on. A symbol will appear
at the bottom of the azimuth indicator to denote
this mode of operation. When in terrain file, only 15
emitter symbols can be displayed since the symbol
is always present. The system can be returned to
normal file by momentarily pressing SYS TEST fol-
lowed by pressing the T button within 1 second.
Sea File
To keep the number of ambiguities on the threat
display to a minimum, the sea file was added for
use over water. This file is obtained by pressing and
releasing SYS TEST followed by within 1
second. Return to normal file is obtained by repeat-
ing this procedure. No legends will come on. A ship
symbol will appear at the bottom of the azimuth in-
dicator to denote this mode. In this mode, only 15
emitters can be displayed since the ship symbol is
always present.
GUNNER STATION
The following indications are provided at the gun-
ner station. The RWR will update these indications
as follows:
1. System Test - The four quadrant dots will be
displayed and band 3 audio will simultaneously be
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
heard from all four quadrants during the entire
system test cycle. During band 3 portion of cycle, AI
symbols will be displayed at each of the four dots.
The entire system, except the antennas and ampli-
fier-detectors triplexers, is properly aligned when
the AI symbol is within 1/8 inch of the quadrant
dot. The RWR dot will be displayed.
2. Excess Noise Strobes - Strobes will be inverted,
as are displays at this station, so that the low-band
bar is at 3 o’clock, mid-band at 6 o’clock and
high-band at 9 o’clock.
3. Threat Symbols - The only threat symbols
which will be displayed are the airborne intercep-
tors. The and symbols will be displayed
when in those modes.
4. Audio - Only band 3 audio will be present at
this station.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The RWR system consists of four spiral antennas
for high-band coverage, an AM-6639 amplifier-de-
tector for each antenna which separates the RF sig-
nals into three bands (for signal-to-noise improve-
ment), a CM-479 signal processor (employing repro-
grammable EEROM) which handles all threat anal-
ysis, an azimuth indicator for alphanumeric display
of the threat environment, and C-11528/RWR indi-
cator-control unit which controls and displays the
modes of the system. Threats are displayed on the
RWR Azimuth Indicator. Sensor Integration (SI)
display displays RWR threat and system status in-
formation.
Change 7 1-31
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Component Locations

Figure 1-11 (Sheet 1 of 2)

1-32 Change 7
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Figure 1-11 (Sheet 2 of 2)

Change 9 1-33
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CM-479 Signal Processor DZ

1 PROVIDES SIGNAL DATA INTERFACE TO CONTROL-INDICATOR

2 PROVIDES POWER AND SIGNAL DATA INTERFACE TO AMPLIIER DETECTORS
3 ELAPSED TIME INDICATOR
4 NOT USED
5 SPARE FUSE
6 PROVIDES PRIMARY POWER AND SIGNAL DATA INTERFACE TO CONTROL-INDICATOR
7 5 AMP FUSE (PRIMARY 115 VAC CIRCUIT)

Figure 1-12 (Sheet 1 of 2)

1-34 Change 7
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-46(V)-4 Signal Processor Less DZ

1 SPARE FUSE
2 PROVIDES POWER AND SIGNAL DATA TO CONTROL-INDICATOR
3 PROVIDES POWER AND SIGNAL DATA TO CONTROL-INDICATOR
4 ELAPSED TIME INDICATOR
5 PROVIDES POWER AND SIGNAL DATA TO CONTROL-INDICATOR
6 5 AMP FUSE (115 VAC CIRCUIT)

Figure 1-12 (Sheet 2 of 2)

Change 7 1-35
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Controls and Indicators

CONTROL-INDICATOR
1 INTENSITY CONTROL 9 ACTIVITY INDICATOR
2 CRT INDICATOR 10 UNKNOWN BUTTON
3 LAUNCH INDICATOR 11 TARGET SEPARATION BUTTON-INDICATOR
4 SYSTEM TEST BUTTON-INDICATOR 12 HANDOFF BUTTON-INDICATOR
5 AUDIO CONTROL 13 MODE BUTTON-INDICATOR
6 DIMMING CONTROL 14 ALTITUDE BUTTON-INDICATOR
7 PROCESSOR REPROGRAMMING INPUT 15 SEARCH BUTTON-INDICATOR
8 POWER BUTTON-INDICATOR

Figure 1-13 (Sheet 1 of 6)

1-36 Change 7
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Controls and Indicators (Cont)

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

1 Intensity Control Varies the intensity level of CRT.

2 CRT Indicator Displays threat symbols indicating relative bearing, relative signal
strength, and type of threat radar. The top of the EW officer’s indicator
represents 0° in azimuth relative to the aircraft heading, that is, a threat
radar directly ahead of the aircraft would present a symbol at the 12
o’clock position. However, the CRT indicator at the gunner’s station is ori-
ented so that the top of the indicator represents 180° azimuth relative to
aircraft heading. A symbol at the 12 o’clock position on the gunner’s indi-
cator represents a threat directly aft of the aircraft. Relative signal
strength of a threat radar is indicated by its distance from the center of the
indicator; that is, the weaker signals appear at the edge of the indicator
and the stronger signals, near the center. The type of threat radar is indi-
cated by a characteristic symbol.

3 LAUNCH Indicator When the SAM threat guidance commands are received, the MISSILE
and LAUNCH indicators light and a flashing circle is placed around the
appropriate threat symbol. Pressing the button will generate a burst of
launch audio over the ALR-46 Audio on the interphone.

4 System Test Button-Indicator Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1

5 AUDIO Control Varies the level of audio received in the interphone system.

6 Dimming Control Varies the brightness of the legends on control-indicator.

7 Processor Reprogramming Input Input connection for Memory Loader Verifier (MLV) to reprogram the
signal processor.

8 POWER Button-Indicator Pressing and releasing this button provides power to the system. ON
POWER legend will illuminate.

9 ACTIVITY Indicator When SAM threat guidance commands are received, the MISSILE and
ACTIVITY indicators light and a circle is placed around the appropriate
threat symbol.

10 UNKNOWN Button Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1

11 Target Separation Button-Indicator BEFORE DZ When depressed, targets that are collocated on the CRT
will separate for easier identification and the ON legend will illuminate.
The symbols will r emain separated as long as the button-indicator is held
depressed. When released the targets will remain separated for approxi-
mately 3 seconds before returning to their original positions.

AFTER DZ Target Separate toggles separation of displayed symbols

collocated on the azimuth indicator(but not necessarily collocated on the
ground) to more clearly identify them. The symbols move radially along
the azimuth of threats. If the symbols reach the indicator edge, they will
wrap around the outer edge of the display in a clockwise direction. Target
separate is obtained by depressing the T button, which will illuminate the
ON legend. The lower TGT SEP legend will go out.

Figure 1-13 (Sheet 2 of 6)

Change 7 1-37
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Controls and Indicators (Cont)

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

12 HANDOFF Button-Indicator A diamond is superimposed over the highest priority threat on CRT dis-
play. When the HANDOFF button is depressed, the diamond rotates
through all displayed threats in preprogrammed order of descending
priority, and continues to do so as long as button is pressed. When button
is released, diamond latches to threat symbols currently enclosed
regardless of other environments. With diamond latched, diamond audio
is heard and diamond symbol is illuminated on handoff button-indicator.
Pressing the HANDOFF button also engages Target Separate.

13 MODE Button-Indicator Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1

14 ALTITUDE Button-Indicator At high altitudes, display priority is given to AIs and high altitude SAM sys-
tem when HI ALT legend is illuminated. By pressing and releasing ALTI-
TUDE button-indicator, low altitude display priority can be given to some
AAA and low altitude SAMs. LO ALT legend is then illuminated. Pressing
ALTITUDE button again returns system to high altitude priority, the LO
ALT legend will go out and HI ALT again illuminates.

15 SEARCH Button-Indicator Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1

Figure 1-13 (Sheet 3 of 6)

1-38 Change 7
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Controls and Indicators (Cont)

DISPLAY SYMBOLOGY SCREEN 1 DZ

INDEX NUMBER TYPED NOTATION SUGGESTED PRONUNCIATION

1 WFF Wingform F
2 19 STAFF Nineteen Staff
3 A. A Dot
4 A: A Two Dot
5 A:. A Three Dot
6 U. U Dot
7 U: U Two Dot
8 U:. U Three Dot
9 -A- A Bar
10 C STAFF C Staff
11 -2- Two Bar
12 8 STAFF Eight Staff
13 WF Wingform
14 WFI Wingform One
15 AI AI
16 BOAT Boat

Figure 1-13 (Sheet 4 of 6)

Change 7 1-39
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

DISPLAY SYMBOLOGY SCREEN 2 DZ

INDEX NUMBER TYPED NOTATION SUGGESTED PRONUNCIATION

17 L L
18 R R
19 15 STAFF Fifteen Staff
20 -P- P Bar
21 1 One
22 2 Two
23 3 Three
24 4 Four
25 5 Five
26 6 Six
27 7 Seven
28 8 Eight
29 9 Nine
30 C C
31 G G
32 H H

Figure 1-13 (Sheet 5 of 6)

1-40 Change 7
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Controls and Indicators (Cont)

DISPLAY SYMBOLOGY SCREEN 3 DZ

INDEX NUMBER TYPED NOTATION SUGGESTED PRONUNCIATION

33 19 Nineteen
34 T Training
35 ML Missile Launch
36 UML Uncorrelated Missile Launch
37 THRESHOLD BARS Threshold Bars
38 10 Ten
39 0 Zero
40 11 Eleven
41 12 Twelve
42 DIAMOND Diamond
43 BROKEN DIAMOND Broken Diamond
44 S Search
45 15 Fifteen

Figure 1-13 (Sheet 6 of 6)

Change 7 1-41
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-46(V)-4 Indications Less DZ

INITIATED BY PRESSING SYS TEST BUTTON FOR ONE SECOND. DIAMOND SYMBOL WILL CYCLE CLOCKWISE TO
EACH TEST BAND SYMBOL(S). BAND 3 SYMBOL SHOWN WILL ALTERNATE WITH NUMERAL 3 AT EW POSITION. DOT
AT BOTTOM OF DISPLAY DURING TEST DENOTES ALR-46(V)4 SYSTEM. TEST DURATION IS APPROXIMATELY 15
SECONDS.

NOTE

• Not to scale.

• An electronic dot coincident with an etched dot at the CRT center is present during all
modes of operation in order to define the center of the display in a darkened environment.

Figure 1-14 (Sheet 1 of 4)

1-42 Change 7
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-46(V)-4 Indications Less DZ (Cont)

Figure 1-14 (Sheet 2 of 4)

Change 7 1-42A
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-46(V)-4 Indications Less DZ (Cont)

Figure 1-14 (Sheet 3 of 4)

1-42B Change 7
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALR-46(V)-4 Indications Less DZ (Cont)

Figure 1-14 (Sheet 4 of 4)

Change 7 1-42C
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Operational Checkout

SYSTEM SELF-TEST DZ
NOTE

During auto self-test, a low frequency audio tone lasting approximately

one second will be heard. System self-test must be performed to deter-
mine if an actual fault exists in the system.

STEP RESULT
On RWR INDICATOR CONTROL UNIT (ICU)
set audio control to mid-range.

On RWR INDICATOR CONTROL UNIT (ICU)
POWER and all lower legends except LAUNCH and SEARCH
illuminate steadily. Also some or all of the
remaining legends may illuminate briefly.
After 10 second warm-up, observe-noise bars only appear on
azimuth indicator.

After warm-up observe that all legends illuminate, except

LAUNCH and ACTIVITY.
On RWR ICU depress and hold SYS TEST switch Azimuth Indicator flashes first screen showing version number,
until noise bars disappear on azimuth indicator. then advances to second screen.

Figure 1-14A (Sheet 1 of 6)

1-42D Change 7
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Controls and Indicators (Cont)

SYSTEM SELF-TEST DZ (Cont)
STEP RESULT

SYS TEST (Cont) Azimuth Indicator flashes second screen indicating OFP and
EID version number.

Degraded performance will be indicated by flashing version

number or “OK” status shows “BAD”.
Azimuth Indicator returns to normal display (noise bars only).

For additional testing as determined, proceed to EXTENDED SELF-TEST

NOTE

• Extended (maintenance) self-test may be initiated and repeated as

often as necessary to verify proper operation. Operators shall be famil-
iar with self-test prior to test start.

• If failures are identified as a result of system self-test, ensure that

appropriate testing and maintenance is performed.

• There are twelve different screens in the maintenance test display se-
quence. A short press of the SEARCH switch will hold display se-
quence on the screen of interest, alternating with advance/abort screen.

• Since the system continues to receive radar signals during extended

self-test, radars in the vicinity may cause erroneous results.

Figure 1-14A (Sheet 2 of 6)

Change 7 1-42E
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Operational Checkout (Cont)

EXTENDED SYSTEM SELF-TEST DZ
STEP RESULT

To begin Extended self test, Depress and release SYS RESULT 1: “BEGINNING EXTENDED BIT” screen appears on
TEST switch, then at second screen, depress and hold Azimuth Indicator
SEARCH switch until “BEGINNING EXTENDED BIT”
screen appears on Azimuth Indicator (then release).

RESULT 2: After 5 seconds, screen appears announcing

blanking of azimuth indicator while test are being performed.

RESULT 3: ML audio is heard.

RESULT 4: All THREAT WARNING panel lights except LOW
come on for 1 second then extinguish.
RESULT 5: Audio song is heard at low and varying level.

Figure 1-14A (Sheet 3 of 6)

1-42F Change 7
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Operational Checkout (Cont)

EXTENDED SYSTEM SELF-TEST DZ (Cont)
STEP RESULT

NOTE

Normal maintenance test indications are “000” or “OK” Faults will be highlighted by flashing symbol at 1 Hz rate.

RESULT 6: CM-479 A4 Status screen is displayed.

RESULT 7: ADVANCE/ABORT screen appears alternately with

A4 status screen.

NOTE

A short press of the SEARCH switch will hold a screen of interest for indefinite display, alternating with
ADVANCE/ABORT screen. A second press of the SEARCH switch will continue the sequence of test results.
Depress and release SEARCH switch while RESULT 8: CM-479 CCA5 test status is displayed for 5
ADVANCE/ABORT screen is being displayed. seconds.

Figure 1-14A (Sheet 4 of 6)

Change 7 1-42G
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

EXTENDED SYSTEM SELF-TEST DZ (Cont)

STEP RESULT

RESULT 9: CM-479 CCA6 test status is displayed for 5

seconds.

RESULT 10: CM-479 CCA8 test status is displayed for 5

seconds.

RESULT 11: System Memory test status is displayed for 5

seconds.

RESULT 12: DF test status is displayed for 5 seconds. (“DF”

and all numbers should be present and steady.)

Figure 1-14A (Sheet 5 of 6)

1-42H Change 7
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RWR Operational Checkout (Cont)

EXTENDED SYSTEM SELF-TEST DZ (Cont)
STEP RESULT

RESULT 13: Software status is displayed for 5 seconds.

RESULT 14: END OF EXTENDED BIT screen is displayed for

5 seconds.

RESULT 15: Azimuth indicator returns to normal display.

(Noise BArs only).

Figure 1-14A (Sheet 6 of 6)

Change 7 1-42J
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
RWR NORMAL OPERATION
Turn-On Procedure
Turn-on of the RWR will be accomplished in accor-
dance with the basic flight manuals.
Self-Test
BEFORE DZ The self-test provides a check of all
system components except antennas and associated
cabling. This check will be performed during the
calibration and interference check. The EW officer
may also accomplish the self-test to determine
operational capability any time during flight when
system performance is questioned. As the antennas
are not disabled during self-test, environmental
radars are allowed to be received and processed.
Any radars received with PRI within self-test limits
will be displayed with appropriate test band sym-
bol, not their real identifying symbology. Therefore,
additional symbols may be displayed during self-
test. The test is initiated by pressing the SYS TEST
pushbutton for approximately 1 second. When SYS
TEST is pressed, every light on the control panel
should illuminate briefly, or blink, those which do
not should be pressed after the test to verify that
they light when pressed. When activated, the SYS
TEST ON legend illuminates momentarily indicat-
ing a valid memory self-test. The system sensitivity
alignment is verified when the four test quadrant
dots are within or touching the diamond signal.
Position of the quadrant dots also represents the
lethal range of threat radars. If the four dots are
shifted from the outer ring, the lethality envelope
has been shifted by that same amount. If the ver-
sion number blinks, then the operational flight pro-
gram or emitter identification data (OFP/EID)
memory has an error. If an R appears on the CRT
then an error in the processor ram memory has
been detected. Either of these errors could cause
incorrect threat information to be displayed; there-
fore, the processor should be repaired as soon as
possible. If an “M” appears on the CRT an error in
the loader software exists. This error will not affect
operation of the OFP but could adversely affect the
reprogramming process.
AFTER DZ The self-test of the RWR system con-
sists of two levels of reports, self test (short summa-
ry) and extended self test (detail required for main-
1-42K Change 7
tenance). Self test provides quick status of the sys-
tem and check of the operator indicators through
two Azimuth indicator screen displays that com-
plete in five seconds. Self test may be initiated and
repeated as often as necessary to verify proper op-
eration. Acceptable self-test results are indicated
by OK symbols. NOGO will be highlighted by
flashing BAD symbols. Indicators will change after
two seconds to screen one indicating SYS SWV
number, LAMPS ON and AUDIO ON then se-
quence automatically to screen two. Screen two pro-
vides detailed software versions for OFP and EID
and a comprehensive summary of system status.
An acceptable self-test will report all OK results.
INIT reports the hardware logic initialization re-
sults. Failure will be indicated by a flashing BAD
on Azimuth Indicator. MEMORY reports the ram
and non-volatile memory checksum results. During
self-test, memory locations are numerically
checked. Failure to pass check sum will be indi-
cated by a flashing BAD on Azimuth Indicator. DF
reports Band 1,2,3 video and Amplifier Detector
status. Failure will be indicated by a flashing BAD
on Azimuth Indicator. Antennas and associated
cabling are not included in self test and must be
tested by maintenance personnel using appropriate
test equipment.
Extended Self-Test AFTER DZ
Extended self-test is interruptive of normal warn-
ing function and takes in excess of two minutes to
complete. A total of twelve screens are displayed on
the Azimuth Indicator, summarizing specific details
of system status. System self-test should be per-
formed at the maintenance level to further define
self test faults reported by air crews. Initiating ex-
tended self test will assist maintenance personnel
in fault isolation. Upon completion of self test, soft-
ware will re-initialize and Azimuth Indicator will
return to normal display.
Cycle Timer
The cycle timer is a short vertical bar attached to
the left side of the 3 o’clock noise bar and alter-
nately points either up or down. The cycle timer
changes position each time the RWR has processed
data from all frequency bands. Therefore, the rate
at which the cycle timer moves is dependent on the
complexity of the environment that is being pro-
cessed.

Threat Files
The multitude of threats in today’s environment
requires the RWR to be very discriminating in
order to reduce ambiguity. Three expanded threat
files are available to the operator.
(1) Normal file contains land and water-based sur-
face-to-air missile systems, all airborne intercep-
tors, and land and sea-based AAA systems. This file
is for use over land and in coastal areas. Normal
file is automatically selected when power is applied
to the system. To return to normal file following
operator selection of terrain file, momentarily press
SYS TEST button followed by TGT SEP button on
control-indicator within 1 second.
(2) Terrain file contains land-based surface-to-air
missile systems, airborne interceptor, and land-
based: AAA radars and is for use over land areas
only. This file is obtained by pressing and releasing
SYS TEST followed by pressing and releasing T
(Target Separation) button within 1 second. No leg-
ends will illuminate but a symbol “T” will appear at
the bottom of the azimuth indicator at the EW offi-
cer position. When in terrain file, only 15 emitter
symbols will be displayed with the “T” symbol.
(3) Sea file contains water-based surface-to-air mis-
sile systems, all airborne interceptors, and all ship-
board AAA radars. This file is obtained by pressing
and releasing SYS TEST followed by the ship sym-
bol UNKNOWN button on the control-indicator
within 1 second. Only 15 emitter symbols may be
displayed with the ship symbol which is always
present in this file. To select sea file when in nor-
mal or terrain files, momentarily press SYS TEST
button followed by UNKNOWN button on control-
indicator within 1 second.
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
AFTER DZ (4) Training file is to be used only for
training purposes as it contains only those emitters
which are present at training sites and ranges. This
file is selected by pressing and releasing SYS TEST
and then pressing and releasing the MODE and
HANDOFF buttons simultaneously within one (1)
second. An “H” will appear at the bottom of the azi-
muth indicator.
Audio Scheme
The following audio schemes are available as a
function of environment and the operators selection
of control-indicator pushbuttons:
(1) Normal proportional audio, (diamond
pushbutton not latched), from all emitters which
are of sufficient strength to be processed, will be
heard. The amplitude of each prf will be propor-
tional to the power received from the threat. The
AUDIO control (figure 1-13) on the control-indica-
tor can be used to adjust the level of this audio.
(2) Diamond audio, (diamond pushbutton latched),
is provided to the crewmember who wishes to hear
the audio from only the symbol enclosed by the dia-
mond by pressing the HANDOFF button on the
control-indicator. Diamond audio amplitude is
constant, regardless of range of threat. Diamond
audio level can be adjusted with the AUDIO control
on the control-indicator.
(3) Launch audio, a synthetic launch warning tone,
is generated whenever an emitter guidance signal
goes into a launch state. It consists of one burst of
approximately seven beeps in 1.5 seconds of a 1 kc
tone generated in the signal processor.
Change 7 1-42L/(1-42M blank)
BLA

SENSOR INTEGRATION SYSTEM
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The sensor integration (SI) system is designed to
enhance the radar warning display capability of the
B-52 defensive avionics. The SI system collects
threat warning information from the Radar Warn-
ing Receiver (RWR), threat warning and jamming
information from the ALQ-172(V) ECM system, and
threat warning and jamming information from the
ALQ-155(V) ECM system. The SI system then ana-
lyzes the information from the respective systems
and optimizes the threat information on a multi-
function display. The SI countermeasures set con-
sists of one-half of the signal processor CM-
465A/ALQ-155(V) (SI/PMS signal processor), one
control panel ID-2463/ALQ-155(V) (SI control-indi-
cator), one multifunction display IP-1362/ASQ-175
(SI display), and ten data bus couplers for the
defensive avionics bus installed with the SI set. In
addition, the CM-479 processor must be repro-
grammed for the SI function. Component locations
are shown in figure 1-15. Sensor Integration con-
trols and indicators are shown in figure 1-16.
The SI system contains Built-In-Test (BIT) to pro-
vide a status of the warning system. The SI system
also provides the threat data to the ALQ-155(V) for
automatic mode operation. Reprogramming of the
SI/PMS processor can be accomplished with the
ASM-695 Program Loader Verifier (PLV).
The SI countermeasures set uses both 28-volt dc
and 115-volt, 400 Hz ac power from the aircraft
buses.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Control-Indicator ID-2463/ALQ-155(V)
The control-indicator (SI control) provides the con-
trols and indicators for the operation and control of
the SI system. Ten switch/indicators, containing
lamps for back-lighting front legends, and a lamp
intensity control are provided on the front panel of
the SI control. Control is also provided for switch-
ing operating power to the SI subsystem on or off
and for initiating self-test (BIT). See figure 1-16 for
control-indicator pushbutton/indicator legends.
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
Signal Processor CM-465A/ALQ-155(V)
The signal processor (SP) is the system controller
for the Countermeasures Set, operating under soft-
ware control. It can integrate up to six control-indi-
cator/programmers with each control-indicator/pro-
grammer capable of controlling two receiver/trans-
mitters (RCVR/XMTRs). The SP interfaces with the
control-indicator/programmer, RCVR/XMTR, RWR,
ALQ-172(V) countermeasures set, and the
ID-2463/ALQ-155(V) control-indicator. Threat infor-
mation is available in video format on the
IP-1362/ASQ-175 multifunction display (MFD)
which operates under the control of the SP. The SP
is programmed to provide all control functions and
implement the basic instruction set for the Coun-
termeasures Set. The SP consists of two functional
sections. These sections are the ALQ-155(V) signal
processor and the Sensor Integration (SI) signal
processor.
The ALQ-155(V) half of the SI/PMS processor con-
sists of a central processing unit (CPU) circuit card
assembly (CCA) and an ALQ-155 interface CCA.
The CPU CCA contains a microprocessor circuit
and an electrically erasable programmable read-
only-memory (EEPROM). The microprocessor cir-
cuit operates on instructions contained in the
EEPROM to automatically control the actions of the
ALQ-155(V) system. The ALQ-155 interface CCA
provides data routing circuits which interface the
control-indicator/programmer to the system receiv-
ers. The control-indicator/programmer provides
controls and indications required for remote control
of the system and controls for initiating the jam-
ming program desired. The sensor integration half
of the SI/PMS processor consists of three CCAs. The
CPU CCA acts upon instructions contained in
EEPROM to create the information presented on
the multifunction display (MFD). The sensor
integration interface CCA provides data commu-
nications between the RWR system, the
ALQ-172(V) system, and the CPU CCA. If the sen-
sor integration half of the SI/PMS processor is not
operative, the data from the RWR is passed through
to the ALQ-155(V) half. The MFD driver CCA con-
tains the circuits necessary to control the MFD.
If the Sensor Integration half of the signal proces-
sor is not operative, the data from the RWR is
passed through to the ALQ-155(V) half of the signal
processor. The MFD driver CCA contains the cir-
cuits necessary to control the MFD.
Change 7 1-43
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

SI Display IP-1362/ASQ-175 The display may be divided in functional areas as

follows:
The SI display has a cathode ray tube (CRT) which 1. Threat Display.
provides the operator with threat jamming, angle of
arrival, frequency, and pulse repetition interval 2. Diamond Threat and Associated Emitter
(PRI) information along with ALQ-155, RWR, and Section.
ALQ-172 self test results. Brightness and contrast 3. Indentifying Sensors Section. Appropriate Sys-
controls are provided to adjust the intensity of the tem box(es) illuminate to indicate which sensors are
MFD CRT display. The SI display is shown in figure receiving the threat enclosed in the HANDOFF dia-
1-16. mond.
4. RWR Status Box.
5. ALQ-172 Status Box.
6. SI Mode Status Box.
7. System Fault Status Box.

1-44 Change 7
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Sensor Integration Component Locations

1 SI PROCESSOR
2 DATA BUS COUPLERS

Figure 1-15

1-45
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Sensor Integration Controls and Indicators

SI CONTROL PANEL

1 ALQ-155 MODE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR

2 BIT STATUS PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
3 HANDOFF PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
4 SEARCH/UNKNOWN PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
5 BLANK
6 AUDIO CONTROL
7 DIMMING CONTROL
8 SYSTEM POWER PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
9 RESET PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
10 TARGET SEPARATION PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
11 SYSTEM TEST PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
12 PRIORITY MODE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR

Figure 1-16 (Sheet 1 of 6)

1-46
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

SI MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD)

13 THRESHOLD BARS (THREAT DISPLAY) 18 IDENTIFYING SENSORS

14 JAM 155-172 (THREAT DISPLAY) 19 ALQ-172 STATUS BOX
15 AZIMUTH CIRCLE (THREAT DISPLAY) 20 RWR STATUS BOX
16 SPECIAL TECHNIQUE (THREAT DISPLAY) 21 SI MODE AND SYSTEM FAULT BOXES
17 DIAMOND THREAT AND ASSOCIATED EMITTERS
Figure 1-16 (Sheet 2 of 6)

Change 7 1-47
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Sensor Integration Controls and Indicators (Cont)

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

SI CONTROL PANEL

1 ALQ-155 MODE Pushbutton-Indicator When pressed (upper legend ALQ-155 illuminated), allows diamond
symbol to be moved to only those threats detectable by the AN/ALQ-155
system. When pressed (lower legend OPEN illuminated), allows dia-
mond symbol to be moved to any displayed threat .

2 BIT STATUS Pushbutton-Indicator When pressed (upper legend STATUS illuminated), toggles MFD be-
tween BIT status display and tactical display. When pressed (lower leg-
end STATUS illuminated), provides continuously illuminated control leg-
end.

3 HANDOFF Pushbutton-Indicator
When pressed (upper legend diamond symbol illuminated), the diamond
symbol rotates through threats displayed on the MFD as determined by
the ALQ-155 Mode pushbutton-indicator. When pressed and quickly
released, causes diamond to move to the highest priority threat. When
pressed (lower legend HANDOFF illuminated) provides continuously illu-
minated control legend.

4 SEARCH/UNKNOWN Pushbutton- When pressed (upper legend SEARCH illuminated), allows concurrent
Indicator display of search and other type symbols on the MFD. When pressed
(lower legend UNKNOWN illuminated), allows display of unknown sym-
bols on the MFD. Any of four combinations of these modes is possible.

5 Blank

6 AUDIO Control Rotate CW to increase audio volume. Rotate CCW to decrease audio vol-
ume

7 Dimming Control Rotate CW to increase legend light intensity. Rotate CCW to decrease
legend light intensity

8 SYSTEM POWER Pushbutton- When pressed (both upper and lower POWER legend illuminated),
Indicator 115-volt AC operating power is applied to the Sl subsystem

9 RESET Pushbutton-Indicator SYMBOL (upper)

When depressed, clears threat information and re-acquires current SI in-
formation from sensors.
RESET (Lower)
Provides continuously illuminated control legend.

10 Target Separation Pushbutton- When pressed (upper legend SEP DEF illuminated) emitters displayed
Indicator on MFD are compressed to their original location (target separation
defeated). When released, operates in target separate mode. Targets
are separated so that individual symbols do not overlap and display.
Lower legend, TGT SEP is illuminated regardless of mode.

11 System Test Pushbutton-Indicator When pressed (upper legend ON illuminated), toggles built-in-test (BIT)
BIT may be stopped by pressing button during test. When pressed (lower
legend SYS TEST illuminated) provides continuously illuminated control
legend.

Figure 1-16 (Sheet 3 of 6)

1-48 Change 1
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

SI MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD)

12 PRIORITY MODE Pushbutton- When pressed (upper legend PRIORITY illuminated), MFD displays five
Indicator symbols of highest priority for 30 seconds. The display may be stopped
by pressing button during the 30 second period. When pressed (lower
legend PRIORITY illuminated) provides continuously illuminated control
legend.

13 Threshold Bars (Threat Display) Each of the three bars represents a frequency band received by the RWR
system. When present, the bar indicates that noise in the RWR amplifier-
detectors is below a predetermined limit. If a bar is not present, the RWR
system has detected excess noise in the associated band and is operat-
ing at a reduced threshold level.

14 JAM 155-172 (Threat Display) Indicates that the ALQ-155 and ALQ-172 jamming systems are counter-
ing the same threat. This legend is displayed with an inverted video back-
ground.

15 Azimuth Circle (Threat Display) Provides angle of arrival information for threats sensed by EW sensors.
Top of display is current aircraft heading. Threat symbology is similar to
that used in standard radar warning receiver systems. Threats being
jammed are presented on a light background (inverted video).

16 SPECIAL TECHNIQUE When ALQ-172 is countering a threat using special technique, an indica-
(Threat Display) tion of this jamming appears in this area. The threat symbol jamming indi-
cation (inverted video background) associated with this technique
flashes on and off. This legend is displayed with an inverted video back-
ground.

17 Diamond Threat and Associated This section displays emitter information for the threat enclosed in the
Emitters HANDOFF diamond. Information for four associated emitters can be dis-
played. When an emitter is being countered by the ALQ-155 or ALQ-172
system, the information is presented on a light background (inverted
video). Emitter types are identified by the following symbols:

Type Symbol

TTR No symbol

Missile Activity,
Missile Launch, or
Missile Guidance (Circle)

Acquisition (Square)

FREQ is a display of emitter frequency.

SCAN is the scan type of the emitter.

PRF is a display of emitter PRF. PRF also displays CW or CYCLER for

appropriate emitters.

Figure 1-16 (Sheet 4 of 6)

Change 7 1-49
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Sensor Integration Controls and Indicators (Cont)

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

SI MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY (MFD) (Cont)

18 Identifying Sensors Boxes illuminate to indicate which sensors are receiving the threat
enclosed in the HANDOFF diamond.

19 ALQ-172 Status Box

PR O or S Indicates the operational status of the ALQ-172 pulse radar system

FORE and AFT (F and A).

O - Operational
S - Standby

PD O or S Indicates the operational status of the ALQ-172 pulse Doppler system

FORE and AFT (F and A).

O - Operational
S - Standby

HIGH or LOW Indicates the ALQ-172 system altitude mode.

T or W Indicates the ALQ-172 mode.

T - Training mode
W - War mode

See ALQ-172, this section, for explanation of ALQ-172 modes.

20 RWR Status Box RWR operational mode:

T Terrain Mode

N, or N Normal mode
- Sea mode

See ALR-46, this section, for explanation of ALR-46 modes.

OPEN or 155 Indicates the state of the ALQ-155 mode pushbutton-indicator.

HIGH or LOW Indicates the RWR altitude mode.

S Indicates the RWR Search mode is enabled.
U Indicates the RWR Unknown mode is enabled.

Figure 1-16 (Sheet 5 of 6)

1-50 Change 7
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

21 SI Mode and System Fault Boxes

OPEN or 155 Indicates the state of the SI ALQ-155 mode pushbutton-indicator.

TOP 5 Indicates that the PRIORITY mode pushbutton has been depressed.

S Indicates that the SI Search mode is selected.

U Indicates that the SI Unknown mode is selected.

SI FAULT Indicates that a built-in-test (BIT) failure is detected in the SI subsystem.

46 FAULT Indicates that a BIT failure is detected in the RWR system.

155 FAULT Indicates that a BIT failure is detected in the ALQ-155 system.

172 F FAULT Indicates that a BIT failure is detected in the ALQ-172 FORE system or
that the MIL-STD-1553 data bus is inoperative.

172A FAULT Indicates that a BIT failure is detected in the ALQ-172 AFT system or that
the MIL-STD-1553 data bus in operative.

Figure 1-16 (Sheet 6 of 6)

Change 7 1-51
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Sensor Integration BIT Displays

SI MFD INITIATED BIT DISPLAY

SI MFD OPERATIONAL BIT STATUS DISPLAY

Figure 1-17

1-52

NORMAL OPERATION
The SI system collects threat warning data from
the RWR and threat warning data and jamming
information from both the ALQ-172(V) and the
ALQ-155(V). Therefore, these systems must be
functional to interact with the SI system for normal
operation. To operate the SI system, ensure the SI
control and SI display circuit breakers located on
the A177 ECM circuit breaker panel are in. The SI
control panel contains pushbutton-indicators and
control knobs for SI operation. The audio control
knob should be set to minimum volume for check of
the missile launch tone. Operational displays are
shown in figure 1-16. Press and release the SYS-
TEM POWER button-indicator. Lamps on the SI
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
control panel illuminate; then, after 20 seconds
operational data and status appears on the SI
MFD. Press and release the SYS TEST button-indi-
cator. Ensure the missile launch tone is audible for
approximately 1.5 seconds and verify the initiated
BIT display (figure 1-17) appears on the SI MFD.
Set the audio control knob to mid range. Further
audio adjustment may be necessary as the mission
dictates. Press and release the SYS TEST button-
indicator again to return the SI MFD operational
data and status presentation. Press and release the
BIT STATUS button-indicator. The operational BIT
status appears on the SI MFD. Press and release
the BIT STATUS button-indicator again to return
to the SI MFD to the operational data and status
presentation.
Change 7 1-53/(1-54 blank)
BLA

BLANKING SYSTEM
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Blanking to the ECM receiving systems is provided
by the OAS Radar Set Group (Radar Set). The
blanking pulses cut off the receivers to avoid receiv-
ing transmitted signals from the Radar Set. This
avoids the possibility of confusing the Radar Set
transmitted signals with those of an enemy radar
unit.
Radar Set blanking signals are supplied through
the blanking amplifier to the ALR-20A system, or
to the RWR, and terrain computer through the for-
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
ward CV-3809/ALQ-172(V) signal data converter
and through the forward and aft ALQ-172(V)2 sys-
tem. ALQ-172(V)2 forward PR transmitter blanking
is supplied to the radar receiver-transmitter
through the forward CV-3809/ ALQ-172(V) signal
data converter. ALQ-172(V)2 aft PR transmitter
blanking is supplied to the RWR through the aft
CV-3809/ALQ-172(V) signal data converter. The
blanking system equipment location is shown in fig-
ure 1-18.
Change 7 1-55
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Equipment Locations

1 R-2247/ALQ-172(V) RECEIVER (SYSTEM NO. 16)

2 RWR SIGNAL PROCESSOR
3 CV-3809/ALQ-172(V) SIGNAL DATA CONVERTER
(SYSTEM 16)
4 C-9449/ALR-20A RECEIVER CONTROL
5 BLANKING AMPLIFIER
6 BLANKING CABLE STOWAGE RECEPTACLE 9 CV-3809/ALQ-172(V) SIGNAL DATA CONVERTER
7 BLANKING MODULE (SYSTEM NO. 16) (SYSTEM 15)
8 BLANKING MODULE (SYSTEM NO. 15) 10 R-2247/ALQ-172(V) RECEIVER (SYSTEM NO. 15)
Figure 1-18

1-56 Change 7

TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS
AN/AL T-16A
AN/AL T-28(V) JAMMING TRANSMITTER
AN/AL T-32A JAMMING TRANSMITTER
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
AN/ALT-16A
Two AN/ALT-16A transmitter sets are integrated
with the AN/ALQ-122 to make up the AN/
ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A countermeasures system
(see ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A COUNTERMEASURES
SYSTEM, under RECEIVER TRANSMITTER SYS-
TEMS, this section).
AN/ALT-28(V) JAMMING TRANSMITTER
The AN/ALT-28(V) jamming transmitter system
(used as alternate mission equipment to the AN/
ALQ-155(V) power management system) is capable
of providing various types of RF power output cov-
ering a wide frequency range by using interchange-
able transmitter groups. (see ALQ-155(V) POWER
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM under RECEIVER-
TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS, this section).
Each transmitter group has a specific frequency
range and power output which is designated as a
band. Each system consists of a T-1150/ALT-28(V)
transmitter, HD-766A/ALT-28(V) dual electronic
equipment liquid cooler, antenna system, and 1/2 of
a C-10130/ALQ-155(V) control indicator/program-
mer. Location of system components is shown in fig-
ure 1-29. The transmitter contains an M-type back-
ward wave oscillator (BWO) and most of the func-
tional circuits of the system. The transmitter hous-
ing is a magnesium casting which provides mount-
ing for the BWO, and liquid and air-cooled cavities
in which modules containing the power supplies,
regulators, and modulators associated with the
BWO are mounted. The liquid cooler comprises a
reservoir for cooling fluid, a single motor which
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
1-57
1-57
1-57
1-60
drives both a pump and fan, a cooling coil, and cir-
cuitry for control of the system timing periods. The
AN/ALQ-155(V) control-indicator provides controls
and indications required for remote control of the
system. Circuitry from the control-indicator to the
transmitter passes through the liquid cooler provid-
ing interlock protection. The programmer provides
controls for initiating the jamming program
desired. The C-9525/ALT-28(V) antenna select
panel drives a waveguide switch for systems No. 1
and 2 to transfer electromagnetic energy from the
transmitter to either the forward or omni antennas.
Circuits within the panel control dc voltages used to
disable the transmitters during waveguide switch-
ing time.
AN/ALT-32A JAMMING TRANSMITTER
The AN/ALT-32A jamming transmitter is an air-
borne countermeasures transmitter capable of jam-
ming enemy radar. The complete AN/ALT-32A sys-
tem includes low-band and high-band sets. One
low-band set is installed in position No. 20 and two
high-band sets are installed in positions No. 11 and
12. The low-band set is comprised of a T-1086A/
ALT-32A radio transmitter, T-1087/ALT-32A radio
transmitter, PP-1087/ALT-32 power supply, and a
C-7721/ALT-32A control indicator. The high-band
set is comprised of a T-1087/ALT-32A radio trans-
mitter, PP-1087/ALT-32 power supply, and a
C-7722/ALT-32A control-indicator. All operating
controls and indicators are located on the front
panel of the control-indicators. Component loca-
tions are shown in figure 1-19. ALT-32A controls
and indicators are shown in figure 1-20.
1-57
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALT-32A Component Locations

Figure 1-19 (Sheet 1 of 2)

1-58 Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Figure 1-19 (Sheet 2 of 2)

1-59
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALT-32A Operating Controls and Indicators

1 SPOT A FREQUENCY CONTROL 6 FAULT LIGHT

2 SPOT A BANDWIDTH CONTROL 7 STANDBY LIGHT
3 SPOT B BANDWIDTH CONTROL 8 WARMUP LIGHT
4 TRANSMIT CHANNEL SELECTOR 9 SPOT B FREQUENCY CONTROL
5 RADIATE LIGHT

Figure 1-20 (Sheet 1 of 2)

1-60
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

1 Spot A Frequency Control Adjusts the center frequency of spot A transmitted signal.

2 Spot A Bandwidth Control Adjusts the bandwidth of the center frequency of spot A transmitted
signal.

3 Spot B Bandwidth Control Adjusts the bandwidth of the center frequency of spot B transmitted
signal.

4 TRANSMIT Channel Selector
A rotary selector controls the application of power to the equipment and
selects the mode of operation. STBY position provides power to the
blower circuits and to the standby light. SPOT A position energizes the
spot A noise circuits and applies operating power to that portion of the
transmitter. SPOT B position energizes the spot B noise circuits and
applies operating power to that portion of the transmitter. SPOT A & B
position simultaneously energizes both spot A and spot B noise circuits
and applies operating power to that portion of the transmitter. BARRAGE
1, 2, 3 and 4 deenergizes the spot noise circuits, activates the barrage
noise circuits, and applies operating power to the transmitter. Barrage
noise will be radiated in the channelized bandwidth determined by the
numerical position selected.

NOTE

If transmitter is placed in A, B, or A & B Modes with Spot (A or

B) frequency control knob CCW, the transmitter may not come
into operation. Move the appropriate (Spot A or B) frequency
control knob clockwise until the transmitter comes into opera-
tion. The frequency control knob may then be returned to the
CCW position if desired.

5 RADIATE Light A green light,when illuminated, indicates that the transmitter is radiating
RF energy.

6 FAULT Light A white light, when illuminated, indicates the failure of the 3–phase ac
input, or a reduction of the inputs by 50% or more. When illuminated, the
primary power circuit is deenergized preventing operation of blowers.

7 STANDBY Light An amber light, when illuminated, indicates that the transmit channel
selector is in STANDBY position. The 60-second warmup is complete,
and the delay control relay is energized.

8 WARMUP Light (Not functional)

9 Spot B Frequency Control Adjusts the center frequency of spot B transmitted signal.

10 Shaft Locks A shaft lock, mounted concentrically with each frequency control and
each bandwidth control, locks the control in place. Clockwise rotation of
the lock locks the control, while counterclockwise rotation unlocks the
control.

Figure 1-20 (Sheet 2 of 2)

1-61/(1-62 blank)
BLA

RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS
AN/ALQ-172 COUNTERMEASURES SET
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (CDU)
AN/ALQ-172 AUXILIARY PANEL
CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (CDU) OPERATION
CDU SYMBOL SET
NORMAL OPERATION
CDU NORMAL OPERATION
KEYBOARD COMMANDS
AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEM
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
AN/ALQ-153(V) TAIL WARNING SYSTEM
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NORMAL OPERATION
AN/ALQ-155(V) POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NORMAL OPERATION
AN/ALQ-172(V)2 COUNTERMEASURES SET
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The AN/ALQ-172(V)2 countermeasures set is a ful-
ly automatic receiving and transmitting ECM set.
The set provides the aircraft with protection
against threat radars. The AN/ALQ-172(V)2 set
consists of two systems, designated systems 15 (aft)
and 16 (fwd). Each system includes one counter-
measures receiver R-2247/ALQ-172(V) (receiver)
(LRU-1), one countermeasures transmitter T-1470/
ALQ-172(V) (PR transmitter) (LRU-2), one counter-
measures transmitter T-1476/ALQ-172(V) (PD/CW
transmitter) (LRU-4), one countermeasures conver-
ter CV-3773/ALQ-172(V)2 (converter) (LRU-7), two
phased array antennas AS-4078/ALQ-172(V)2 (an-
tenna) (LRU-8), one quadrant switch SA-2396/
ALQ-172(V)2 (switch) (LRU-9), one countermea-
sures signal controller C-11271/ALQ-172(V) (PD/
CW processor) (LRU -10), and one signal data con-
verter CV-3809/ALQ-172(V). The forward system
also contains one transmitter T-1471/ALQ-172(V)2
(LRU-12) (See figures 1-22 and 1-23). Additionally
the forward and aft systems each utilize an omni
receive antenna E6329 (FWD) and E6337 (AFT).
The forward system equipment (system 16) is in-
stalled in the forward radome. The aft system
equipment (system 15) is installed in the tail sec-
tion. See figure 1-21.
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
1-63
1-63
1-65
1-72G
1-72J
1-72V
1-73
1-74
1-74D
1-75
1-75
1-75
1-83
1-83
1-83
1-91
1-92
1-92
1-92
1-101
Less DT The systems share a common control-in-
dicator C-11213/ALQ-172(V) (control-indicator)
(LRU-5) and control-monitor C-11270/ALQ-172(V)
(control-monitor) (LRU-6). Both controls are in-
stalled at the EW officer station.
DT The systems share a common Control-Display
Unit (CDU) C-12615/ALQ-172(V) (LRU-21). This
control is installed at the EW officer station. The
C-12615/ALQ-172(V) Control-Display Unit (CDU)
(LRU-21) provides control and display functions for
the two ALQ-172(V)2 systems. In addition it pro-
vides communication and threat hand off between
the two ALQ-172 systems. The CDU allows for
ALQ-172(V) memory loading and reading via a
PCMCIA card (Personal Computer Memory Card
International Association) inserted in the front pan-
el. The PCMCIA card is the approximate dimen-
sions of a credit card, but is thicker. Only Wing EW
officer approved PCMCIA cards may be used with
the CDU. The function of the PCMCIA interface is
to allow for data loading of the ALQ-172(V)2 system
including CDU, data recording and playback. An
Auxiliary Panel is also installed which includes
switches for system power and HIGH/LOW altitude
override. Both controls are installed at the EW offi-
cer station.
Change 9 1-63
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
Each AN/ALQ-172(V)2 system comprises a Pulse
Radar (PR) and a Pulse Doppler (PD) subsystem.
The PR subsystem detects threats from convention-
al pulse radar fire control systems and applies ap-
propriate countermeasures. The PD subsystem rec-
ognizes threats from PD types of fire control radars
and applies appropriate countermeasures. All oper-
ation is automatic including the reception and rec-
ognition of threats and the programming and appli-
cation of suitable countermeasures. The set con-
tains comprehensive Built-In-Test (BIT) features.
These features test overall functions of the system
LRUs from the antenna inputs to the control-indi-
cators. For flight line maintenance, the set BIT pro-
vides the means of isolating most failures to a par-
ticular LRU. BIT is initiated by pressing the TEST
button on DT the C-12615/ALQ-172(V) Control Dis-
play Unit or Less DT the C-11213/ALQ-172(V) con-
trol-indicator. Programmed tests are then con-
ducted automatically. These results are indicated to
the operator on the DT C-12615/ALQ-172(V) Con-
trol Display Unit or Less DT lights on the
C-11213/ALQ-172(V) control-indicator and displays
on the C-11270/ ALQ-172(V) control-monitor.
DT The CDU receives ALQ-172 bit, system status
and situation information via an internal ALQ-172
local 1553B Data Bus (figure 1-20A). Also, the for-
ward and aft receivers are connected to the Sensor
Integration (SI) countermeasures set through the
Defensive System 1553B Data Bus. This enables
threat and system status information to be dis-
played on the SI display.
Less DT The forward and aft R-2247 receivers are
interconnected with the SI countermeasures set
through data bus couplers. This enables threat and
system status information to be displayed on the SI
display.
Aircraft Interface
The AN/ALQ-172(V)2 aft PR receiver is blanked
from the B-52 Radar Set; the AN/ALQ-172(V)2 for-
ward PR receiver is blanked only by the B-52 Radar
Set. This avoids electromagnetic interference to the
PR subsystem. These blanking signals are routed to
the PR receivers through the blanking modules.
Blanking is provided from both forward and aft PR
transmitters to the AN/ALR-46 receiver, and from
the forward PR transmitter to the B-52 Radar Set.
This blanking signal is routed to the receiver
through the CV-3809/ALQ-172(V) signal data con-
verters. Forward and aft systems are intercon-
nected with the AN/ALQ-155 power management
system. This provides compatibility between the
AN/ALQ-155 band 12 transmitters and the AN/
1-64 Change 9
ALQ-172(V)2 PD subsystem. An RF filter in the for-
ward AN/ALQ-172(V)2 PR subsystem provides com-
patibility between the AN/ALQ-155 band 12 trans-
mitters/receivers and the AN/ALQ-172(V)2 PR sub-
system.
Pressurized waveguides are used for all the trans-
mitting RF transmission lines and for the
waveguide that connects the transmitter output to
the RF switch input. Pressurization for the
waveguide is supplied from two PN 2830400-3 com-
pressors, one forward and one aft. Two SA-377/ASQ
pressure switches are installed with each compres-
sor. The high pressure switch operates the compres-
sor when the waveguide pressurization falls below
30.5 inches of Hg, while the low pressure switch
operates the waveguide low pressure warning
lights when waveguide pressure falls below 24
(±0.5) inches of Hg. The forward air compressor also
supplies pressure to the AN/ALQ-155(V) systems 1
and 2 waveguides.
Two waveguide low pressure lights, one for the for-
ward and one for the aft system, are located on the
ALQ-172 waveguide low pressure warning and
blanking panel (figure 1-24). Illumination of either
light indicates insufficient pressure in the applica-
ble system for proper operation and the pump in
that system will continue to operate until shut off
by pulling the associated pump circuit breaker(s) lo-
cated on the Overhead A117 DECM CB Panel.
When either waveguide low pressure light illumi-
nates refer to the AN/ALQ-172 Malfunction Analy-
sis Checklist in Section III of this manual.
The forward air compressor supplies pressure for
both the AN/ALQ-172(V)2 forward and the the AN/
ALQ-155(V) systems 1 and 2 waveguide runs. Pres-
sure tubing from the forward compressor connects
directly to the AN/ALQ-155(V) system 1 and 2 omni
antenna waveguide runs. This configuration pro-
vides complete pressurization for systems 1 and 2
omni antenna, forward antenna, and the transmit-
ter waveguide runs. Waveguide pressure for the
AN/ALQ-172(V)2 forward system is supplied by a
pressure tube running from the AN/ALQ-155 sys-
tem 2 forward antenna waveguide.
Two 5-amp 28 volt-dc circuit breakers on the DECM
circuit breaker panel labeled SYS 15 PRESS PUMP
and SYS 16 PRESS PUMP supply control voltages
to high pressure switches. The switches provide on-
off control for the compressors. A 5-amp 28 volt-dc
circuit breaker on the DECM circuit breaker panel
labeled PRESS PUMP INDICATOR supplies con-
trol voltage to the waveguide low pressure warning
light(s) and low pressure switches.

DT CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (CDU)
The AN/ALQ-172(V) LRU-21 Control Display Unit
(CDU) C-12615/ALQ-172(V) replaces LRU-5 and
LRU-6. The CDU performs the Operator Interface,
the hand off of threat signals between systems, and
the communication between the systems and CDU
via the ALQ-172 local 1553 Bus; plus the capability
to load the EID, OFP and ECM data via the 1553B
data bus through the CDU, using a PCMCIA card
as a storage/transport medium. The CDU also pro-
vides maintenance diagnostics capability by report-
ing the results of the 172 systems self test. Detailed
diagnostics files can also be selected to assist with
fault isolation. The CDU also provides record/play-
back capability as well as display of OAS NAV data.
The CDU performs the following major functions:
• Power and control of ALQ-172 FWD and AFT
LRUs.
• Threat situation display.
• System status display.
• Signal handoff.
• Overtemperature report/override.
• Self test results display.
• Self test details and fault diagnostics.
• OFP/EID/ECM file data loading.
• Configuration identification.
• Recording and playback.
• OAS NAV data display.
The CDU is capable of controlling up to three
ALQ-172 systems in either the Fail/Safe or CDU
GO mode of operation. It consists of three modules
(figure 1-20B); a Switch/Display module with a
PCMCIA module; an Electronics module; and the
Personality module.
The CDU controls two ALQ-172 systems, config-
ured as FWD and AFT systems. The CDU has two
modes, the fail-safe interface mode and the CDU
GO mode. See CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (CDU)
OPERATION this section for discussion of the two
modes.
Figure 1-23A shows the front view of the CDU. The
CDU contains a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD),
switches for power on, test initiate, and standby/op-
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
erate enable, and two sets of four software pro-
grammable switches. The programmable switches
are arranged along the bottom for display control
and down the right side for system control. A rocker
switch varies the intensity of the LCD display. The
CDU has a carrying handle that is used to assist
with installation, removal, and transportation of
the CDU. The handle should always be stowed and
locked in the upright position after installation.
NOTE
The handle must always be in the stowed
and locked (upright position) inflight.
The Display module provides the operator interface.
It contains three single function switches, one
dedicated indicator, 8 programmable switches, a
PCMCIA interface, a keyboard connector, a ambient
light sensor and dimming control, and a 6 by 8
Color Active Matrix Liquid Crystal Display panel
incorporating a Touch Screen. The necessary
electronics and lighting for the active matrix LCD
and the programmable switches are contained in
this module.
The electronics module contains the processor and
communications electronics to communicate with
both ALQ-172 systems and the display module and
process and display the data reported. It also
contains the power supplies for all functions. This
module stores the software (in solid state memory)
to run the CDU GO mode of operation. The CDU
can be booted with a PCMCIA card installed,
bypassing the installed software stored in the
electronics unit. This is used for loading ALQ-172
system files (EID, OFP, ECM) into the 172 systems,
for maintenance troubleshooting, as well as for
updating the software stored in the CDU
electronics unit. (i.e. if the user requires loading a
new version of CDU software it can be loaded from
a preprogrammed PCMCIA card).
The personality module contains the interface for
three ALQ-172 systems and the Aircraft
(Connectors) and the relay logic for fail safe
operation. The present aircraft design uses only two
systems. The third system is for future growth.
This logic, similar to the LRU-5 logic circuits,
provides for operation of the ALQ-172 systems in
the event of a CDU failure.
Change 9 1-65
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
ALQ-172 Component Block Diagram
DT
Figure 1-20A
The CDU provides a continuous threat status dis-
play of the type of threat (PR, PD, CW), direction of
threat (relative to aircraft heading), the system’s re-
sponse to the threat (jam indictions) and threat
symbology based upon the threat identification and
mode i.e. search, track, illuminate or guidance.
Threat symbols are displayed at the relative bear-
ing as reported by the ALQ-172 systems and at a
relative range from the center or the area depend-
ing on their received signal strength. The display is
a bulls eye consisting of two concentric circles. Sig-
nals detected, but below jam threshold, will be dis-
played in red in the outer ring of the bulls eye. As
the signal strength increases, the symbol will be
positioned closer to the inner ring. When the signal
is above jam threshold and actively being jammed,
the symbol color will change to green. If the signal
does not have a valid DF report, the symbol will ap-
pear in yellow regardless of whether or not it is be-
ing jammed. Signals with invalid DF reports will
appear along the 225° (AFT) or 315° (FWD) azi-
1-66 Change 9
muth at a relative range based on signal strength.
It will change to the appropriate red or green upon
receipt of a valid DF report from the ALQ-172 sys-
tems.
This condition can occur during periods where the
signal is above 172 system receiver threshold but
not yet above antenna subsystem receiver threshold
or during the signal acquisition interval where the
172 trackers have not yet established signal track-
ing gates required by the antenna system.
The yellow symbol can be displayed at any beam
position not just default if invalid DF report is pro-
cessed after receipt of a valid DF report. In this
case the symbol will be placed at the last known
valid DF position with its color changing from red
or green to yellow until another valid DF report is
received in which case its color will switch back to
red or green as appropriate.

ALQ-172 Control Display Unit
DT
Figure 1-20B
System resource status is displayed on the screen
in the upper right corner i.e. how many channels
are tracking signals. LRU failure indications as
well as resource activity indicators display the type
of system resources available to handle new
threats. Threat data for a selected threat is dis-
played in the system status data field. A threat can
be selected by touching the screen where the sym-
bol appears or using the handoff pushbutton. When
a threat is selected by placing the select diamond
around the symbol, the corresponding data from the
threat is displayed in the threat data field. Data
displayed includes the threat name, symbol fre-
quency, PRF, mode, the ALQ-172 system process-
ing/engaging the threat, and the emitter angle of
arrival (AOA) and clock position. Selecting the
handoff pushbutton repeatedly will sequence
through the threats being displayed in the order
that the threats were received and placed into the
CDU track file.
If only one symbol is present on the display, the
symbol will automatically be selected and its corre-
sponding data displayed in the threat data field.
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
In situations where both the FWD and AFT sys-
tems detect the same signal, the CDU will control
signal handoff so that only one symbol will appear
on the display and only one system jams the signal.
The CDU continuously monitors the threat process-
ing conditions and determines when to perform sig-
nal handoff to the other system. The decision crite-
ria is based on threat frequency, PRF and ampli-
tude reports. Transition from one system to another
will only occur at the completion of an ECM cycle.
As a result, signal handoff will not be commanded
in the middle of an ECM program sequence.
The frequency activity indicator is at the bottom of
the situation display. Signals reported by both sys-
tems are displayed in 1 GHz increments starting at
A-2 on the left and incrementing to C+4 on the
right. Navigation data received from the OAS NAV
data bus is displayed at the top of the situation dis-
play. The data includes heading, altitude, air speed,
latitude and longitude. Time is displayed in the sys-
tem status area. The time can be set manually or
obtained automatically from the OAS.
Change 9 1-66A/(1-66B blank)
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Component Locations

Figure 1-21 (Sheet 1 of 5)

Change 9 1-67
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Component Locations (Cont)

Figure 1-21 (Sheet 2 of 5)

1-68 Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Figure 1-21 (Sheet 3 of 5)

Change 9 1-69
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Component Locations (Cont)

Figure 1-21 (Sheet 4 of 5)

1-70 Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Figure 1-21 (Sheet 5 of 5)

Change 9 1-71
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Controls and Indicators

Less DT

C-11213/ALQ-172 CONTROL-INDICATOR

1 MODE SELECTOR INDICATOR

2 FAIL INDICATOR
3 COLD INDICATOR
4 HOT INDICATOR LIGHT/OVERRIDE SWITCH INDICATOR
5 CONTROL-INDICATOR LAMP TEST PUSHBUTTON
6 POWER SWITCH INDICATOR
7 TEST STATUS INDICATOR
8 SECURE SWITCH
9 SELF-TEST PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
10 TEST STATUS INDICATOR
11 PD AFT STANDBY/OPERATE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
12 PD FWD STANDBY/OPERATE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
13 PR AFT STANDBY/OPERATE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
14 PR FWD STANDBY/OPERATE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
15 AFT TEST INDICATOR
16 FWD TEST INDICATOR

Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for ALQ-172 control and indicator functions.

Figure 1-22

1-72 Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Control Monitor

Less DT

C-11270/ALQ-172 CONTROL MONITOR

1 PD FWD JAM INDICATOR LIGHT 5 CONTROL MONITOR LAMP TEST PUSHBUTTON

2 THREAT DISPLAY INDICATOR 6 PR AFT JAM INDICATOR LIGHT
3 PD AFT JAM INDICATOR LIGHT 7 PR FWD JAM INDICATOR LIGHT
4 DIMMER CONTROL 8 WEDGE VALUES

Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for ALQ-172 control and indicator functions.

Figure 1-23

Change 9 1-72A
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Control Display Unit

DT

1 BACK LIT COLOR LCD SCREEN

2 GO INDICATOR
3 POWER PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
4 FWD STANDBY/OPERATE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
5 SPARE PUSHBUTTON INDICATOR
6 KEYBOARD CONNECTOR
7 AFT STANDBY/OPERATE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
8 HOT/COLD/FAIL INDICATOR/OVERRIDE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
9 TEST INITIATE PUSHBUTTON-INDICATOR
10 MASTER STANDBY/OPERATE INDICATOR
11 PCMCIA INTERFACE
12 SELECT KEY INDICATOR/SWITCHES
13 LCD BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
14 LIGHT SENSOR

Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for Classified functions.

Figure 1-23A (Sheet 1 of 5)

1-72B Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

1 LCD Color Display A back lit 6 X 8 inch color touch screen with a minimum 640 X 480 pixel
color active matrix display is used for displaying situation awareness and
system status. Sixteen colors are available for display. The touch screen
can be activated with or without gloves.

2 Go Indicator The pushbutton switch indicator comes on to indicate power status of

system components. Pressing the Go Indicator will perform a Lamp Test,
which will light all non-programmable switches including LWR which is for
future growth.

CDU (Green) CDU indicator comes on to indicate that the CDU GO mode is active.
FWD (Green) FWD indicator comes on to indicate that the forward system is powered.
AFT (Green) AFT indicator comes on to indicate that the aft system is powered.

3 POWER Pushbutton-Indicator The pushbutton switch indicator applies power to the FWD and AFT
systems and the CDU. Provided that the Auxiliary Panel switches are on.
POWER (Green) POWER is always lit when power is available to the CDU.
//// (Green) The presence of green diagonal lines indicate power has been applied
to the CDU.
4 FWD Standby/Operate The software programmable pushbutton switch indicator is used for FWD
Pushbutton/Indicator system control indicates when FWD System is in Standby/Operate
Mode. Pressing the pushbutton when in Standby switches the FWD sys-
tem to Operate Mode. Pressing the pushbutton when in Operate Mode
switches the system into Standby Mode.
The Operate state is indicated by both the PR and PD legends being high-
lighted in reverse video (i.e. Operate mode selected). Pressing the push-
button switch will result in the following sequence:

PR Standby
PD (Reverse Video) Operate

PR (Reverse Video) Operate

PD Standby

PR Standby
PD Standby

PR (Reverse Video) Operate

PD (Reverse Video) Operate

5 Spare Pushbutton Switch Indicator Spare software programmable pushbutton switch indicator is reserved
for the third, Lower (LWR) system, when installed.

6 Keyboard Connector The keyboard connector that allows the operator to connect a standard
keyboard with a MIL STD cable adapter to the CDU processor for ex-
tended functions.

Figure 1-23A (Sheet 2 of 5)

Change 9 1-72C
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Control Display Unit (Cont)

DT
CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

7 AFT Standby/Operate The software programmable pushbutton switch indicator used for AFT
Pushbutton/Indicator system control indicates when AFT System is in Standby/Operate Mode.
Pressing the pushbutton when in Standby switches the AFT system to
Operate Mode. Pressing the pushbutton when in Operate Mode switches
the system into Standby Mode.
The Operate state is indicated by both the PR and PD legends being high-
lighted in reverse video (i.e. Operate mode selected). Pressing the push-
button switch will result in the following sequence:

PR Standby
PD (Reverse Video) Operate

PR (Reverse Video) Operate

PD Standby

PR Standby
PD Standby

PR (Reverse Video) Operate

PD (Reverse Video) Operate

8 Hot/Cold/Fail Indicator/Override The software programmable pushbutton switch indicator used for system
Pushbutton/Indicator control and displays Hot, Cold and Fail indications all in green text.

HOT indicator comes on to indicate that a system HOT has been de-
tected. Pressing the pushbutton with the HOT indication will enable Over-
ride Mode for 60 seconds. The switch will display the count down time.
Override can be discontinued anytime by pressing the button.
COLD indicator comes on to indicate that a system COLD has been de-
tected.
FAIL indicator comes on to indicate that a system transmitter FAULT has
been detected.
This pushbutton will display any system over temperature, overheat,
TWT FAIL and cold indication. Overtemp and overheat conditions result
in the 172 system to be placed in a STBY mode. Over temperature and
overheat conditions can be overridden by depressing the pushbutton.
The pushbutton will display a 60 second countdown.

During this period, the applicable subsystem will be placed back into OP-
ERATE mode. The applicable subsystem will go through autonomous
self test for 8 seconds before actual RF transmissions will continue. The
override can be repeated every 60 seconds as required with the knowl-
edge that the identified subsystem is reporting an over temperature/over-
heat condition. Therefore, system operation may be degraded.

When a TWT FAIL indication is reported, the pushbutton will display the
failed condition. The FAIL message will continue to flash continuously.
However, by depressing the pushbutton, the FAIL message will no longer
be displayed. However, the indication will still be displayed on the situa-
tion screen.

(Continued)

Figure 1-23A (Sheet 3 of 5)

1-72D Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

Hot/Cold/Fail Indicator/Override The following legends can be displayed on this pushbutton:

Pushbutton/Indicator (Cont)
A2 HOT AFT LRU-2 High Voltage Overheat
A4 HOT AFT LRU-4 High Voltage Overheat
A A HOT AFT Antenna Subsystem Over temp
AFT Cold AFT System Cold
A PD HOT AFT PD Subsystem Over temp
A PD TWT FAIL AFT LRU-4 TWT Failure
A PR HOT AFT PR System Over temp
A PR TWT FAIL AFT LRU-2 TWT Failure
F2 HOT Forward LRU-2 High Voltage Overheat
F4 HOT Forward LRU-4 High Voltage Overheat
F12 HOT Forward LRU-12 High Voltage Overheat
F A HOT Forward Antenna Subsystem Over temp
F PD HOT Forward PD Subsystem Over temp
F PD TWT FAIL Forward LRU-4/12 TWT Failure
F PR HOT Forward PR Subsystem Over temp
F PR TWT FAIL Forward LRU-2 TWT Failure
FWD Cold Forward System Cold

9 Test Initiate Pushbutton/Indicator The pushbutton switch has three built in legends. The top half indicator
indicates operator initiated self-test (TEST in white). The bottom half-left
indicator indicates a BIT (BIT in green). The bottom half-right indicator in-
dicates a fault (FAU in yellow).

TEST (White) TEST pushbutton switch top half indicator indicates operator initiated
self-test. Pressing this button initiates BIT in the FWD and AFT systems.
During BIT the TEST light is off.
BIT (Green) Bottom half-left BIT indicator comes on to indicate that a self test in prog-
ress. The BIT segment will stay illuminated for approximately 14 sec-
onds.
FAU (Orange) Bottom half-right FAU indicator comes on to indicate when any system
fails.
10 MASTER Standby/Operate Alternate action pushbutton switch indicator selects and indicates
Pushbutton/Indicator STANDBY (STBY orange text) or OPERATE (OPER green text). Operate
applies power to select transmitters (all transmitters in Fail Safe mode).
When the pushbutton is depressed while the system is in CDU Go Mode,
only those systems assigned to operate via controls 4 and 7 will be al-
lowed to go into Operate Mode.

STBY (Orange) STBY indicates the system is in standby. STBY will come on when the first
of the FWD or AFT PR or PD subsystems times into STBY (less than 240
seconds). Status of all subsystems can be observed on the CDU display.
OPER (Green) OPER indicates the system is in operate.

Figure 1-23A (Sheet 4 of 5)

Change 9 1-72E
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Control Display Unit (Cont)

DT
CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

11 PCMCIA Interface The PCMICA Interface is a single PCMCIA drive slot. A properly config-
ured PC card will boot the processor from the drive slot (E drive). The
drive is used to load the ALQ-172 OFP/EID/ECM files and databurn pro-
gram. The drive is also used to record and playback recorded data via the
PC card. The PC card can be 40 - 200MB or greater. Only Wing EW officer
approved PCMCIA cards are authorized.

NOTE

The PCMCIA drive slot has a firm ejection spring. Care should
be taken to keep from dropping the PCMCIA card when ejecting
it from the drive slot.

12 Select Key Indicator/Switches (Text Four programmable select key indicator/switches are located below the
Green) display. Pressing the bottom bar of the respective switch frame will enable
the feature indicated in the display portion of the switch or will swap the
functions of the normal video and reverse video features. Figure 1-24D
lists and defines the possible switch text items.

13 Brightness control The rocker dimmer control varies the intensity of the LCD display. Pro-
vides baseline illumination for the LCD display. Pressing the top of the
switch increases intensity. Pressing the bottom of the switch decreases
intensity.

14 Light Sensor The light sensor automatically maintains the LCD brightness under vary-
ing lighting conditions. The initial baseline brightness is adjusted with the
brightness control (13).

Figure 1-23A (Sheet 5 of 5)

1-72F Change 9

ALQ-172 Waveguide Low Pressure Warning and
Blanking Panel
1 WAVEGUIDE LOW PRESSURE LIGHTS
2 BLANKING SWITCH
Figure 1-24
DT AN/ALQ-172 AUXILIARY PANEL
The ALQ-172 Auxiliary Control Panel (figure
1-24A) provides switches for manual powering off
either the FWD or AFT systems independently af-
ter application of system power by the CDU. The
switches are mechanical switches which function by
removing ground from the relays in the individual
system LRUs, thereby disabling the respective sys-
tem LRUs. The lights are 5 volt ac with power sup-
plied when aircraft power is applied. Brightness is
controlled by the main console panel light switch.
The lights indicate the respective switch position
regardless of the power state of the CDU.
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
If the CDU fails, the system HIGH/LOW altitude
mode defaults to HIGH. The CDU altitude override
switch allows the EW Officer to override the CDU
altitude mode default and places both FWD and
AFT systems simultaneously in the LOW altitude
mode. If OVRD LO is selected with a functioning
CDU in HIGH mode the systems will switch to low
and LOW will be displayed on the CDU in red. Set-
ting the switch back to CDU ALT will change LOW
on the CDU from red LOW to yellow HIGH and de-
fault to the CDU setting.
Change 9 1-72G
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-172 Auxiliary Panel

DT

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

1 Forward (FWD) System Power Push- The switch allows the operator to prevent initial power application to the
button/Indicator FWD system or to remove power from the FWD system. The switch is an
alternate action mechanical pushbutton.
FWD (Green) When the FWD (upper half of the switch) is lit the FWD system power ap-
plication/removal is controlled by the CDU.
FWD OFF (Yellow) When the FWD OFF (lower half of the switch) is lit, power to the FWD sys-
tem has been removed.
2 Lower (LWR) System Power Pushbut- Not functional - Switch is reserved for the third Lower (LWR) system when
ton/Indicator installed.
3 Aft (AFT) System Power Pushbutton/In- The switch allows the operator to prevent initial power application to the
dicator AFT system or to remove power from the AFT system. The switch is an
alternate action mechanical pushbutton.
AFT (Green) When the AFT (upper half of the switch) is lit the power application/remov-
al is controlled by the CDU.
AFT OFF (Yellow) When the AFT OFF (lower half of the switch) is lit, power to the AFT sys-
tem has been removed.
4 CDU Altitude Override Switch If the CDU fails the altitude mode defaults to HIGH. The switch is an alter-
nate action mechanical pushbutton which allows the operator to override
the HIGH altitude mode selection by the CDU and commands both
ALQ-172 systems to the LOW altitude mode.
CDU ALT (Green) When the upper half (CDU ALT) of the switch is lit, the CDU is controlling
the altitude mode.
OVRD LO (Yellow) When the lower half (OVRD LO) of the switch is lit, both ALQ-172 systems
are placed in the LOW mode.

Figure 1-24A

1-72H Change 9

DT CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (CDU) OPERATION
Fail Safe Mode
With the Fail Safe mode, all control/monitoring is
accomplished through a combination of indicators
and single function switches. Minimal information
is provided while each system automatically pro-
cesses the threats. The following switch/indicators
are functional in the Fail Safe mode:
• CDU POWER Switch
• CDU, FWD and AFT Go Indicator.
• TEST Switch/Indicator (TEST, BIT, FAU)
• Master OPER/STBY Switch/Indicator
The lower half of the POWER switch will light
when pressed, indicating that a ground has been
provided for both systems. The FWD and AFT go
indicators will come on as the respective subsystem
is powered. When the CDU indicator comes on, the
CDU will have exited the Fail Safe mode and will
be in the CDU GO mode. If the CDU indicator does
not come on, the CDU is in Fail Safe mode.
The Master OPER/STBY Switch/Indicator controls
the transitions from STBY (Standby) to OPER (Oper-
ate) for both systems. In the Fail Safe Mode, as soon
as one system reports Standby, the STBY legend
comes on, and that system can be placed into opera-
tion. Placing this switch into the operate mode places
all systems into operate as soon as they time out to
STBY.
CDU Go Mode
In the CDU GO mode the CDU controls both
ALQ-172 systems and display data that is arranged
on three pages; the Situation Page, Status Page
and the Detailed Status Page.
Situation Page
The Situation page contains the data necessary for
the EW Officer to make the decisions to transmit
against the various signals illuminating the air-
craft. The Situation page is shown in figure 1-24B.
Across the top of the page is an area where Naviga-
tion information from the OAS NAV bus is dis-
played when provided by OAS.
The system resource status is displayed on the up-
per right area of the screen and indicates which
File (EID) has been selected. This area indicates an
abbreviated system status, with failed LRU’s shown
as part of the corresponding system. Resource activ-
ity indicators display the portion of system re-
sources available to handle new threats. A yellow
box will appear as a channel is assigned to a signal.
For the PR subsystem only, a red box will appear if
a channel has been disabled due to a self test fault.
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
Threat data for selected threats is displayed below
the system status data. When a threat is selected
by touching the threat symbols on the screen, or
pressing the HANDOFF pushbutton, the select dia-
mond is placed around the threat and the corre-
sponding data from the system is displayed in the
Threat Data area. Threat name, symbol, frequency,
PRF, Mode of the threat, the ALQ-172 system pro-
viding the data, and the emitter Angle Of Arrival
(AOA)/clock position are displayed.
Along the bottom of the Situation page is the Activi-
ty indicator. This area displays the signals reported
by both systems in a Frequency/Amplitude display.
The remainder of the page is used to display the
threat symbols at the relative bearing as reported by
the systems, and at a relative range from the center
of the area depending on their received signal
strength. The display is a bulls eye consisting of two
concentric circles. Signals detected, but below the
Jam threshold, will be displayed red in the outer ring
of the bull’s eye. Signals are displayed based upon sig-
nal strength. Upon being received at their predeter-
mined Jam Threshold, the symbol will change to
green. Jam indicators for both systems make up the
rest of this area. The FWD PR indicator is on the
upper left of the area, the FWD PD indicator is on the
upper right of the area. At the bottom level of the bulls
eye is the AFT system indicator. Between the system
indicators is an area that is used to deconflict signal
selection when several signals are selected by the
touch screen. When several signals are under the
touch screen select box, all the symbols under the
touch screen select box are displayed in this area.
From this area a single threat can be selected by
touching the appropriate symbol.
In addition to displaying data, the CDU performs
another task, acting as the integrator of both systems.
The CDU performs the task of determining when a
signal is handed off to another system. In a typical
scenario a signal will be received first in the FWD
system, and reported to the CDU, and then received
by the AFT system as the aircraft approaches the site.
The CDU will assign the signal to only one system to
Jam, in this case the FWD system. At the appropriate
time, the CDU will hand off the signal to the AFT
system for continued jamming and prevent the FWD
system from jamming the signal.
Status Display Page
The Status Display page provides system self test and
configuration data. The Status page is shown in fig-
ure 1-24C.
Detailed Status Page
The Detailed Status Page provides detailed self-test
data for a specific system. The Detailed Status
Screen is shown in figure 1-24E. See section III.
Change 9 1-72J
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CDU Situation Display

DT

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

1 OAS Navigation Data
The top of the CDU screen displays the aircraft navigation data. The data
is obtained from the OAS MIL-STD-1553A Controls and Displays B and
D buses from the Navigation and Weapon Delivery Avionics Control Unit.
The data is received at a rate of approximately 16 times per second and
updated on the CDU at the CDU refresh rate of approximately 5 times per
second. The following data is displayed as follows:

HDG Magnetic heading in degrees

AGL/MSL OAS altitude in feet. The default altitude displayed is MSL altitude. When
below 5000 feet with a valid radar altimeter AGL altitude is displayed.
KTAS True airspeed in knots
Latitude Latitude in degrees, minutes, seconds
Longitude Longitude in degrees, minutes, seconds

Figure 1-24B (Sheet 1 of 4)

1-72K Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

2 System Status Displays the status of the 172 systems as reported.

File Indicates which database file is selected by the operator (File 1 or File 2).
HIGH/LOW Indicates whether the 172 systems are in HIGH mode or LOW mode. If
there is a detected difference between the mode selected by the operator
and the mode reported by the 172 systems, the mode of the 172 systems
will be displayed in red. This discrepancy can occur if the AUXILIARY
PANEL CDU Altitude Override switch is set to OVRD LO with HIGH se-
lected on the CDU.
FWD Indicates the status of the FWD 172 system. If no self test failures de-
tected, FWD will appear in green. If self test failures detected or commu-
nications not established, FWD will appear in red. Any failed LRUs de-
tected and reported during self test will display their LRU number i.e., 1,
2, 4,10, 7, 8R, 8L, 9, 12.
For a hard failure the LRU number is displayed in red; For a soft failure
the LRU number will appear in yellow; and for a software configuration
fault the LRU number will appear in orange.
The channel initialization status bar segments will appear in green if there
are no signals being tracked. The segments will appear in yellow indicat-
ing the number of channels that are actively tracking signals in the PR
subsystem and PD subsystem.
For the PR subsystem only, a red box will appear if a channel has been
disabled due to a self test fault detect.
(Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for additional information)
AFT Indicates the status of the AFT 172 system. All other information dis-
played, except for LRU-12, is the same description as the FWD system.
Time of day is displayed in hours/minutes/ seconds in green at the bottom
of the system status field. Time of day can be set manually or is automati-
cally obtained from the OAS NAV data bus.
REC The letters REC in red indicate that record mode is in progress.
PLY The letters PLY in green indicate that playback mode is in progress.
3 Threat Information This field displays the particular emitter information that is pertinent to a
selected threat symbol enclosed in the HANDOFF diamond. If the HAND-
OFF function is selected or the touch screen function is used to select a
threat, a diamond will appear around the threat symbol. When this occurs,
the selected emitter’s parameters will be displayed in the field. The pa-
rameters include:

Threat Name Threat name as defined in data base and symbol table by the mission pro-
grammer. It is referenced by the T Type.
Symbol Based upon the CDU symbol set. Some emitter types will also have attrib-
ute symbols along with the emitter symbol as follows:
Missile Activity/Alert (circle)
Missile Guidance (circle)
Missile Launch (flashing circle)
Acquisition (square). Symbols and attributes are referenced by T Type.
FREQ Is a display of the emitter frequency.
(Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for additional information)
(Continued)

Figure 1-24B (Sheet 2 of 4)

Change 9 1-72L
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CDU Situation Display (Cont)

DT
CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

PRF Is a display of emitter PRF. PRF also displays CW or NO TRK.

(Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for additional information)
MODE Is the scan type of the emitter.
(Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for additional information)
SYSTEM Is a display of which system is handling and is processing the signal i.e.
FWD or AFT.
AOA Is a display of the actual angle of arrival of the emitter signal in both de-
grees azimuth and clock position from the nose of the aircraft (0 degrees
and 12 o’clock) as reported by the antenna subsystem.
4 Frequency Spectrum Displays the frequency of all signals detected by the 172 systems and dis-
played on the CDU. The color i.e. red, green or yellow corresponds to the
color of the symbol as displayed in the azimuth circle. Symbol that has
the diamond select will be displayed under the corresponding frequency.

The height of the frequency spectral line is proportional to the reported

amplitude. The frequency spectrum displays frequencies from A-2 (left
most edge) to C+4 (right most edge). Each tick on the display line repre-
sents 1 GHz increments. (Refer to T.O.1B-52H-1-13-1 for additional infor-
mation)
5 Handoff When pressed, the diamond symbol rotates through threats displayed on
the CDU. When FWD pressed and quickly released, causes diamond to
move to the first signal in the track file. When pressed again the diamond
will move to the next signal in the track file. When REV pressed and quick-
ly released, causes the diamond to move to the next higher signal in the
track file.

6 AFT Subsystem Status Under each subsystem legends i.e. PR (lower left corner) or PD (lower
right corner) will indicate the system mode as follows:

Blank Subsystem has not yet timed in, after power up system should time in
within 240 seconds.
STBY (Yellow) Subsystem transmitters have timed in.
OPER (Green) Subsystem transmitters have been placed into operate mode.
JAM (Green) Subsystem transmitters are actively jamming one or more emitters.
HOT (Red) An overtemp or overheat condition has been detected in the AFT subsys-
tem. This condition can be overridden for 60 seconds by pressing the
OVRD button.
FAIL (Red) An overcurrent condition has been detected in the subsystem transmitter.
When the FAIL indication appears all RF transmissions for that subsys-
tem will be terminated.
7 Azimuth Circle (Threat Display) Provides angle of arrival information for threats sensed by EW sensors.
Top of display is current aircraft heading. Threat symbology is similar to
that used in standard radar warning receiver systems.
Threats being detected with valid DF are presented in the RED.
Threats being jammed with valid DF are presented in the GREEN.
Threats being detected or jammed without valid DF are presented in
YELLOW.

(Continued)

Figure 1-24B (Sheet 3 of 4)

1-72M Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

Threat symbols are displayed at the relative bearing as reported by the

ALQ-172 systems and at a relative range from the center or the area de-
pending on their received signal strength. The display is a bulls eye con-
sisting of two concentric circles. Signals detected, but below jam thresh-
old, will be displayed in red in the outer ring of the bulls eye. As the signal
strength increases, the symbol will be positioned closer to the inner ring.
When the signal is above jam threshold and actively being jammed, the
symbol color will change to green. If the signal initially does not have a
valid DF report, the symbol will appear in yellow regardless of whether or
not it is being jammed. Signals with invalid DF reports will appear along
the 225° (AFT) or 315° (FWD) azimuth at a relative range based on signal
strength. It will change to the appropriate red or green upon receipt of a
valid DF report from the ALQ-172 systems.
This condition can occur during periods where the signal is above 172
system receiver threshold but not yet above antenna subsystem receiver
threshold or during the signal acquisition interval where the 172 trackers
have not yet established signal tracking gates required by the antenna
system.
A yellow symbol can be displayed at any beam position not just default
if invalid DF report is processed after receipt of a valid DF report. In this
case the symbol will be placed at the last known valid DF position with its
color changing from red or green to yellow until another valid DF report
is received in which case its color will switch back to red or green as ap-
propriate.
Signals detected by the forward system are displayed in the upper he-
misphere. Signals detected by the AFT system are displayed in the lower
hemisphere. The threat symbols that are displayed correspond to the
symbols selected by the mission programmer and correspond to the
threat data programmed into the ALQ-172 mission data file.

8 FWD Subsystem Status Under each subsystem legends i.e. PR (upper left corner) or PD (upper
will indicate the system mode as follows:

Blank Subsystem has not yet timed in, after power up system should time in
within 240 seconds.
STBY (Yellow) Subsystem transmitters have timed in.
OPER (Green) Subsystem transmitters have been placed into operate mode.
JAM (Green) Subsystem transmitters are actively jamming one or more emitters.
HOT (Red) An overtemp or overheat condition has been detected in the FWD sub-
system. This condition can be overridden for 60 seconds by pressing the
OVRD button.
FAIL (Red) An overcurrent condition has been detected in the subsystem transmitter.
When the FAIL indication appears all RF transmissions for that subsys-
tem will be terminated.
9 Special Technique When ALQ-172 is countering a threat requiring use of the special tech-
nique, an indication of this jamming appears in this area. (Refer to
T.O.1B-52H-1-13-1 for additional information)

Figure 1-24B (Sheet 4 of 4)

Change 9 1-72N
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CDU Status Display

DT

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

1 Self Test Status Displays the self test status of each LRU within the ALQ-172 shipset. The
following color convention is utilized:
Green LRU passed and good.
Yellow LRU soft failure detected. At least half the number of channels are still op-
erational.
Red LRU hard failure detected. Subsystem or system associated with LRU or
LRUs is inoperative.
Orange LRU-1 and 10 only. Configuration error detected. OFP, EID or ECM files
do not match correctly. Reported checksum or version number is not cor-
rect. May be a data load problem or hardware problem.
2 System Configuration This area will display the version number of the CDU software resident
in the CDU along with the release date. It will also display the version
number and release date of the HI and LO symbol table files. Also dis-
played by system will be the PR & PD EID version numbers as well as the
overall LRU-1 and LRU-10 software configuration (CFG) number. The
operator should verify that the proper CDU and system software has
been reported prior to performing any further operations with the
ALQ-172 system.
3 1553 Communications If 1553 communication has not been established the words 1553 DIS-
CONNECTED will appear in this area in the color red. The words SELF
TEST IN PROGRESS will appear in the color yellow during system self
test.

Figure 1-24C

1-72P Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CDU Select Key Matrix

DT

Figure 1-24D (Sheet 1 of 4)

Change 9 1-72Q
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
CDU Select Key Matrix (Cont)
DT
PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON STATE DESCRIPTIONS
KEY LEGEND FUNCTION
AFT Selects/deselects the AFT system.
AFT Selecting this button allows the op-
ANALYZE erator to view an analyze screen
for the AFT 172 System which pro-
vides more detailed information on
the fault description. SRU/LRU
and probability factor (weighing).
AFT Displays any errors detected in the
ERRORS AFT System.
AFT Displays the results of the AFT ID
ID request.
AFT Selecting this button allows the op-
STATUS erator to view the detailed self test
results for the AFT 172 system as
reported on the 1553 bus.
AFT Displays the results of the AFT ID
SYSTEM request by major function and any
error blocks that were detected.
BRIGHT Selecting this button will increase
the light intensity of the program-
mable pushbutton switches. Each
selection will result in a further in-
crease in light intensity.
CANCEL Selecting this button returns the
operator to the Situation Display
Screen.
OR
Selecting this button returns the
Operator to the CDUBURN
Screen. - As applicable
CHANGE Selects which field to be altered.
FIELD Default is hours.
Six fields can be altered as follows:
Hours Minutes Seconds (24 Hour
Clock)
Month Day Year
Repeated pushing the button will
allow the operator to select the
next field.
CLOSE Allows the operator to stop the Play
FILE Back function and return to the Sit-
uation Display Screen.
DATA Selects a sub-menu to alter the de-
FUNCTION fault setting for which data function
to be executed.
Figure 1-24D (Sheet 2 of 4)
1-72R Change 9
KEY LEGEND FUNCTION
DATA Selecting this button allows the op-
LOAD erator to select a sub-menu for per-
forming data loading via the CDU
and 1553 data bus.
DETAIL Selects a sub-menu.
DETAILS Selecting this button allows the op-
erator to branch to a substate to se-
lect which system detailed self test
status results to be viewed.
DIM Selecting this button will decrease
the light intensity of the program-
mable push button switches. Each
selection will result in a further de-
crease light intensity.
ECM Allows the operator to select/dese-
lect the ECM file for loading or veri-
fying.
ESCAPE Selecting this button brings the op-
erator to the next highest submenu
level.
ERROR Selects a sub-menu to display ei-
DETAIL ther the FWD or AFT errors de-
tected.
FILE SELECT Selecting this button allows the op-
erator to branch to a substate to se-
lect which database file and high/
low state to command the 172
hardware and software.
FILE Selects a sub-menu to alter the de-
TYPES fault settings.
FILE 1 Selecting this button selects the
FILE 2 database file setting that will be
recognized by 172 System.
FWD Selects/deselects the FWD sys-
tem
FWD Selecting this button allows the op-
ANALYZE erator to view an analyze screen
for the FWD 172 System which
provides more detailed information
on the fault description. SRU/LRU
and probability factor (weighing).
FWD Displays any errors detected in the
ERRORS FWD System.

KEY LEGEND FUNCTION
FWD Displays the results of the FWD ID
ID request.
FWD Selecting this button allows the op-
STATUS erator to view the detailed self–test
results for the FWD 172 system as
reported on the 1553 bus.
FWD Displays the results of the FWD ID
SYSTEM request by major function and any
error blocks that were detected.
HANDOFF Selecting this button allows the op-
erator to return to the Handoff
menu.
HANDOFF Selecting this button places the
FWD diamond symbol around the sym-
bol of the first threat in the track file.
Repetitively selecting this button
will place the diamond symbol
around the next threat symbol
entry in the track file.
HANDOFF Selecting this button reverses the
REV diamond symbol selection pro-
cess.
HIGH Selecting this button sets the 172
LOW system into the proper altitude set-
ting which will determine the prop-
er threat jam and lethal thresholds
as well as priorities.
ID Provides a summary of the ID re-
SUMMARY quest status reporting PR Configu-
ration # and Pass/Fail. Any failed
items will appear in Red.
ID Selects a sub-menu to display ei-
DETAIL ther the FWD ID or AFT ID.
ID Selects the ID Request function.
REQUEST
LAMP Selecting this button causes all pro-
TEST grammable pushbutton switches to
illuminate with a test pattern that
lights all pixels along with the fail
safe button lamps. Depressing any
programmable pushbutton returns
the operator to the original menu
state.
LOAD Selects the Load function.
MIS # Decrements the mission number
–1 each time by 1.
MIS # Increments the mission number
+1 each time by 1.
MISSION Allows the operator to select/dese-
DATA lect Mission Data File for loading or
verifying.
MISSION Selects a sub-menu to select the
RUN mission or run number.
Figure 1-24D (Sheet 3 of 4)
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
KEY LEGEND FUNCTION
MORE Selecting this button at any place in
the menu will bring the operator
into the next sub-menu or sub-
state.
NEW Selecting this button allows the op-
RUN erator to branch to a sub-menu to
select Run numbers and mission
numbers for the Record file.
NUMBER Selecting this button allows the op-
X erator to have a numeric code by
displayed for each fault reported.
Selecting this button again results
in the report reverting back to an X
for each fault reported.
OK Selecting this button allows the op-
erator to start the Situation Display
Program.
The PCMCIA card must be re-
moved in order for the CDU to boot
off of internal memory and load the
Situation Display Program. It takes
approximately 80 seconds to re-
load the program.
OFP Allows the operator to select/dese-
lect the OFP file for loading or veri-
fying.
OK Selecting this button allows the op-
erator to start the Data Load Pro-
gram.
The PCMCIA card must be
installed into the CDU PC drive in
order for the Data Load Program to
be loaded into the CDU.
PAGE DOWN Selecting this button allows the op-
erator to page down through the
text. This button will bring the oper-
ator to the bottom of the page.
PAGE Scrolls down the ID Details screen
DOWN to the bottom of the text file.
PAGE UP Selecting this button allows the op-
erator to page thru the text. This
button will bring the operator to the
top of the page.
PAGE Scrolls up the ID Details screen to
UP the top of the text file.
PLAY BACK Selecting this button allows the op-
FUNCTIONS erator to select the Play Back sub-
menu.
PLAY BACK Selecting this button allows the op-
START erator to start the Play Back of pre-
viously recorded data. The PC
card with the recorded data must
be installed in the PC drive for
proper operation.
Change 9 1-72S
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CDU Select Key Matrix (Cont)

DT
KEY LEGEND FUNCTION KEY LEGEND FUNCTION
RECORD Selecting this button will allow the START Selecting this button will result in
FUNCTIONS operator to branch to a sub-menu the OFP/EID/ECM files to be
to enable the record of the 1553 loaded, verified or identified into
messages. the FWD and AFT ALQ-172 Sys-
tems via the CDU 1553 interface.
RECORD Selecting this button stops record-
A typical data load will be com-
OFF ing
pleted in less than 8 minutes. The
RECORD Selecting this button starts record- default options are as follows:
ON ing. File Type: Mission Data
OPEN Returns the operator to the pre- OFP Files
FILE vious sub-menu. ECM Files
System #: FWD System
RETURN Allows the operator to Return to the
AFT System
previous sub-menu.
1553 Functions: Load
RUN Allows the operator to Run the data
in real time. Premature termination of data
OR loading will result in an inoperative
Allows the operator to Run the data software load in the ALQ-172 sys-
load program by selecting a sub- tem.
menu. - As applicable STATUS Selecting this button selects the
RUN Selects a submenu to select the PAGE Self Test Status Page.
MISSION mission number or run number. STEP Allows the operator to Step
RUN Selecting this button allows the op- FORWARD through the data with time incre-
OPTION erator to select a submenu to menting.
change the default options. STEP Allows the operator to Step
RUN # Decrements the run number each REVERSE through the data with time decre-
–1 time by 1. menting.

RUN # Increments the run number each STOP Selecting this button results in the
+1 time by 1. CDUBURN stopping during the
data load operation. Hitting this
SYSTEM Selecting this button provides a top button during loading will result in
SUMMARY level summary of the data being an invalid OFP/EID/ECM load into
loaded or verified into the 172 sys- the 172 systems.
tem
Information presented includes ID SYSTEM Selects a sub-menu to display ei-
code, function, % complete, # er- DETAIL ther the FWD or AFT system de-
rors and status. tails.
VERIFY Selects the verify function.
TIME Selects a sub-menu to set the time
SET and date. VIEW Selects a sub-menu for obtaining
more detailed information con-
SELECT Selects a sub-menu to alter the de-
cerning the data loaded into the
SYSTEM fault settings for which system to
172 System.
be loaded or verified.
–1 Decrements the number by 1.
SITUATION Selecting this button will result in
PAGE the sub-menu for exiting of the +1 Increment the number by 1.
CDUBURN Program and will re-
turn the operator to the Situation
Display Program and situation Dis-
play Screen.
OR
Selecting this button returns the
operator to the situation screen.

Figure 1-24D (Sheet 4 of 4)

1-72T Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CDU Detailed Status Screen

DT

Figure 1-24E

Change 9 1-72U
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

DT CDU SYMBOL SET
The symbol set used for this configuration is repre-
sented in figure 1-24F. This is the CDU version of
the Sensor Integration symbol set.
To verify all the symbols in the CDU, the hook up of
an external keyboard to the J6 connector is re-
quired. Select the menu item Q and observe the
symbol set displayed on the CDU.

CDU Symbol Set

DT

Figure 1-24F

1-72V Change 9

Less DT NORMAL OPERATION (ALQ-172)
Turn-On Procedures
Turn-on of the ALQ-172 will be accomplished in
accordance with the section II procedures.
ALQ-172 System Tests
OPERATOR INITIATED SELF-TEST
The operator initiated self-test provides an end-to-
end checkout of all ALQ-172 system components. It
is conducted during the EW Officer’s Calibration
and Interference check and anytime the EW Officer
questions system performance. Both forward and
aft systems are calibrated and tested during the
self-test. The self-test is initiated by pressing the
TEST button on the ALQ-172 control indicator (9
figure 1-22). The ON light in the power switch (6
figure 1-22), and the FWD and AFT test status in-
dicators (16 and 15, figure 1-22) should illuminate
for the duration of the self-test. The wedges on the
ALQ-172 control monitor (figure 1-23) are num-
bered and some will illuminate in the forward and
aft sectors during the test, indicating the mission
data software version number. The operator initi-
ated self-test takes approximately 10 seconds, dur-
ing which RF energy is transmitted for approxi-
mately 1.5 seconds.
AUTONOMOUS SELF-TEST
An autonomous self-test is automatically initiated
every 10 minutes by the ALQ-172 for the respective
system provided that no RF activity has been re-
ceived during that time. Additionally, the EW Offi-
cer can force the ALQ-172 to initiate an autono-
mous self-test by momentarily placing either FWD
and/or AFT subset from STBY to OPER and back to
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
STBY in rapid succession (1-2 seconds). During the
autonomous self-test, the applicable FWD and/or
AFT test status indicators will light for the test. All
systems components are checked except for the
high voltage power supply (HVPS) and the high lev-
el traveling wave tube amplifiers (HLTWTA), there-
fore, no RF energy is transmitted during this test.
The autonomous self-test takes approximately 10
seconds. If malfunctions are detected during the
test, applicable ALQ-172 control indicator fault sta-
tus lights will illuminate along with control monitor
wedges. To display FWD and/or AFT fault codes on
the control monitor the WAR/TRAIN switch must
be in TRAIN. To display FWD and/or AFT PR sub-
system faults on the control monitor, the HIGH/
LOW MODE switch (1, figure 1-22) must be in
HIGH. To display FWD and/or AFT PD subsystem
faults on the control monitor, the HIGH/LOW
MODE switch (1, figure 1-22) must be in LOW. The
numbers on the lighted wedges indicate specific
malfunctioning LRUs. See Section III for wedge
value indications.
TEST STATUS INDICATORS
If a failure is detected during either the operator
initiated self-test or the autonomous self-test, the
TEST STATUS indicators PR (RX and TX), PD/CW
(RX and TX), or ANT (EU, R, L, SW) (7 and 10, fig-
ure 1-22) will illuminate. If a failure is catastrophic
(hard), the appropriate LRU fail indicator light will
come on and remain on until power is removed or
another self-test cycle is initiated. In the case of a
hard failure, the associated subsystem is inopera-
tive. If a non catastrophic (soft) failure is detected,
the appropriate fail indicator light will come on, re-
main on for 5-10 minutes and then go off. A soft
failure indicates that the associated system may be
degraded.
Change 9 1-73
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
DT CDU NORMAL OPERATION (ALQ-172)
The CDU Program is a control program for the AN/
ALQ-172 Countermeasures Set. This program is de-
signed to communicate with the ALQ-172 system
over the 1553B Local Bus that connects the CDU
hardware to the systems (figure 1-20A). The CDU
Hardware is connected to the FWD and AFT
ALQ-172 Systems and the CDU Program can dis-
play the information from these systems and con-
trol their reaction to threats in the environment.
NOTE
If the ALQ-172 CDU fails both, FWD and
AFT systems default to the HIGH altitude
mode. LOW altitude mode can be selected
for both systems by selecting OVRD LO on
the ALQ-172 Auxiliary Panel CDU Altitude
Override Switch.
Starting The CDU Program
The CDU Program is designed to startup automati-
cally from powering on the CDU hardware or upon
exiting from the CDUBURN Program as long as
there is no PCMCIA card inserted into the PCMCIA
slot at the front of the CDU hardware.
Running The CDU Program
Once the CDU Program starts there will be a slight
delay as the firmware is loaded onto the 1553 card,
during this time the screen will display the mes-
sage CDU PROGRAM LOADING. This is normal
and may take as long as 1 minute. The screen will
then come up with the Situation Page Screen dis-
played and the programmable pushbuttons will be
illuminated.
The rest of this section deals with the different op-
tions available to the EW Officer.
The CDU Display has some fundamental concepts
that need to be understood in order to gain full use
of the system. These are for general use throughout
the display and can be used during all the functions
of the CDU. There may be some additional features
that are dependent upon specific areas of the CDU
Display and these will be handled separately.
1-74 Change 9
COLORS
The most important item concerning the display
test colors is green means no problem exists and
red means there may be a problem. All failures are
shown in red, normal conditional are shown in
green. Yellow is also used throughout the program,
sometimes it is used just to increase the readability
of the display and other times as a warning. On the
Situation Page screen, threats that are red are not
being jammed, threats that are green are being
jammed. Threats displayed in yellow do not have
valid DF. On the Status Page screen LRUs that are
red have a hard failure, LRUs that are yellow have
a soft failure, LRUs that are orange have a configu-
ration failure and LRUs that are green have no fail-
ures.
SCREEN SWITCHING
Switching screens can be accomplished by using ei-
ther the pushbuttons or the touch screen. From the
Situation screen, the EW Officer can switch to the
Status screen, by pressing the STATUS PAGE but-
ton or by touching the screen in the SYSTEM STA-
TUS box. In order to zoom in on a threat or a region
of the screen the EW Officer can touch the
THREAT DATA box on the screen. Touching this re-
gion of the screen again will cause the CDU display
to return to normal zoom. From any screen other
then the Situation screen the EW Officer can re-
turn to the situation screen by touching the bottom
right button marked SITUATION PAGE. In order
to return to the Situation screen from the Status
screen the EW Officer can just touch the screen.
The remainder of the screens are only available by
using the pushbuttons.
LAMP TEST
A lamp test feature in the CDU program allows the
EW Officer to test the pixels on a programmable
pushbutton. Pressing the LAMP TEST program-
mable pushbutton on the Status Page lights all of
the pixels on the pushbuttons. There is also a lamp
test for just the non programmable pushbuttons as
part of the CDU hardware. These pushbuttons are
tested by pressing the CDU Go indicator button.
When this button is pressed, all of the bulbs inside
the fixed switches should light.

HIGH LOW ALTITUDE MODE
The CDU Program is design to control multiple AN/
ALQ-172 systems. These systems are designed to be
operated in either high or low altitude modes. Since
the threat priorities and lethality are altitude de-
pendent, the CDU comes with an option for chang-
ing the altitude indication to the 172 system. In or-
der to change the altitude setting the EW Officer
must press the FILE SELECT button from the Sit-
uation screen. This button will bring up a new set
of buttons, including one that has a HIGH LOW
displayed on it. Pressing this button will change the
altitude setting for the AN/ALQ-172 systems. The
Situation screen displays the altitude in the top of
the SYSTEM STATUS box. The altitude is shown in
yellow if the altitude that the CDU Program is
sending agrees with the altitude that the system is
reporting, and red if they disagree. It is normal for
the color to change to red and then back to yellow
as the system processes the pressing of the HIGH
LOW button. It will also transition during 172 sys-
tem selftest. The CDU will always report the actual
ALQ-172 altitude mode. If the ALQ-172 Auxiliary
Panel CDU Altitude Override switch is set to
OVRD LO with the CDU set to HIGH, the CDU will
display LOW in red to indicate the systems are in
LOW and that a discrepancy between the CDU
commanded mode and the 172 system operational
mode has been detected.
EID FILES
The ALQ-172 system is loaded with two database
files when the software is loaded. These settings al-
low the operator to change the parameters in which
threats are characterized. In order to change the
database setting the EW Officer must press the
FILE SELECT button from the Situation screen.
This button will bring up a new set of buttons, in-
cluding one that has a FILE 1 FILE 2 displayed on
it. Pressing this button will change the database
file for the AN/ALQ-172 systems. The Situation
screen displays the file in the top of the SYSTEM
STATUS box. The file number is shown in yellow.
CDU TIME
The CDU Hardware has no internal battery and
can not keep time when the power is shut off on the
unit. Upon initial power-up, time will read
00:00:00. In order to still be able to have the correct
time for recording purposes the EW Officer can set
the time using the programmable pushbuttons. In
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
order to access the time setting feature of the CDU
Program the EW Officer must switch to the Status
screen and then press the MORE button repeatedly
until they see the TIME SET button. Pressing this
button will then get the EW Officer to the Time and
Date screen. The Time and Date may be set to some
very odd values or to the correct time depending on
the CPU BIOS. By using the CHANGE FIELD but-
ton along with the -1 and +1 buttons the EW Offi-
cer can set the time and date. When the time and
date are set properly, the EW Officer can press the
SITUATION PAGE button to return to normal op-
erations. Any power interruption will cause the
CDU Hardware to lose track of the time and there-
fore the time must be reset after any power inter-
ruption. The CDU will also obtain time from the
OAS NAV bus. If time is available on the NAV bus,
the CDU will display this time. The CDU will check
for time from the OAS bus every 10 minutes and
will re-synchronize if required. However, once time
is set, either from operator setting or automatically
via OAS bus, the CDU will continue to increment
time as long as power is applied. The date must al-
ways be entered manually.
Threats
The purpose of the CDU Display is to provide the
EW Officer with situation awareness about the
threats in the environment, threat parameters as
well as status of the ALQ-172 systems.
SELECTING THREATS AND THREAT HANDOFF
There are two ways to select a threat, the easiest
and most direct method involves touching the sym-
bol on the screen of the threat you want to identify.
When a threat is selected it will be surrounded by a
purple diamond. The selected threat symbol is dis-
played under the corresponding frequency in the
frequency display field. The threats can also be se-
lected using the handoff commands. The handoff
commands go through the list of active threats and
selects the next or last selected threat until the end
of the list is reached at which point it wraps
around. The HANDOFF FWD and the HANDOFF
REV buttons allow the EW Officer to go through
the list in forward or reverse order. The threat in-
formation for the selected threat is displayed in the
box on the lower right side of the Situation screen.
If only one symbol is present on the display, the
symbol will automatically be selected and its corre-
sponding data displayed in the threat data field.
Change 9 1-74A
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
SYSTEM STATUS BOX
In order to determine the number of threats in the
environment and whether they are PR or PD
threats the EW Officer can look at the SYSTEM
STATUS box (2, figure 1-24B) on the upper right
corner of the Situation screen. This box shows the
forward and aft system followed by a green bar sep-
arated for PR and PD threats. For each threat that
is being tracked by the system a yellow box is
placed in the green bar under the appropriate
threat type. The number of yellow boxes in the
green bar indicates the number of tracked threats.
For the PR subsystem only, a red box will appear if
a channel has been disabled due to a self test fault
detect.
THREAT INFORMATION BOX
The CDU Display is designed to give much more de-
tailed information about the threat environment
than the Indicator Monitor. This information is ob-
tained by selecting a threat as described above. The
threat that is selected will then have detailed infor-
mation appear about it in the threat data field on
the lower right corner of the Situation screen (3,
figure 1-24B). Along with the threat data, informa-
tion can be obtained about a threats frequency, its
relative amplitude and the system frequency limits.
This information is displayed along the bottom edge
of the screen. All of the threats are displayed along
this bar graph of frequency with the height of the
lines referring to their signal strength. The selected
threat will always have its symbol displayed below
its frequency bar.
Record and Playback
The CDU Display is designed with record and play-
back features to allow the EW Officer to record data
from a flight and then later play back the data that
was recorded. The CDU can also play files that
were recorded using the 50 series of the existing PC
based Forcing Function/Status Display/Enhanced
Diagnostics (FF/SD/ED) program and the FF/SD/
ED program can playback files that were recorded
with the CDU Program. The CDU Program records
information onto a PCMCIA card that must be in-
serted into the PCMCIA slot on the front of the
CDU hardware. In order to maintain the compati-
bility with the FF/SD/ED program the CDU does
not record any information from the OAS 1553A
Bus.
1-74B Change 9
In order to access the record feature of the CDU
Program the EW Officer must switch to the Status
screen and then press the MORE button repeatedly
until they see the RECORD FUNCTIONS button.
Pressing this button will allow the EW Officer to
access the recording options. The EW Officer should
then press the NEW RUN button which will allow
the EW Officer to select a file name that is not be-
ing used. This is done by pressing the RUN # +1,
RUN # -1, MIS # +1, and MIS # -1 buttons. Press-
ing the MISSION RUN button will allow the EW
Officer to switch between changing the mission
number and the run number. The file name, e.g.,
RUN01M02.DAT, where 01 is the run number and
02 is the mission number, will be displayed in the
File status box on the lower right corner of the Situ-
ation screen. Below the file name will either be the
recording time left on the drive, a warning that the
file name already exists, or a warning that there is
not enough room available on the drive to record. If
the file name exists the operator must change the
name of the file, or else the recording will not be
started. Once the file name has been chosen, the
EW Officer should press the OPEN FILE button
which will bring the EW Officer back to the pre-
vious button state. The CDU Program will not be-
gin recording until after the RECORD ON button
has been pressed. After the recording has started,
the bottom line of the System Status box on the Sit-
uation page will show the current PC time in green
followed by the letters REC in red to show that the
system is recording.
In order to access the playback feature of the CDU
Program the EW Officer must switch to the Status
screen and then press the MORE button repeatedly
until they see the PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS but-
ton. Pressing this button will allow the EW Officer
to access the playback options. The EW Officer
must select a file name that exists in order to use
the playback feature. This is done by pressing the
RUN # +1, RUN # -1, MIS # +1, and MIS # -1 but-
tons. Pressing the MISSION RUN button will allow
the EW Officer to switch between changing the mis-
sion number and the run number. The file name,
e.g., RUN01M02.DAT, where 01 is the run number
and 02 is the mission number, will be displayed in
the File status box on the lower right corner of the
Situation screen. Below the file name will be a
warning that the file name does not exist if the file
is not found.

After selecting a valid file name, the EW Officer
should press the PLAYBACK START button which
will allow the EW Officer to playback the file. The
time that the file was started followed by the letters
PLY will appear in green on the bottom line of the
System Status box on the Situation page. The file is
currently paused, in order to start the file playing
the EW Officer should first select the direction by
pressing either the STEP FWD or STEP REV but-
ton. The EW Officer can then continue to step
through the file or press the RUN button to allow
the file to run automatically. Upon reaching the end
of the file, the file will wrap around to the begin-
ning. In order to stop playback the EW Officer
should press the CLOSE FILE button. This will
close the playback file and return the CDU Pro-
gram to normal operation.
NOTE
During playback there is no 1553 bus com-
munication. The current signal environ-
ment, ALQ-172 system status and NAV
data will not be displayed. All non-program-
mable switches are operational.
Entering Data Load Function
In order to exit the CDU Program the EW Officer
must switch to the Status screen and then press the
MORE button repeatedly until they see the DATA
LOAD button. The DATA LOAD button will then
move, and needs to be pressed again. This is to en-
sure that the button was not accidentally pressed.
If the DATA LOAD button is pressed again dialog
box will appear on the screen prompting the EW
Officer to insert the PCMCIA card containing the
CDUBURN program into the PCMCIA slot. Once
this is done, the EW Officer should press the OK
button or touch OK on the screen. Pressing this
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
button will allow the EW Officer to exit the pro-
gram and start the CDUBURN Program for loading
the ALQ-172 systems.
NOTE
Insert the PCMCIA card part number side
up into the slot before reboot begins. This
allows the CDU hardware to reboot to the
CDUBURN program. If the PCMCIA card
containing the CDUBURN program is not
inserted at this time the CDU hardware
will reboot to the CDU Display.
Fail Safe Mode
If the CDU processor fails for any reason, the CDU
Hardware will default to a fail safe mode with only
the four fail safe switches available. The default
states will be:
Altitude = HIGH
Database File = FILE #1
STBY/OPER = OPERATE (The Master STBY/
OPER switch can override this default to STBY)
NOTE
The Master STBY/OPER switch must re-
main in STBY until all systems time in to
STBY mode as displayed on the CDU
screen. Placing a subsystem into OPER be-
fore the STBY time in occurs can result in
transmitter self test errors.
Change 9 1-74C
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Keyboard Commands And Screens 9 Open Playback File

There are also keyboard commands that can be Ctrl-o Open File Dialog Box for selecting a
used on the CDU program when an external key- playback file
board is attached to the CDU. The keys are ex- Ctrl-f Show Status Dialog Box
plained in the appendix.
Ctrl-c Close file
KEYBOARD COMMANDS Ctrl-r Run

Short-cut keys when CDU is being used with a key- Alt-4 1/4 Speed
board Alt-2 1/2 Speed

SCREENS: Alt-1 Normal Speed

Alt-D 2 * Speed
s Status Screen
Alt-Q 4 * Speed
f Fwd System Details Screen
a Aft System Details Screen RECORD and PLAYBACK:

d Display Situation Screen 5 Run Number + 1

h Help Screen - Show keyboard commands 6 Run Number - 1
c CDU Fault Matrix 7 Mission Number + 1
u Show Fault Analysis screen 8 Mission Number - 1
p Alignment Procedures OTHER:
q Show Symbol Table
Alt-Z Zoom
ESC Display Situation Screen
Alt-B Select Back
RECORDING: Alt-G Get Data From System
0 Choose Recording File Name Alt-A Dump ATF
Alt-R Record Start Alt-S Select Next
1 New Run Alt-x Exit

PLAYBACK: PGUP Page up for fault analysis screen

PGDN Page down for fault analysis screen
2 Forward Step
3 Reverse Step
4 Run
– Choose Playback File Name

1-74D Change 9

AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A
COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEM
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The AN/ALQ-122 countermeasures set is an air-
borne receiver-processor system that is integrated
with two AN/ALT-16A transmitter sets to make up
the AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A countermeasures
system. The system includes one R-1787/ALQ-122
receiver, one MX-9187/ ALQ-122 processor, one
C-9040/ALQ-122 control-monitor, two CU-2030/
ALQ-122 duplexers (aft and forward), one CU-
2137A/ALQ-122 directional coupler, two T-787A/
ALT-16A radio transmitters (systems 9 and 21), two
AM-2714A/ALT-16A RF amplifiers, two C-3358/
ALT-16 control-indicators, one attenuator, one
bandpass filter, two composite filters, one AS-3087A
antenna located in the nose radome, and two
AT-1102/A antennas, one located at station 1342 top
centerline and one at station 1374 bottom
centerline of the section 47 fuselage.
The AN/ALQ-122 set is used with two slightly mod-
ified AN/ALT-16 transmitter sets which are desig-
nated AN/ALT-16A. The AN/ALT-16A retains all
the capabilities of the AN/ALT-16, such as the 10
channel selection in the barrage (backup) mode.
However, the AN/ALT-16A has been modified to
accept selected drive signals from the AN/ALQ-122
in the AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A normal mode. In
the normal mode, the AN/ALT-16A transmitters lin-
early amplify the low level signals from the receiver
to the desired transmit power level. To utilize com-
plete normal mode system operation, the AN/
ALQ-122 control-monitor MODE switch must be
switched to XMIT position, and the two AN/ALT-16
control-indicator function switches must be placed
in TRANSMIT. The AN/ALT-16A cannot be oper-
ated in the barrage (backup) mode unless the AN/
ALQ-122 system is turned off.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
See figure 1-25 for component location. The T-787A/
ALT-16A radio transmitters are connected to the
AN/ALR-20A receiver to provide look through
operation. During look through operation, the AN/
ALR-20A receiver sends blanking pulses to the
transmitters which turns the transmitters off for
short durations of time.
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
Control-Monitor (C-9040/ALQ-122)
The control-monitor (figure 1-26) interfaces with
the processor and provides remote operator control
and surveillance of system operation during normal
operation and during self-test.
Duplexer (CU-2030/ALQ-122)
The AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A countermeasures set
requires two duplexers, one aft and one forward.
Both duplexers are identical and interchangeable.
Directional Coupler (CU-2137A/ALQ-122)
The directional coupler is used to combine and
normalize the received RF signals from the forward
and aft duplexers. The combined signal from the
directional coupler output port is routed to the RF
input of the receiver. The received signal from the
forward duplexer (nose antenna), having the great-
est cable loss, is connected directly to the summing
port of the coupler. The signal from the aft duplexer
is connected to the coupled port through an exter-
nal fixed attenuator selected to balance the forward
and aft signal levels to the receiver.
Radio Transmitter (T-787A/ALT-16A)
The transmitter is comprised of low-level circuits
that generate broadband barrage noise, multiplier
circuits that multiply the input signals from the
low-level circuits to the output frequency and that
also provide channelization, and driver circuits in
which a traveling-wave tube (TWT) is used as a low
power amplifier.
Radio Frequency Amplifier (AM-2714A/ALT-16A)
The solid state amplifier consists of a high power
RF assembly, a power supply, and a control assem-
bly.
Control-Indicator (C-3358/ALT-16)
The control-indicator (figure 1-26) provides the nec-
essary controls for activating the transmitter and
amplifier from a remote location, and consists of
switching circuitry, a relative power indicating
meter, indicating lights for providing visual infor-
mation as to sequences of transmitter and amplifier
operation and panel lights for illuminating front
panel markings and controls.
1-75
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
System Signal Flow
In the receive mode, RF signals are routed from the
antennas to the aft and forward duplexers through
connectors J7 and/or J9 (aft) or J7 (fwd), and are
routed by internal switching circuits to duplexer
output connectors J5. The received RF signals from
the J5 connectors of the aft and forward duplexers
are routed to the directional coupler where they are
combined to provide RF inputs to the receiver. RF
signals are generated at a low level by the receiver
and are then routed to receptacle J111 on the
selected aft (system 9) or forward (system 21) AN/
ALT-l6A transmitter. The signal is amplified by the
transmitter, routed to the RF amplifier for further
linear amplification, and is then coupled to J4 of
the aft or forward duplexers. The duplexers route
the RF to either connector J7 or J9 of the aft
duplexer, or J7 of the forward duplexer, where it is
fed out to the appropriate antenna. When the AN/
ALT-16A is used with the AN/ALQ-122 in off condi-
tion, the aft AN/ALT-16A (system 9) output power
1-76
is fed to the section 47 bottom antenna while the
forward AN/ALT-16A (system 21) output power is
fed to the directional nose antenna in the nose
radome.
BUILT-IN TEST EQUIPMENT (BITE) SELF-TEST
The AN/ALQ-122 set has a self-test capability
which includes 1) a manual control panel lamp test,
and 2) an automatic test sequence using BITE. The
lamp test is used to verify proper operation of con-
trol-monitor lamps and driver circuits. The auto-
matic BITE self-test sequence provides an end-to-
end checkout (except for antennas and their associ-
ated RF transmission lines) of the entire counter-
measures system. The self-test sequence comprises
12 steps which test the system ability to acquire
and track a test signal in each threat channel and
operate in both ECM modes, plus the capability of
automatically selecting the optimum antenna for
each threat.
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-122/ALT-16A Component Locations

Figure 1-25 (Sheet 1 of 2)

Change 9 1-77
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-122/ALT-16A Component Locations (Cont)

Figure 1-25 (Sheet 2 of 2)

1-78
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A Controls and Indicators

C-9040/ALQ-122 CONTROL-MONITOR

1 SIGNAL ACTIVITY 6 PROGRAM SWITCH

2 STATUS LIGHTS 7 MODE SWITCH
3 TEST NO-GO LIGHT 8 POWER SWITCH
4 LAMP TEST SWITCH 9 TEST IN PROG SWITCH
5 COVER SWITCH 10 FAULT LIGHTS

Figure 1-26 (Sheet 1 of 4)

1-79
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A Controls and Indicators

(Cont)

C-3358/ALT-16 CONTROL-INDICATOR

11 CHANNEL SELECTOR BUTTONS (1-10) 15 STANDBY LIGHT

12 POWER SWITCH 16 WARM UP LIGHT
13 FAULT LIGHT 17 POWER MONITOR METER
14 RADIATE LIGHT 18 VSWR BUTTON

Figure 1-26 (Sheet 2 of 4)

1-80
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

C-9040/ALQ-122 CONTROL-MONITOR

1 SIGNAL ACTIVITY Lights A description of the function of these lights during normal operation is
contained in T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1. During self-test sequence, these lights
provide an indication of the test step being exercised. Steps above 8 are
indicated by two indicators, e.g.. step 9 – 1 and 8 lights.

2 STATUS Lights The four green indicators provide indication of system status during nor-
mal operation or self-test as follows:

RX Light Comes on when the receiver is generating an ECM drive signal to excite
the AN/ALT-16A transmitters.

DUP Light Comes on to indicate AN/ALT-16A transmitter RF power is being supplied

to the antenna(s) by one or more duplexer output ports. This indicator
therefore comes on whenever the system is transmitting against a threat
and when transmitting during steps 5 thru 8 of the BITE sequence.

16F and 16R Lights Come on to indicate the forward (16F) and the aft (16R) AN/ALT-16A sets
are in TRANSMIT and ready to amplify the low level ECM drive from the
receiver.

3 TEST NO-GO Light This white light comes on to indicate a fail condition during the BITE auto-
matic sequence. This indicator is automatically extinguished when the
TEST IN PROG switch is momentarily depressed.

4 LAMP TEST Switch When held depressed, all control-monitor lights should be on verifying
lamp circuit operation.

5 COVER Switch Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for a description of switch operation.

6 PROGRAM Switch Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1 for a description of switch operation.

7 MODE Switch When momentarily depressed, switches set to either standby (STBY) or
transmit (XMIT) mode. In STBY (amber light), the set remains warmed up
and ready for operation. In XMIT (green light), the set is enabled for full
operation. At turn-on, the set always goes to STBY mode.

8 POWER Switch When momentarily depressed, alternately applies or removes power to

the AN/ALQ-122 set. Power on is indicated by the green ON indicator
coming on. The blue WARM UP indicator is on during set warmup and
goes out after a 5-minute maximum warmup period.

Figure 1-26 (Sheet 3 of 4)

1-81
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A Controls and Indicators

(Cont)
CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

9 TEST IN PROG Switch
When momentarily depressed, switch initiates the automatic self-test
sequence. Green TEST IN PROG light should be on during this
sequence. Upon detection of a fail condition during self-test, the
sequence will halt. When this occurs, depressing TEST IN PROG switch
causes test sequence to continue through remaining steps until another
failure is noted or test sequence is completed (TEST IN PROG light goes
out).

10 FAULT Lights The four white indicators come on to indicate a fault in the receiver (RX),
processor (PR), forward duplexer (DF), and aft duplexer (DR).

C-3358/ALT-16 CONTROL-INDICATOR

11 Channel Selector Buttons Used to select channels for jamming. When depressed, dc power is fed
to brightly illuminate the button light, and provides a ground for the power
supplied to the respective channel multiplier allowing it to function. Press-
ing and releasing the button a second time deactivates the respective
channel.

12 Power Selector Used to select the application of power to the transmitter. STANDBY posi-
tion supplies power to illuminate the indicator lights. TRANSMIT position
supplies power to place the transmitter in operation. OFF & RESET posi-
tion disconnects all operating power and initiates a 3-minute cooling
cycle.

13 Fault Light A white light, when illuminated, indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
This light will not illuminate in event of a RF power output fault.

14 Radiate Light A green light, when illuminated, indicates that the system should be
radiating.

15 Standby Light An amber light, when illuminated, indicates that the power selector is in
STANDBY and the system is ready to transmit.

16 Warmup Light Not Used

17 Power Monitor Meter Not Used

18 VSWR Button Not Used

Figure 1-26 (Sheet 4 of 4)

1-82

AN/ALQ-153(V) TAIL WARNING SYSTEM
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The AN/ALQ-153 Tail Warning System is a solid
state pulse Doppler radar consisting of two anten-
nas, a radar receiver-transmitter (RRT), a digital
data signal processor (DDSP), an analog data sig-
nal processor (ADSP), and a control-indicator (fig-
ure 1-28). The system utilizes digital signal process-
ing to detect and warn against missile and aircraft
threats to the rear of the aircraft. Threats are indi-
cated by an audio warning tone as well as indicator
lights. When an aircraft is detected, a light on the
control-indicator (figure 1-28) comes on to indicate
the range window of the threat. When a missile is
detected, the left or right missile light (LMSL or
RMSL) comes on to indicate the tail sector in which
the missile is located. At the same time, the range
indicator comes on and the missile warning tone is
heard through the aircraft interphone system.
When the missile approaches a selected range or
time (whichever provides the least time remaining),
a countermeasures trigger (CM TRIG) light comes
on to indicate that a countermeasures dispense
(CMD) pulse has been generated. The CMD pulse
can be utilized to initiate defensive action against
the missile by releasing flares, chaff, or both flares
and chaff. A continuous built-in-test (BIT) is acti-
vated when the system is in OPER and will cause
the malfunction (MALF) light to come on if a mal-
function occurs. When the MALF light comes on,
the RRT, ADSP, or DDSP light comes on to indicate
the component in which the fault has occurred. A
HOT or PWR light will come on if the system shuts
down due to overheat or power faults. An operator
initiated BIT procedure may be performed after
warmup to provide limited verification of proper
system operation. The system receives three-phase
ac power and 28 volt dc power from the aircraft and
directs it to power supplies in the DDSP and ADSP.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Antenna (AS-3193/ALQ-153(V))
Two antennas located on the left and right side of
the vertical stabilizer (figure 1-27) look aft and out-
board. These antennas are alternately selected by
the RRT.
Radar Receiver-Transmitter (RT1239/ALQ-153(V))
The RRT (figure 1-27) is located forward of the
antennas in the vertical stabilizer. It consists of two
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
solid state transmit modules, two low noise ampli-
fier (LNA) modules, an input power splitter, and an
output power combiner/left-right switch. The trans-
mit modules serve as RF power amplifiers in trans-
mit and the LNAs serve as receiver preamplifiers in
receive. The input power splitter splits drive power
to the two transmit modules and the output power
combiner combines the output of the transmit mod-
ules and switches the transmit energy for transmis-
sion by the selected antenna. RF excitation, control
signals, and power for the receiver/transmitter is
furnished by the ADSP. In receive, the LNA mod-
ules amplify the signals from the antennas and
transmit these received signals to the receiver in
the analog signal processor. A receiver multiplexer
switches the receive energy between the left and
right LNA pairs. The receiver/ transmitter also has
a built-in test (BIT) assembly for detecting faults.
Digital Data Signal Processor (CV-3438/ALQ-153(V))
The DDSP (figure 1-27) is located in the aft
unpressurized section of the aircraft. The unit con-
sists of a digital signal processor, a power supply,
and a power contactor. The purpose of the digital
data signal processor is to discriminate between
missile and aircraft targets and to provide range
information (missile targets only) to the Control/
Indicator Panel. The DDSP provides the following
eight functions:
1. The synchronizer generates the precision tim-
ing signals for all units in the system.
2. It computes the Doppler offset of main-beam
clutter based on horizontal speed received from an
external source.
3. The Doppler filter resolution necessary to dis-
criminate among returns from missiles, aircraft,
and clutter.
4. Constant False Alarm Rate (CFAR) and post-
processing provide a “floating” or “adaptive” detec-
tion threshold which allows extremely low false
alarm rates.
5. It provides target identification and measure-
ment in which detected targets are centroided in
range and Doppler. Identification tests are made to
discriminate between aircraft and missile returns.
Target azimuth is calculated for missiles (left, right
determination) in which the amplitudes of the left
and right sum channels are compared to provide an
indication of target location. A trigger pulse for the
aircraft CMD is generated based on the present
control panel settings (range and/or time-to-impact
control) and the system status data for display.
1-83
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
6. The Noise Automatic Gain Control (NAGC)
loop periodically samples the level of the detected
noise from the receiver and holds the noise level
constant via gain control feed-back to the receiver.
7. BIT control and fault isolation controls the
timing of system BIT and accumulates the results
of independent BIT within each of the Line
Replaceable Unit (LRUs) to output a signal indicat-
ing overall system status as well as to throw fault
flags in the LRUs.
8. DDSP power supply accepts prime power
(28-volt dc and 400 Hz three-phase ac) and controls
power distribution of the ALQ-153 via contactors,
as well as providing regulated dc power for the
DDSP.
Analog Data Signal Processor CV-3439/ALQ-153(V)
The ADSP (figure 1-27) consists of a dual channel
receiver, a stable local oscillator (STALO), four ana-
log-to-digital (A/D) converters, (SAMPLE DATA
UNIT), and a power supply. The sample Data Unit
converts the four channels of video information
from the receiver-to digital information for the digi-
tal data signal processor (DDSP). The STALO pro-
vides RF excitation for the receiver/transmitter,
local oscillator signals for the receiver in the ADSP,
and clock signals for the DDSP. The power supply
1-84
supplies power to the ADSP and for the receiver/
transmitter.
The ADSP performs the following four functions:
1. The multifrequency STALO provides the stable
system clock signal, the transmit RF drive signal,
and the three Local Oscillator (LO) signals to the
two-channel receiver.
2. The triple-conversion receiver provides amplifi-
cation, filtering, and mixing of the radar return sig-
nal down to baseband and produces I (in-phase)
and Q (quadrature) signals for each of the sum and
difference inputs.
3. The sampled data assembly provides analog-
to-digital conversion of the four video channel sig-
nals from the receiver.
4. The ADSP power supply provides regulated dc
power to other subassemblies within the ADSP as
well as to the RRT assembly.
Control Indicator C-10259/ALQ-153(V)
The control-indicator (figure 1-28) interfaces the
tail warning system with the operator and provides
system mode control, fault status, as well as coun-
termeasures control and target display. See figure
1-28 for control and indicator functions.
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-153(V) Component Locations

Figure 1-27

1-85
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-153(V) Controls and Indicators

1 LEFT SECTOR INDICATOR 13 RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER/DIGITAL SIGNAL

2 TIME TO IMPACT (TTI) ROTARY SWITCH PROCESSOR MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
3 MISSILE RANGE INDICATOR 14 PUSH-TO-TEST TONE CONTROL
4 COUNTERMEASURES TRIGGER INDICATOR 15 HIGH/LOW ALTITUDE SELECTOR SWITCH
5 RIGHT SECTOR INDICATOR 16 TEMPERATURE/POWER MALFUNCTION
6 RANGE INDICATOR 0-3 INDICATOR & OVERRIDE SELECTOR SWITCH
7 JAM INDICATOR 17 OPERATE/STANDBY SELECTOR PUSHBUTTON
8 MINIMUM RANGE THRESHOLD SELECTOR 18 POWER PUSHBUTTON SWITCH
9 MINIMUM RANGE SELECTOR/SWITCH 19 TEST AND/OR MALFUNCTION SELECTOR
10 HOMING DEFEAT SELECTOR PUSHBUTTON SWITCH/INDICATOR
11 PUSH-TO-TEST LAMPS CONTROL 20 TIME TO IMPACT ENABLE-INHIBIT SELECT
12 ANALOG DATA SIGNAL PROCESSOR SWITCH/INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR 21 RANGE INDICATOR 3-6

Figure 1-28 (Sheet 1 of 5)

1-86

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR
1 Left Sector Indicator (Red)
2 Time-To-Impact (TTI) Rotary Switch
3 Missile RANGE Indicator
4 Countermeasures Trigger Indicator
(Green)
5 Right Sector Indicator (Red)
6 Range Indicator (Green) 0-3
7 JAM Indicator (Amber)
8 Minimum Range Threshold Selector
9 Minimum Range Selector Switch
ENAB (Enable) (Green)
INHBT (Inhibit) (Amber)
Figure 1-28 (Sheet 2 of 5)
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
FUNCTION
An illuminated L MSL lamp indicates a confirmed missile in the left tail
sector.
A 10-position rotary switch for the selection of a TTI threshold. The setting
of this switch is determined by mission requirements, In the event of a
missile threat, when the time-to-impact is equal to or less than the
selected time, a CM dispense pulse is automatically sent to the counter-
measure dispenser (CMD) if the TTI ENAB lamp is illuminated. An illumi-
nated CM TRIG lamp indicates that a CM dispense pulse has been initi-
ated. Pressing the TTI ENAB/INHBT switch disables this function and illu-
minates the INHBT lamp.
A two digit readout provides missile range. The L MSL, R MSL, and
RANGE is displayed only for the missile which presents the most immi-
nent threat. If the system loses detection of a missile, the MSL lamp and
the last range readout holds for a 3 second period unless a new missile
threat is detected, at which time the CIP will update and display the new
target information.
When the ALQ-153 initiates a CM dispense pulse the CM TRIG lamp illu-
minates for a 1 second period.
An illuminated R MSL lamp indicates a confirmed missile in right tail sec-
tor. Both L and R MSL lamps illuminated indicate detection of a missile
within sector of the tail centerline.
If illuminated indicates an aircraft or an unconfirmed missile within a given
range.
This lamp illuminates when the system senses an increase in the receiver
noise level induced by external sources which significantly degrades the
system performance.
MIN RNG is a 10-position rotary switch for selection of a minimum range
threshold. The setting of this switch is determined by mission require-
ments. In the event of a missile threat, when the minimum range is equal
to or less than the selected range, a CM dispense pulse is automatically
sent to the countermeasure dispenser (CMD) if the MIN RNG ENAB lamp
is illuminated. An illuminated CM TRIG lamp indicates that a CM dispense
pulse has been initiated. Pressing the MIN RNG ENAB/INHBT switch dis-
ables this function and illuminates the INHBT lamp.
Operation of this control described as part of Minimum Range Threshold
Selector (No. 8).
The ENAB light is on when MIN RNG is enabled (see No.8)
The INHBT light is on when MIN RNG is inhibited (see No.8)
1-87
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-153(V) Controls and Indicators (Cont)

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

10 HOMING DEFEAT Selector Pushbutton When enabled, this mode automatically inhibits system RF radiation for
a given period after a CM dispense pulse has been initiated. When defeat
mode is enabled, the HOMING DEFEAT lamp is illuminated. Pressing the
HOMING DEFEAT lamp switch the second time disables this function
and extinguishes the HOMING DEFEAT lamp.

11 Push-To-Test LAMPS Control A push-to-test function for lamp checkout. In addition, provides rotary
control to adjust the intensity of all CIP lamps. Lamp test does not inter-
rupt normal system operation or initiate any mode change.

12 Analog Data Signal Processor Malfunc-
tion (ADSP) Indicator (White)
An illuminated ADSP lamp indicates a malfunction in the unit. When the
HOT lamp is also illuminated this indicates a temperature problem in the
LRU. If the MALF lamp is illuminated, the ADSP lamp indicates a unit fail-
ure as detected by built-in-test (BIT). If the system has automatically
cycled into standby it can be reset by pressing the OPER switch.

13 Malfunction Indicators

Radar Receiver/Transmitter (R/T)
(White)
An illuminated R/T lamp indicates a malfunction in the unit. When the
HOT lamp is also illuminated this indicates a temperature problem in the
LRU. If the MALF lamp is illuminated, the R/T lamp indicates a unit failure
as detected by built-in-test (BIT). If the system has automatically cycled
into standby it can be reset by depressing the OPER switch.

Digital Signal Processor (DSP)
Indicator (White)
An illuminated DSP lamp indicates a malfunction in the unit. When the
HOT lamp is also illuminated this indicates a temperature problem in the
LRU. If the MALF lamp is illuminated, the DDSP lamp indicates a unit fail-
ure as detected by built-in-test (BIT). If the system has automatically
cycled into standby it can be reset by depressing the OPER switch.

14 Push-To-Test TONE Control A push-to-test function for tone checkout. In addition, provides rotary con-
trol to adjust the tone volume. Tone should be present at EW, Gunner, and
Dl stations. Tone test does not interrupt normal system operation or initi-
ate any mode change.

15 High/Low Altitude (HI ALT/LOW ALT) This switch and lamp combination is a manual aircraft altitude input to the
Selector Switch radar. HI ALT is selected when the aircraft is at 4000 feet AGL or above.

Figure 1-28 (Sheet 3 of 5)

1-88
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

16 Temperature/Power Malfunction
Indicator & Override Selector Switch

Temperature Indicator (HOT) An illuminated HOT lamp indicates that one of the system thermal inter-
(White) locks is open (no-go condition). When the HOT lamp is illuminated the
appropriate LRU lamp (ADSP, R/T, or DDSP} also illuminates, indicating
which unit is overheated. A “hot” condition automatically results in the
system power contactor being deenergized, removing input power to all
units. Once the temperature problem has been corrected, the system
automatically sequences into the standby mode if the power is on. In the
event of an emergency, this function can be disabled for the R/T and
ADSP by the OVRD, but cannot be disabled for the DDSP.

Power Malfunction Indicator (PWR) An illuminated PWR lamp indicates the input power to the system is
(White) unsatisfactory or not present. An absent phase or a voltage greater than
130 vac phase to neutral, supplied via the three-phase power source
would illuminate the PWR lamp. When the PWR lamp is illuminated, the
power contactor is deenergized. In the event of an emergency this func-
tion can be disabled by the OVRD switch.

Override Selector Pushbutton
Switch (OVRD) (Amber)
Pressing the OVRD switch disables the R/T and ADSP thermal inter-
locks, but does not disable the DDSP thermal interlock. It also disables
the input power monitor interlock, initiated BIT. lamp test, and tone test
functions, and prevents reversion to STBY upon BIT fault. An illuminated
OVRD lamp indicates that the override function has been initiated. Press-
ing the OVRD switch a second time extinguishes the OVRD lamp and dis-
ables the override function. The switch inhibits the automatic sequencing
from operate to standby mode in the event of a system malfunction.

17 Standby/(STBY) (Amber) An illuminated STBY lamp indicates the system is ready to be placed into
Operate (OPER) (Green) the operate mode. When the STBY lamp is illuminated, pressing the
Pushbutton Switch STBY/OPER switch automatically puts the system in the operate mode.
The STBY lamp extinguishes and the OPER lamp illuminates. During the
transitions the MALF light will illuminate. When in the operate mode
depressing the STBY/OPER switch returns the system to standby. When
the system is in the OPER mode it automatically goes to standby after the
TEST switch is pressed and the test is performed or if a system malfunc-
tion occurs, unless the OVRD button is depressed.

18 POWER Pushbutton Switch (White) The POWER switch controls system input power. Pressing the POWER
switch applies power to the CIP circuitry and energizes the power
contactor located in the DDSP. Once the power contactor has energized
the POWER & MALF lamps illuminate. The POWER and MALF lamps
remain illuminated during the warmup period. The warmup cycle requires
130 seconds if the system is turned on cold or 42 seconds if the system
has been off a short time. After the warmup cycle is completed, the
POWER and MALF lamps automatically extinguish and the STBY lamp
illuminates.

Figure 1-28 (Sheet 4 of 5)

1-89
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-153(V) Controls and Indicators (Cont)

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

19 Test and/or Malfunction Selector

Switch/Indicator

TEST (Green) Pressing the TEST switch initiates an operator confidence test of the sys-
tem countermeasures (CM) pulse. The TEST and OPER lamp illumi-
nates and the system automatically cycles into the standby (non-radiat-
ing) mode. During this test the CM pulse to the aircraft is disabled. Missile
range is counted down until the preselected minimum range (MIN RNG)
and time-to-impact (TTI) is reached. When this occurs the CM TRIG lamp
illuminates for a 1 second period. This is a test of the DDSP and DDSP/
CIP interfaces.

System Malfunction Indicator An illuminated MALF lamp indicates a system malfunction as detected by
(White) built -in-test (BIT). When the MALF lamp illuminates, the system automat-
ically cycles into the standby mode unless it is in OVRD.

20 Time-To-Impact Enable-Inhibit Select Operation of this control described as part of Time-To-Impact (TTI) Rotary
Switch/Indicator Switch (No. 2).

ENAB (Enable) (Green) The ENAB light is on when TTI is enabled (see No.2)

INHBT (inhibit) (Amber) The INHBT light is on when TTI is inhibited (see No.2)

21 Range Indicator (Green) 3-6 If illuminated indicates an aircraft or missile within a given range.

Figure 1-28 (Sheet 5 of 5)

1-90

NORMAL OPERATION (ALQ-153(V))
Turn-On Procedures
Press POWER pushbutton, POWER light (green)
comes on and the system is in the warmup mode of
operation. The POWER light will go out and the
STBY light (amber) will come on when the system
is ready for normal operation (42 to 130 seconds).
The ALQ-153(V) system will not be oper-
ated on the ground unless ground cooling
equipment is used. Time, temperature, and
cooling requirements of T.O. 1B-52G-2-20
must be complied with.
System Operation
Normal operation of the ALQ-153(V) consists of
operating the system to detect threat aircraft
and/or missiles off the tail of the aircraft. To place
the system into normal operation after a satisfac-
tory turn-on or operator initiated BIT procedures,
the following steps should be performed:
1. Press STBY/OPER pushbutton (amber), OPER
(green) light should come on, and STBY (amber)
light should go off.
2. Position MIN RNG and TTI controls to desired
settings as directed by MAJCOM, or current tacti-
cal directives.
3. Press MIN RNG and TTI ENAB/INHBT
pushbuttons to ENAB position (green) light on.
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
4. If the ALQ-153(V) system detects an aircraft or
unconfirmed missile, the aircraft detect light
(green) will come on to indicate the approximate
range of the aircraft missile.
5. If a missile has been detected, the L MSL or R
MSL light(s) (red) will come on, the range indicator
will come on to indicate missile range, and the mis-
sile warning tone will be heard over the interphone
system. Both L MSL and R MSL lights illuminated
indicates detection of a missile within 10 degrees of
the tail centerline. When the missile reaches the
minimum range selected or the TTI selected, which-
ever criterion is met first, the CM TRIG light
(green) will come on generating a countermeasures
dispense (CMD) pulse.
Do not operate the ALQ-153 (V) system on the
ground with chaff or flares loaded on the aircraft.
NOTE
If automatic dispensing of flares and/or
chaff is desired, the flare (ALE-20) system
and/or the chaff (ALE-24), must be on and
in the automatic mode of operation.
6. If CMD pulse generation is not desired, press
the MIN RNG and TTI pushbuttons and position to
INHBT (amber) lights come on.
7. To turn off the ALQ-153(V) system, press the
POWER pushbutton and all indicator lights will go
off.
1-91
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
AN/ALQ-155(V) POWER MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The AN/ALQ-155(V) system is capable of providing
various types of RF power output covering a wide
frequency range by using interchangeable transmit-
ter groups. Each transmitter group has a specific
frequency range and power output which is desig-
nated as a band.
Band 12 systems are installed in positions 1 and 2;
band 9 system in position 6; band 9S systems in po-
sitions 3 and 4; band 10 system in position 13; band
10S systems in positions 5 and 8; and band 11 sys-
tems in positions 7 and 14.
Each system consists of an ALQ-155(V) receiver-
transmitter, one-half of an HD-766A/ALT-28(V)
dual electronic equipment liquid cooler, one-half of
a flow protect valve, antenna system, one-half of a
C-10130/ALQ-155(V) control-indicator/programmer,
and CM-465A/ALQ-155(V) processor. Location of
system components is shown in figure 1-29. The
T-1150C or D/ALT-28(V) transmitter has an
R-2050/ALQ-155(V) receiver mounted on its front
panel. Together they form an ALQ-155(V) receiver-
transmitter unit. The transmitter contains an M-
type backward wave oscillator (BWO) and most of
the functional circuits of the system. The transmit-
ter housing is a magnesium casting which provides
mounting for the BWO and liquid-and air-cooled ca-
vities in which modules containing the power sup-
plies, regulators, and modulators associated with
the BWO are mounted. The receiver is tunable and
controlled by the signal processor in the automatic
mode of operation. The control signal from the ra-
dar warning receiver and or SI is received through
the ALQ-155 signal processor which consists of
three functions: an input/output interface, a central
processor, and a memory. The input/output inter-
face circuits convert processor external signal in-
puts into control and data inputs to the central pro-
cessor circuits and reconverts central processor
data into outputs from the processor. When directed
by the external control inputs, the central process-
ing circuits perform programmed software opera-
tions with the external data inputs. Microprocessor
chips are utilized inside the central processor to ac-
complish these software operations. Two memories
are contained in the processor: one provides the
programmable software routines and a random
1-92 Change 1
memory scratch pad, and the other memory con-
tains the threat data file. The interface processor
operates as an integral part of the ALQ-155(V) sys-
tem providing interface between the control-indica-
tor/programmers and the receivers. Data and con-
trol inputs from the aircraft radar warning receiver
and or SI and AN/ALQ-172(V)2 systems are also
routed through the signal processor for system tie-
in. The liquid cooler comprises a reservoir for cool-
ing fluid, a single motor which drives a pump, a
cooling coil, and circuitry for control of the system
timing periods. The flow protect valve protects the
system from major leaks by closing off the flow of
coolant to either of two T-1150/ALT-28 transmitters
whenever a leakage rate in excess of 0.2 gallon per
minute (GPM) is detected. This prevents a loss of
coolant which could cause the unimpaired system to
fail. For leakage rates of 0.2 GPM or greater, the
valve closes, terminating power and coolant flow to
the leaky transmitter, and diverts all the coolant to
the operable transmitter. As a second independent
function, the flow protect valve also senses whenev-
er the flow of coolant to either transmitter falls be-
low 1.8 GPM. A signal is provided to the liquid cool-
er to shut down that transmitter before thermal
damage can occur. The control-indicator/program-
mer provides controls and indications required for
remote control of the system and controls for initi-
ating the jamming program desired. The C-9525/
ALT-28(V) antenna select panel drives a waveguide
switch for systems No. 1 and 2 to transfer electro-
magnetic energy from the transmitter to either the
forward or omni antennas. Circuits within the pan-
el control dc voltages used to disable the transmit-
ters during waveguide switching time.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Signal Processor (CM-465A/ALQ-155)
The signal processor (SP) (figure 1-30) controls the
functioning of the receiver-transmitters (RTs) based
on the mode of operation. It does this by executing
a set of software instructions contained in Program-
mable Read Only Memory (PROM). This set of
instructions is called the Operation Flight Program
(OFP). Also resident in the PROMs is a set or repro-
grammable threat parameters known as the Emit-
ter Identification Data (EID). The major compo-
nents of the ALQ-155 are controlled through four
interfaces. These include the Receiver Transmitter
(RT), Control Indicator/Programmer (CIP), AN/
ALR-46, and the AN/ALQ-172 interfaces.

SIGNAL PROCESSOR CONTROL FUNCTIONS
The computer program contained in the SP consists
of an initialization and self-test sequence and an
executive loop.
1. Initialization and self-test. When power is first
applied to the SP, the OFP executes an initializa-
tion and self-test sequence. This sequence performs
the following steps:
a. Verifies proper installation of the EID
PROMs by reading the first PROM word and
comparing it to the proper value stored in the OFP.
b. Verifies that all RAM locations can be writ-
ten to and read from without errors.
c. Verifies the OFP PROMs can be read and
contain the correct data. This is accomplished by
forming a cumulative check of all OFP PROM
memory locations and comparing it to the correct
value stored in the EID PROMs.
d. Verifies that operational parameters/
constants, downloaded from PROM to RAM for
OFP use, were downloaded properly by doing a one-
to-one comparison.
e. Verifies the hardware long and short timers
used by the OFP are operating properly.
f. Blinks the ERR lamp on all activated CIPs
if the sequence is successful.
2. Executive Loop. The executive loop repeatedly
performs a number of sequential functions. These
functions are described below.
a. One routine periodically checks the status
of each RT to determine if a power failure has
occurred. If a power failure is detected, an internal
flag is set in RAM and the OFP attempts to reacti-
vate the RT. If reactivation is successful, no indica-
tions are provided to the operator. If unsuccessful,
the ERR lamp will illuminate.
b. Another routine handles CIP servicing
whenever a CIP request is received. It first deter-
mines which CIP made the request and then deter-
mines the type of request (MODE switch, JOG/RE-
SET pushbutton, or DES pushbutton). Finally, this
routine services the request by executing the soft-
ware sequences which apply to the switch or
pushbutton.
c. Yet another routine controls operation of all
CIP lamps that are blinking in a software con-
trolled blink table. It does this by inverting the
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
lamp state (i.e, on to off or off to on). If the blink
duration has expired, the lamp is turned off and
removed from the blink table. Timing for the blink
interval is determined by a combination of software
and hardware timers.
d. The final routine of the executive loop
maintains the accuracy of all designated transmit-
ters which have previously locked to a signal. On
the average, this is accomplished every 1.5 seconds.
Before the receivers are checked for activity, all
transmitters are blanked to avoid interference.
Each locked-on receiver is then examined for signal
activity. If activity is found, the receiver is set so
the signal is in the middle of the search frequency
range and the transmitter is tuned to the receiver
frequency. If a signal is no longer present, a reac-
quisition sequence is initiated. This routine also
performs the initial acquisition for transmitters
designated in the manual mode.
CONTROL CIRCUITS
The high voltages, power levels, and large heat con-
centrations encountered in the AN/ALQ-155(V)
require that warmup, standby, and cooling off peri-
ods be provided before and after application of high
voltage in the system. The necessary protection is
provided by the turn on (cycle in) and turn off (cycle
out) procedures of the system. The turn on proce-
dures energize relays in their proper sequence to
allow system and backward wave oscillator fila-
ments to warmup prior to application of high volt-
age. When the MODE switch is rotated from OFF
to STBY 1, full filament voltage is applied to all but
one filament in the system. Reduced filament volt-
age is applied to the BWO. The TUN light will come
on. The system will remain in this condition indefi-
nitely or until the next step of turn on procedure is
accomplished. To activate the normal filament volt-
age to the BWO, the operator must rotate the
MODE switch to STBY 2, or pressing JOG/RES
switch with the MODE switch in STBY 1. At this
time the TUN light will be on and numeral 5 will be
displayed on the THREAT ENGAGED indicator.
During the time that the TUN and 5 lights are on,
full filament voltage is applied to the BWO for 60
seconds. After the total cycle-in period has elapsed,
the TUN light will go out, the 5 light will remain
on, and the system is ready to transmit when the
MODE switch is placed in a transmit position sup-
plying plate voltage to the transmitter.
1-93
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
System Cooling
If the coolant becomes overheated, ground is
removed from the cycle-in control circuits and the
system operates as in the cycle-out period except
that control power has not been removed and the
system will automatically begin to recycle after
coolant temperature drops. No indication of this
fault is provided except that the TUN light will
come on.
Failure of one or two phases to the liquid cooler
motor or the high voltage power supply trans-
former, or failure of one or more legs of these com-
ponents resulting in a high neutral current, or a
1-94
BWO filament overvoltage condition causes the
phase protect relay to remove control voltage from
the system thus removing all ac power. Operation of
the phase fault relay causes the PHASE FAULT
light on the liquid cooler and the FAU light on the
control-indicator/programmer to come on.
If coolant flow falls below 1.8 gpm, the flow switch
operates and applies 28volts dc to a 30 second time
delay relay and the NO FLOW light comes on. After
30 seconds, the time delay relay opens, removing
power from the system. The 28volts dc from the
flow switch is also applied to the FAU light causing
a fault indication on the control- indicator/program-
mer.
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-155(V) Component Locations

Figure 1-29 (Sheet 1 of 3)

1-95
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-155(V) Component Locations (Cont)

Figure 1-29 (Sheet 2 of 3)

1-96
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Figure 1-29 (Sheet 3 of 3)

1-97
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-155(V) Signal Processor

Figure 1-30

1-98
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

C-10130 (ALQ-155) Control Indicator Programmer

1 DESIGNATE SWITCH 9 FAULT LIGHT

2 ERROR LIGHT 10 JOG/RESET SWITCH
3 LOCK-LIGHT 11 MODE SELECTOR SWITCH
4 AUTOMATIC LIGHT 12 THREAT ENGAGE INDICATOR
5 SEMI-AUTOMATIC LIGHT 13 CENTER FREQUENCY CONTROL
6 STACK LIGHT 14 MANUAL SCAN RATE CONTROL
7 TUNE (WARMUP) LIGHT 15 PROGRAM SELECTOR SWITCH
8 TRANSMIT LIGHT 16 RF BANDWIDTH CONTROL

NOTE

Each ALQ-155 Control-Indicator/Programmer contains duplicate controls for two

transmitters with the exception of the MANUAL SCAN RATE CONTROL. The
MANUAL SCAN RATE CONTROL is shared by both transmitters.
Figure 1-31

1-99
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALQ-155 Antenna Selector Panel

1 ANTENNA SELECTOR SWITCH (ALQ-155

SYSTEM 1)
2 FWD ANTENNA LIGHT (ALQ-155 SYSTEM 1)
3 CMNI ANTENNA LIGHT (ALQ-155 SYSTEM 1)
4 MONITOR BUTTON (LOOK THRU)
5 FWD ANTENNA LIGHT (ALQ-155 SYSTEM 2)
6 OMNI ANTENNA LIGHT (ALQ-155 SYSTEM 2)
7 ANTENNA SELECTOR SWITCH (ALQ-155
SYSTEM 2)
8 LAMP TEST BUTTON

Figure 1-32

1-100

NORMAL OPERATION (ALQ-155)
Turn-On Procedures
1. Positioning the MODE selector to STBY 1
places the system in warmup mode. During this
mode of operation, full filament voltage is not
applied to the backward wave oscillator (BWO) and
only the TUN light will illuminate. The system can-
not be placed into radiation directly from this mode.
The upper THREAT ENGAGE indicator will dis-
play a number and the lower THREAT ENGAGE
indicator will display a letter on the first CIP set to
STBY 1 with all other MODE selectors set to OFF.
This number/letter display represents the version/
revision of the installed software.
2. To place the system into standby mode, posi-
tion the MODE selector to STBY 2 or JOG/RESET
in WARMUP mode. During the 1-minute cycle-in
period when the transmitter is transitioning from
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
warmup to standby, the TUN light is illuminated
and the number 5 is displayed in the THREAT
ENGAGE display. After the 1 minute cycle-in
period, the TUN light will go out.
3. In the standby mode (STBY 2), the transmitter
is ready for immediate use and only the THREAT
ENGAGE will continue to display the number 5 to
signify that the system is in standby mode.
4. To return the transmitter to WARMUP mode
after it has been transmitting, rotate the MODE
selector to the stop at STBY 2. Then pull out on the
knob and rotate counterclockwise to OFF. The num-
ber 5 in the THREAT DISPLAY will blank out.
When the TUN light illuminates after 7 seconds,
rotate the MODE selector clockwise to STBY 1.
5. To turn the transmitter off from the warmup
mode (STBY 1), rotate MODE selector ccw from
STBY 1 to OFF.
1-101/(1-102 blank)
BLA

EXPENDABLE COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEMS
AN/ALE-24
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NORMAL OPERATION
AN/ALE-20
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
NORMAL OPERATION
AN/ALE-24 DISPENSER SET
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The AN/ALE-24 countermeasures equipment dis-
pensing set provides a means of dispensing minia-
ture chaff packages from the wings of aircraft
which misleads or clouds distant investigative
radars. The set consists of eight D-20/ALE-24 dis-
pensers, a C-4508/ALE-24 selector, a C-4507/
ALE-24 programmer, and a C9510/ALE MA
EXPEN control panel (master expendables control)
connected into the system for SPD dispensing. The
selector, programmer, and master expendables con-
trol are located at the EW officer station. Four dis-
pensers are installed in each wing and are num-
bered 1 thru 8 starting at the left outboard position
and continuing to the right outboard position. See
figure 1-33 for further equipment location informa-
tion. Locating the dispensers in the wings yields an
effective countermeasures capability due to the
high air turbulence, a large lateral separation of
dispensers, and simultaneous ejection of chaff pack-
ages from both wings in bursts of two, four, or six
packages. The wing location also reduces chaff con-
tamination to the aircraft.
The AN/ALE-24 dispensing set is designed to
accommodate 900 packages of self-protection dis-
pensing (SPD) chaff, 150 units of single unit dis-
pensing (SUD) chaff, and 75 units of delayed open-
ing chaff (DOC). Dispensers No. 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 8
are reserved for SPD chaff, dispenser No. 2 for
DOC, and dispenser No. 7 for SUD chaff. Maga-
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
1-103
1-103
1-103
1-111
1-113
1-113
1-113
1-120
zines, mounted five to each dispenser, contain the
chaff. SUD and DOC chaff are dispensed at selected
intervals. SPD chaff is dispensed at continuous
rates or in bursts, programmed according to units
per burst, interval between bursts, and bursts per
program. The AN/ALQ-153(V)1 countermeasures
set may dispense chaff as a counter to aircraft and
missiles approaching the tail of the B-52.
UNITS PER BURST SEQUENCE BY
SWITCH SETTING DISPENSER NO.
2 1-5, 3-6, 4-8
4 1-4-5-8, 1-3-5-6, 3-4-6-8
6 1-3-4-5-6-8, 1-3-4-5-6-8,
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Dispenser (D-20/ALE-24)
Eight identical dispensers (figure 1-33) are located
in left and right wing section 11, four on each wing
numbered 1 to 8 from left outboard to right out-
board position. Each dispenser consists of an ejector
assembly, five magazine and feeder assemblies, and
five support fittings. The dispenser is capable of
handling the different thicknesses of chaff units by
adjustment of an ejector roller adjustment screw
and gate in the magazine and feeder assembly. The
dispenser has a dispensing rate of two packages per
second with a velocity of approximately 30 feet per
second. As each package is ejected, a sleeve opener
in the magazine opens the package.
1-103
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
Selector Control Panel (C-4508/ALE-24)
The selector control panel (figure 1-34) contains the
controls necessary to select operating modes and
types of chaff to be dispensed. Located on the unit
are the DOC, SUD, and SPD dispensing switches.
the DOC or SUD dispensing switches will initiate a
continuous mode program. these modes are inde-
pendent of all other operating modes and can be
operated simultaneously with any other mode. The
SPD dispensing switch controls mode of operation
for the SPD chaff. In CONT position, a continuous
dispensing mode can be initiated; in BURST posi-
tion, a burst dispensing mode can be initiated. Also
located on the unit are three subtractive counter
units, one for each type of chaff, which indicate the
number of chaff packages remaining in the dispens-
ers. Each counter dial can be reset by pushing in
and rotating the reset control shaft projecting from
under each counter. Eight DISP FAULT lights
located on the unit will light individually if the
associated dispenser fails to eject a package within
approximately 100ms after receiving a dispense
command pulse. DISP FAULT lights will also light
individually, indicating magazines are empty.
Programmer Control Panel (C-4507/ALE-24)
The programmer control panel (figure 1-34) con-
tains the necessary controls to program different
modes of chaff dispensing. Located on this unit is
the power switch for the dispensing set and an
1-104
AUTO-OFF switch. The AUTO-OFF switch allows
the initiation of an SPD burst program by the AN/
ALQ-153 Tail Warning System, this Section. The
PROGRAM indicator light will come on when the
burst program is in progress. Also contained on the
unit are five rotary switches.
Master Expendables Control Panel
The circuitry in the master expendables control
panel (figure 1-34) related to SPD chaff dispensing
is electrically connected to the selector and pro-
grammer units. Only two of the controls on the unit
are used in conjunction with the SPD chaff dispens-
ing system. The SPD CHAFF pushbutton indicator
is used to initiate a SPD burst program and the
SPD TERM pushbutton is used to terminate the
program. The remaining controls are used in con-
junction with the ALE-20 flare ejection system.
Gunner’s Chaff Deactivate Switch
A foot-operate momentary switch is located at the
gunner’s station. This switch enables the gunner to
terminate a chaff program in progress initiated by
the EW officer. When this switch is actuated, the
chaff program must be reinitiated by the EW officer
in order to resume chaff dispensing. The chaff deac-
tivate switch receives TR power through a circuit
breaker marked CHAFF DISP DEACTIVATE
located on the ECM circuit breaker panel.
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALE-24 Component Locations

Figure 1-33
1-105
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALE-24 Controls and Indicators

1 SPD CONTINUOUS UNITS PER MINUTE 5 POWER SWITCH

SELECTOR 6 AUTOMATIC DISPENSE SWITCH
2 PROGRAM IN PROGRESS INDICATOR 7 UNITS PER BURST SELECTOR
3 DOC-SUD MINUTES PER UNIT SELECTOR 8 BURST INTERVAL SELECTOR
4 BURSTS PER PROGRAM SELECTOR

Figure 1-34 (Sheet 1 of 5)

1-106 Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

9 SPD DISPENSER FAULT INDICATOR

LIGHTS
10 SPD CHAFF COUNTER
11 SPD CHAFF COUNTER RESET
CONTROL
12 SUD CHAFF COUNTER
13 SUD CHAFF COUNTER RESET
CONTROL
14 SUD DISPENSER FAULT INDICATOR
LIGHT
15 SUD DISPENSE SWITCH
16 SPD DISPENSE SWITCH
17 DOC DISPENSE SWITCH
18 DOC DISPENSER FAULT INDICATOR
LIGHT
19 DOC CHAFF COUNTER RESET
CONTROL
20 DOC CHAFF COUNTER

B ALE-24 SELECTOR CONTROL PANEL

21 FLARE PROGRAM INITIATE SWITCH

22 SPD CHAFF PROGRAM IN
PROGRESS LIGHT
23 SPD CHAFF PROGRAM INITIATE
SWITCH
24 FLARE BURST INTERVAL SWITCH
25 ALE-20 BURST INTERVAL LIGHT
26 SPD CHAFF PROGRAM TERMINATE
SWITCH
27 FLARE BURST INTERVAL SELECTOR
28 MEP BURST INTERVAL LIGHT
29 SPD CHAFF STANDBY LIGHT
30 LAMP TEST BUTTON
31 FLARE STANDBY LIGHT
32 FLARE PROGRAM IN PROGRESS
LIGHT

C MASTER EXPENDABLES PANEL (MEP)

Figure 1-34 (Sheet 2 of 5)

Change 9 1-107
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALE-24 Controls and Indicators (Cont)

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

A PROGRAMMER CONTROL PANEL

1 SPD Continuous Units-Per-Minute Used with continuous program mode of operation to dispense SPD chaff
Selector packages at rates of 60, 90, and 120 packages per minute. The continu-
ous mode, when initiated from the programmer and selector units, over-
rides the burst mode.

2 PROGRAM-in-Progress Indicator Light A green light indicates, when illuminated, that dispense pulses are being
provided for SPD programmed dispensing.

NOTE

In the event of an empty dispenser or a malfunction, the count-

ers may move without dispensing chaff.

3 DOC-SUD Minutes-Per-Unit Selector
Controls the interval in minutes between dispense pulses provided to the
DOC or SUD dispense clutch, in position 2, pulses will be provided at a
random interval of 1 to 3 minutes. In position 3, pulses will be provided
at a random interval of 2 to 4 minutes. In position 4, pulses will be provided
at a random interval of 3 to 5 minutes.

4 Bursts-Per-Program Selector Controls the number of chaff bursts to be dispensed to complete a burst
program. A burst program is interrupted when a local continuous program
is initiated.

5 Power Switch PWR position energizes the SPD dispenser power relays, supplying ac
power to the SPD dispenser motors, and routes dc power through the
3-second time delay to the other parts of the dispenser. OFF position
removes all power from the dispenser system.

6 Automatic Dispense Switch The AUTO-OFF switch must be in AUTO position if automatic activation
of chaff dispensing by the ALQ-153 is desired.

7 Units-Per-Burst Selector Used with burst program mode of operation to control the number of chaff
packages dispensed simultaneously in quantities of two, four, or six pack-
ages.

8 BURST INTERVAL Selector Controls burst intervals from 1/2 second to 10 seconds.

B ALE-24 SELECTOR CONTROL PANEL

9 SPD Dispenser Fault Indicator Light Amber lights indicate when illuminated, that a dispense signal has not
been received at the malfunction circuit from that light’s respective dis-
penser.

10 SPD Chaff Counter Subtractive type counter indicates the number of chaff packages remain-
ing in their respective dispensers. A control is provided to adjust the
counter.

11 SPD Chaff Counter Reset Control The SPD chaff control counter can be reset by pressing and turning the
reset knob in either direction.

Figure 1-34 (Sheet 3 of 5)

1-108
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

B ALE-24 SELECTOR CONTROL PANEL (CONT)

12 SUD Chaff Counter Subtractive type counter indicates the number of chaff packages remain-
ing in their respective dispensers. A control is provided to adjust the
counter.

13 SUD Chaff Counter Reset Control The SUD chaff control counter can be reset by pressing and turning the
reset knob in either direction.

14 SUD Dispenser Fault Indicator Light Amber lights indicate when illuminated, that a dispense signal has not
been received at the malfunction circuit from that light’s respective dis-
penser.

15 SUD Dispense Switch In DISP position, the dispense pulses will be provided to the SUD dis-
penser at the continuous rate selected by the DOC-SUD minute-per-unit
selector. In OFF position, no pulses will be provided to the SUD dis-
penser.

16 SPD Dispense Switch In CONT position, the SPD continuous units-per-minute selector is in the
circuit and dispense pulses will be provided to the SPD dispensers at the
continuous rate selected. In BURST position, the burst interval, units-per-
burst, and bursts-per-program selectors are in the circuit and dispense
pulses will be provided to the SPD dispensers in bursts, for number of
bursts selected only. In OFF position, no dispense pulses will be provided
to the SPD dispensers.

17 DOC Dispense Switch In DISP position, dispense pulses will be provided to the DOC dispenser
at the continuous rate selected by the DOC-SUD minutes per unit selec-
tor. In OFF position, no pulses will be provided to the DOC dispenser.

18 DOC Dispenser Fault Indicator Light Amber lights indicate when illuminated, that a dispense signal has not
been received at the malfunction circuit from that light’s respective dis-
penser.

19 DOC Chaff Counter Reset Control The DOC chaff control counter can be reset by pressing and turning the
reset knob in either direction.

20 DOC Chaff Counter Subtractive type counter indicates the number of chaff packages remain-
ing in their respective dispensers. A control is provided to adjust the
counter.

C MASTER EXPENDABLES PANEL (MEP)

21 FLARE Program Initiate Switch When pressed, this switch will initiate a flare burst program as set on the
flare programming control panel. This switch performs the same function
as the release switch on the flare programming panel.

22 SPD Chaff Program In Progress Light When illuminated, this light indicates that an SPD chaff program is in
progress as selected by either the ALE-24 programmer or the MEP. A pro-
gram cannot be initiated by the MEP as long as this light is on.

Figure 1-34 (Sheet 4 of 5)

1-109
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALE-24 Controls and Indicators (Cont)

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

C MASTER EXPENDABLES PANEL (MEP) (CONT)

23 SPD CHAFF Program Initiate Switch When pressed, this switch will initiate an SPD chaff burst program as set
on the programmer and selector control panels. This switch will not over-
ride a program initiated by the ALE-24 control panels.

24 Flare Burst Interval Switch Pressing this switch will select either the flare burst interval set on the flare
programming control panel or the flare burst interval set on the MEP.
Successive pressing of the switch will alternately select either ALE-20
panel setting or the MEP setting.

25 ALE 20 Burst Interval Light When illuminated, this light indicates that the burst interval setting on the
flare programming control panel is selected.

26 SPD Chaff Program Terminate When pressed, this switch will terminate any SPD chaff burst program in
progress. After the switch has been pressed, the SPD burst program can
be reinitiated either by the chaff programming panel or by the MEP. If the
SPD burst program is reinitiated, the program will start from the beginning
(of the program setup on the ALE-24 programmer) and will not resume
from the point at which the program was terminated. DOC, SUD, or SPD
continuous programs are not affected by this switch.

27 FLARE BURST INTERVAL Selector This selector selects the desired interval in seconds between pro-
grammed bursts.

28 MEP Burst Interval Light When illuminated, this light indicates that the burst interval setting on the
MEP is selected.

29 SPD Chaff Standby Light When illuminated, this light indicates the ALE-24 system is in standby and
a new SPD chaff program can be initiated.

30 LAMP TEST Button When pressed, all lights on the MEP should illuminate at full brilliance.

31 Flare Standby Light When illuminated, this light indicates the ALE-20 system is in standby and
a new flare program can be initiated.

32 Flare Program in Progress Light When illuminated, this light indicates that a flare burst program is in prog-
ress. A program cannot be initiated by the MEP as long as this light is on.

Figure 1-34 (Sheet 5 of 5)

1-110

NORMAL OPERATION (ALE-24)
1. SPD CONTINUOUS MODE. The system is
designed to dispense SPD chaff in the continuous
mode at rates of 60, 90, or 120 packages per min-
ute. Packages are dispensed sequentially from each
SPD dispenser. To initiate continuous operation,
place SPD dispense switch to CONT position; the
counter should decrease steadily and at a rate
(determined by the setting of the SPD continuous
units-per-minute selector. To stop continuous opera-
tion, return SPD dispense switch to OFF (center
position).
2. SPD BURST MODE. The burst mode is accom-
plished by setting the package per burst control (2,
4, or 6), the burst interval selector (1/2 thru 10),
and the bursts-per-program selector (1 thru 10) to
the desired position. Packages are dispensed simul-
taneously to provide the desired number of pack-
ages per burst. To initiate burst operation, firmly
move dispense switch to BURST position; the
counter should decrease at intervals as determined
by burst interval selector setting The program-in-
progress indicator will illuminate while an SPD
burst program is in progress. The light will extin-
guish and the counter will stop when the program
is complete. To reinitiate another program, the SPD
dispense switch must again be moved firmly to
BURST position.
During SPD burst operation, any change
made in programmer control settings while
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
a program is in progress may result in chaff
being dispensed at an unknown rate and
duration or possible system malfunction.
NOTE
When initiating a burst program, it is nec-
essary to firmly place the SPD dispense
switch to the BURST position and release
the switch slowly. Erratic operation may
result if the SPD dispense switch is not pos-
itively activated. This situation has
occurred if the program light goes out prior
to program completion. In this event, it will
be necessary to recycle the system before
resuming the desired program. Merely reac-
tivating the SPD dispense switch will cause
the system to resume operation but will
result in an incomplete chaff dispense.
3. To initiate DOC and/or SUD dispensing, lift
guard(s) and place DOC and/or SUD dispense
switch(es) to DISP position. The counter(s) will
decrease as determined by the DOC-SUD minutes-
per-unit selector setting. To stop DOC/SUD dispens-
ing, place dispense switch(es) OFF and close
guard(s).
1-111/(1-112 blank)
BLA

AN/ALE-20 FLARE EJECTOR SET
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The AN/ALE-20 flare ejector system is an airborne
countermeasure system designed to deceive in-
frared guidance systems. Deception is accomplished
by ejecting flares having an infrared energy compo-
nent large in comparison to the aircraft infrared
output so that the infrared guidance system will
track to the flare instead of the aircraft. The system
consists of one flare programming control panel,
one junction box, and 12 identical stepping switches
with their companion flare ejector cases. Equip-
ment locations are shown in figures 1-36. The AN/
ALE-20 flare ejector system provides a means of se-
lecting the number of flares to be fired, timing the
interval between bursts, and igniting and firing the
flares from the aircraft. The flare ejector system
utilizes 12 AN/ALA-17 flare sets with 16 flares per
set, and a maximum of 192 single flares per air-
craft. The flares may be programmed to fire in
bursts of one, two, or three flares at intervals of 2 to
20 seconds, between bursts. The flares may also be
salvoed at a rate of one flare every 65 milliseconds
by depressing the fast train switch. All flares may
be ejected from the aircraft in less than 20 seconds.
A C9510/ALE MA EXPEN control panel (master ex-
pendables control) provides the operator with an
external control to set the burst interval time of the
flares from 2 to 20 seconds in 1-second increments.
The AN/ALQ-153(V)1 countermeasures set may fire
flares as a counter to aircraft and missiles ap-
proaching the tail of the B-52 provided the flare
system is on and AUTO is selected on the flare con-
trol panel.
A switch on the pilot side panel, a landing gear
squat switch, a door-actuated safety interlock
switch, a safety switch in each flare case, and a re-
set power switch are provided to prevent firing of
the flares while the aircraft is on the ground.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Flare Programming Control Panel
The primary function of the control panel is to pro-
vide the ejector with dispense pulses at the desired
rate and interval. It controls the selection of the
number of flares to be ejected in each burst, the
number of bursts per program, the timing of the
interval between bursts, and the ignition and ejec-
tion of the flares from the aircraft. The control
panel contains a program pulse generator, program
pulse interval control circuits, pulse counting cir-
cuits and indicators, and lights to provide indica-
tions of the existing status of the system.
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
Stepping Switch
Twelve identical stepping switches, one mounted on
each flare ejector case (figure 1-35), are located in
the horizontal stabilizers, six on each side of the
fuselage. Each stepping switch contains a motor-
driven stepping type switch which advances one
contact each time a pulse is received from the junc-
tion box.
Flare Ejector Case
One flare ejector case (figure 1-35) is used with
each stepping switch. the flare ejector case provides
a case to hold the flare set and the stepping switch
electrical connector which conducts the firing pulse
to each flare. In addition, a safety switch is
installed in each flare case. in the event a flare set
is installed in the case, the switch inhibits ground
testing of the system.
Master Expendables Panel (C9510/ALE)
The master expendables panel located at the EW
officer’s station provides control for setting the
burst interval and initiating flare ejecting programs
in addition to the same capabilities on the flare pro-
gramming control panel. See figure 1-34 for location
of the controls on the master expendables control
panel.
Pilot’s Flare Ejector Set Power Switch
This switch is an added safety device located on the
pilot side panel (figure 1-38) and allows the pilot to
control application of power to the system.
System Safety Interlocks
The system safety interlocks consist of a door-actu-
ated microswitch located on the bottom of the fuse-
lage aft of the section 47 entry door and the squat
switch relay located in the left relay panel in the
forward wheel well. These two switches are in
series with the flare ejector power relay solenoid in
section 47 dc power box. The relay is actuated by dc
bus voltage applied through the flare ejector set
power switch on the pilot side panel and the power
switch on the flare programming control panel.
When the aircraft is in flight, the door-actuated
microswitch and the squat switch are normally
closed and power can be applied to the system. On
the ground, the squat switch relay is deenergized
and, for further safety, the door that actuates the
microswitch is opened. For ground testing, this
power is available through the ground test switch
and through closed contacts of all safety switches in
the flare ejector cases indicating that all flare sets
Change 1 1-113
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
have been removed. The reset power switch located
on the junction box mount must be held in the ON
position to provide power to reset the stepping
switches.
GROUND TEST SWITCH
A ground test switch located on the left side of the
forward wheel well is used by ground maintenance
personnel to route dc power around the landing
gear safety switch. The switch is spring-loaded in
the OFF position.
Stepping Switch and Flare Ejector Case
Figure 1-35
1-114
SAFETY INTERLOCK SWITCH
A door-actuated safety switch located on the under-
side of the fuselage just forward of the horizontal
stabilizer is used to interrupt dc power to the flare
ejectors.
Power Distribution.
DC operating power is applied to the flare program-
ming control panel through the pilot flare ejector
set power switch. AC power is applied directly to
the flare programming control panel.
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALE-20 Component Locations

Figure 1-36

Change 9 1-115
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALE-20 Controls and Indicators

ALE-20 FLARE PROGRAMMING CONTROL PANEL

1 BURST REMAINING RESET CONTROL 8 RELEASE BUTTON

2 BURST REMAINING INDICATOR 9 POWER SWITCH
3 FAST TRAIN BUTTON 10 PROGRAM IN PROGRESS LIGHT
4 BURST COUNTER 11 INTERVAL SELECTOR THUMB WHEEL
5 BURST SELECTOR THUMB WHEEL 12 INTERVAL INDICATOR
6 RIGHT HAND BANK EMPTY LIGHT 13 TRANSFER SWITCH
7 AUTOMATIC RELEASE SWITCH 14 FLARES PER BURST SWITCH

Figure 1-37 (Sheet 1 of 3)

1-116 Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

1 Burst Remaining Reset Control A knurled knob used to reset the burst remaining indicate to any desired
number. Its purpose is to set in the number of flares loaded before flight.

2 BURSTS REMAINING Indicator Indicates the total number of bursts (total number of flares divided by
flares per bursts switch setting) remaining on board the aircraft. The indi-
cator subtractively counts the bursts. The indicator will not count bursts
dispensed by the fast train button.

3 FAST TRAIN Button
A pushbutton switch used to initiate continuous dispensing. The fast train
button energizes the fast train relay forming a holding circuit, interrupting
any program already initiated, illuminate the program in progress light,
and start the fast train pulse generator which produces a dispense pulse
to the ejectors every 65 milliseconds. With this button depressed, all
flares will be ejected in less than 40 seconds. The fast-train relay will
remain energized until the power switch is moved to OFF position
momentarily.

4 Burst Counter Indicates the number of bursts selected for a program. When a program
has been initiated, the burst counter will count the pulse bursts and sub-
tractively indicate the number of bursts remaining in the program. After
a program has been completed, the counter will automatically reset to the
previously selected number of bursts.

5 Burst Selector Thumbwheel A knurled wheel used to select the desired number of bursts per program.

6 Right Hand Bank Empty Light An amber or red indicator light indicates, when illuminated, that the last
flare in the right hand bank has been ejected. The light will remain illumi-
nated until the power switch is moved to OFF position momentarily.

7 Automatic Release Switch The AUTO-OFF switch must be in AUTO position if automatic activation
of flare dispensing by the ALQ-153 is desired.

8 RELEASE Button A pushbutton switch used to initiate a flare dispense program. The
release button routes dc power to energize the release relay which will
remain energized until the burst relay is opened by the burst limit
switches.

9 POWER Switch Used to control application of ac and dc power to the system. In POWER
position, ac power is connected to the program pulse generator motor
and dc to the various control circuits.

10 PROGRAM IN PROGRESS Light An amber or red indicator light indicates, when illuminated, that the pro-
gram in progress relay is energized and a dispense program should be
in progress or the light will also illuminate when the fast train relay is ener-
gized.

Figure 1-37 (Sheet 2 of 3)

Change 10 1-117
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALE-20 Controls and Indicators (Cont)

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

11 INTERVAL SELECTOR Thumbwheel A knurled wheel used to select the desired interval in seconds between
programmed bursts.

12 Interval Indicator Indicates the interval in seconds of programmed bursts. Interval range is
2 to 20 seconds.

13 TRANSFER Switch In TRANSFER position, the transfer relay in the junction box is energized
and all dispense pulses will be routed to the right bank of flares only. In
OFF position, the dispense pulses will be routed to the left bank, then to
the right bank through the normal transfer sequence. The switch must be
in OFF position before flares can be dispensed from the left bank with
either programmed or fast train dispensing.

14 Flares Per Burst Switch Determines number of flares to be dispensed per burst. Located on the
back side of the flare programming control unit. Will be preset by mainte-
nance personnel.

Figure 1-37 (Sheet 3 of 3)

1-118
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Pilot’s ALE-20 Flare Ejector Panel

CONTROL-
NO. INDICATOR FUNCTION

Flare Ejector Set Power Switch
Used to provide the pilot a means of assuring that flares will not be ejected
during critical periods of flight. The switch must be in ON position to pro-
vide dc operating power. Three position ON–OFF–ON switch is used.
The switch locks in the center or OFF position and must be pulled out
before it can be moved up to ON position. The lower ON position is dis-
connected and serves no function.

Figure 1-38

1-119
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
NORMAL OPERATION (ALE-20)
NOTE
Prior to any normal dispensing or emer-
gency jettisoning of flares, the EW officer
will notify all crewmembers of his intended
action. During flare dispensing,
crewmembers can expect a bright white
flash visible within the crew compartment
accompanied by a slight vibration of the air-
craft. These flashes will be most noticeable
at night, in the vicinity of cloud formations,
or during IFR flight conditions; however,
the flashes are discernible even during day-
time VFR flight conditions.
1. To initiate a flare ejection program, momen-
tarily depress the release button; the program–
progress light will illuminate and the flare(s) will
be ejected immediately as evidenced by the burst
counter decreasing one increment and the burst
remaining indicator decreasing one increment.
Bursts will continue to be ejected at the interval
selected by the interval selector until the burst
counter counts down to 1. At this time, the pro-
gram-in-progress light will go out and the burst
counter will automatically reset to original setting.
Additional programmed flare ejection can be
repeated by again depressing the release button.
Flare programs can be repeated at will until all
flares are expended as evidenced by illumination of
1-120 Change 1
the RH empty light. In the event a program is in
progress and power to the system is momentarily
interrupted (such as power switch moved to OFF
and then back to ON), the program-in-progress
light will go out and ejection of flares will termi-
nate. The system should resume operation from the
point in the program where power was lost; how-
ever, the program must be reinitiated by again
depressing the release button.
Removing power from the system while a
program is in progress could result in the
clutch coil cam being stuck in the detent
position, making program mode inopera-
tive.
NOTE
To terminate a flare program in progress
rotate the burst selector thumbwheel
upward until the program in progress light
goes out. The program will have stopped
and the bursts per program may be reset.
2. If a programmed number of bursts is not
desired, the system can be operated manually with
the burst selector set on 1 position. Using this
method, continuous burst releases can be obtained
by holding the release switch depressed.
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Normal Procedures section II

NOTE

• This section contains text and an amplified checklist. The text is divid-
ed into primary paragraphs which form the phases of a normal flight.
Most of these paragraphs are followed by an amplified checklist for the
particular phase of the flight. The amplified checklist is presented in
a chronological form that will enable the flightcrew to complete their
inspection, checks, and operation of the aircraft in an expedient yet
thorough manner. The amplified checklist describes in detail the steps
to be completed. Each major part has been assigned to be read by one
of crewmembers, and to be accomplished by others in the crew. Howev-
er, there are exceptions as some of the checklists will be read and com-
pleted silently. To show which crewmember will accomplish certain
steps, the normal crew coding will be used and the code letters will
appear after the response to each step. The terms ‘‘as required,’’ ‘‘as
desired,’’ ‘‘climatic,’’ and ‘‘cross-checked’’ as used in the checklist indi-
cate equipment operation or settings which may vary according to pre-
vailing conditions. In practice, the response to these items will be the
required switch or control position or actual indicator reading. The am-
plified checklist has also been designed to accommodate the production
of the abbreviated checklist to be used during aircraft operation.

• Some system control switches are provided with a guard. In practice,

when guarded switches are actuated, the desired toggle position will
be ascertained and then the guard positioned.

table of contents page

PREPARATION FOR FLIGHT 2-3

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES 2-5

BEFORE EXTERIOR INSPECTION – SAFETY CHECK 2-5
EXTERIOR INSPECTION 2-7
INTERIOR INSPECTION 2-8

PRETAKEOFF PROCEDURES 2-21

STARTING ENGINES 2-21
TAXIING AND BEFORE LINEUP CHECKLIST (COPILOT/EW READS) 2-22

Change 9 2-1
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

table of contents page

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES 2-23

AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB 2-23
EW CALIBRATION AND INTERFERENCE 2-25
EW EQUIPMENT SET 2-37

PRELANDING OPERATIONAL CHECK 2-41

AIR REFUELING PROCEDURES 2-42

RENDEZVOUS 2-42

CONTACT 2-43
POST AIR REFUELING 2-43

POSTFLIGHT PROCEDURES 2-44

AFTER LANDING 2-44
POSTFLIGHT 2-46

NUCLEAR ALERT PROCEDURES 2-47

2-2

PREPARATION FOR FLIGHT
ENTRANCE
One main entrance door provides normal crew
access into the aircraft. The door is located on the
lower centerline of the fuselage ahead of the for-
ward landing gear wheel well. A flush-type handle
is pulled out to unlatch the door. An entrance light
switch is located directly forward of the door at the
head of the ladder. The entrance light operates on
direct battery power.
CHECKLISTS
The flight manual checklists have been designed so
that they may be used for training missions with or
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
without a bomb, for alert posture, and for SIOP
missions which are launched from other than a
ground alert posture. Ground alert checklist imple-
mentation and instructions are contained in
ALERT PROCEDURES, this section.
NOTE
When no bombs or missiles are loaded,
safety wires and seals are not required on
the associated monitor control and release
system controls.
2-3
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ECM Equipment Operation Requirements

SYSTEM RESTRICTIONS EQUIPMENT COOLING

Restrictions to operation of any system will be governed by
existing regulations and/or directives.
RADIATION RESTRICTIONS
• When ECM transmitters are operating, radiation
hazardous to human life exists up to a 20-foot ra-
dius of the antennas. During periods of ground ra-
diation, ground crew will be notified of the above
restrictions.
• Ground operation of ECM or radar transmitters is
prohibited when the B-52 is within 200 feet of (1)
weapons which are not fully assembled, (2) weap-
ons to which continuity testers are connected, or
(3) weapons with open access doors.
• Do not operate the AN/ALQ-153(V) system on the
ground with chaff or flares loaded on the aircraft.
Critical cooling requirements of ECM equipment demand
precautions during ground and inflight operations. Ground
cooling must be supplied to the applicable ram air inlet or
aircraft compartment when extended ground operation of
ECM equipment is required. During inflight operations or
ground operations with ground cooling connected, any re-
moved ECM equipment that was located within a cooling
shroud must be replaced with a dummy box or equivalent.
Failure to do so will result in the loss of cooling air; there-
fore, operation of any equipment within that shroud is pro-
hibited. Ground operation of ECM systems without cooling
air is authorized provided the time and temperature limita-
tions listed in the following table are observed. The RWR
and SI have no time or temperature limitations.
• Due to probable equipment damage, operation of
ECM equipment without complying with proper
cooling, time and/or temperature limitations is pro-
hibited.

• The ALQ-153(V) and ALQ-172 systems will not be

operated on the ground unless ground cooling
equipment is used. Time, temperature, and cooling
requirements of T.O. 1B-52H-2-20 must be com-
Do not operate the AN/ALQ-155 system using for- plied with.
ward directional antennas for more than 5 minutes
on the ground since damage to radome can result.
A cooling period of 30 minutes must be observed
before this operation may be resumed.

MAXIMUM GROUND TIME AND TEMPERATURE

LIMITATIONS WITHOUT GROUND COOLING

GROUP SYSTEMS TIME OAT TEMP

A 1, 3, 5, 7, & 20 10 min 60°F 1

B 2, 4, 6, 8, & 21 10 min 60°F 1

C 9, 11 & 13 10 min 60°F 1

D 12 & 14 10 min 60°F 1

E ALQ-153 & ALQ-172 NOT ALLOWED

ALR-20A NO TIME LIMIT NO TEMPERATURE LIMIT
RWR NO TIME LIMIT NO TEMPERATURE LIMIT
SI NO TIME LIMIT NO TEMPERATURE LIMIT

Provided no more than one system per group is transmitting, a system may be operated in transmit for the
time and outside air temperature (OAT) depicted. After transmitting, ECM equipment must cool for at least
30 minutes before transmission can be resumed.
1 ECM systems may be operated AT OAT’S above 60°F provided requirements of T.O. 1B-52H-2-20 are met.

Figure 2-1

2-4 Change 10
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES

BEFORE EXTERIOR INSPECTION – SAFETY CHECK

Wearing the chemical defense aircrew ensemble, including plastic boots

and overcape, can cause a buildup of static electricity. For this reason,
aircrews will ground themselves on the aircraft grounding cable prior
to entering the aircraft when the aircrew ensemble is worn.

1. Form 781 – Checked

Check Form 781 for pertinent equipment writeups and chaff and flare loadings not specifically cov-
ered in the pilot’s review of the form. Ensure correct software versions of reprogrammable EC sys-
tems are loaded for your specific mission. Confirm with groundcrew that any missing component
receiving ram air cooling has been replaced by a dummy box to block ram air outlet. If any ECM
equipment that receives air from a common cooling duct is removed and not replaced with a dummy
box, none of the other equipment that receives cooling from that cooling duct can be operated since
cooling air will be lost through the open hole and adequate cooling will not be available for the
remaining equipment. If this is applicable, refer to AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS, Section V of T.O.
1B-52H-1.

2. EW Officer’s Station:

a. Arming Levers – Stowed, No. 1 safety pins installed and locked

If the arming lever(s) has been rotated on a stowed armrest, raising the
armrest will fire the arming initiator. If the arming lever(s) has been
rotated or the arming lever(s) safety pin is not installed, call mainte-
nance immediately and stay clear of the seat.

b. Ground Emergency Egress Handle – Stowed, No. 6 safety pin installed

If the ground emergency egress handle has been rotated or the No. 6
safety pin is not installed, call maintenance immediately and stay clear
of the seat.

c. ECM Equipment, Chaff & Flare Power Switches – OFF

NOTE

ALQ-122, ALQ-153, and ALQ-172 system status cannot be determined

until power is available to the system(s). Less DT An internal
self-protection circuit will ensure the ALQ-172 will remain off until the
POWER switch is activated, following the application of external power
to the aircraft. The ALQ-122 and the ALQ-153 must be checked after
external power is applied to aircraft to ensure the systems are off.

Change 12 2-5
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

d. Chaff, Flare & Rocket Circuit Breakers – Out

During this inspection, the EW officer will ensure that all systems are
completely deactivated to prevent inadvertent jamming or dispensing
of expendables with the application of ground power.

e. WARNING RCVR AC Circuit Breaker – Out

The WARNING RCVR AC circuit breaker on the ECM circuit breaker panel will be pulled to
assure deactivation of the warning receiver.

f. Less DT SYS 15 & SYS 16 IND CONT Circuit Breaker – Out

The SYS 15 AND 16 IND CONT circuit breaker will be pulled to assure deactivation of the
ALQ-172 system.

f. DT ALQ-172(V) CDU Circuit Breaker – Out

g. SI Control & Display Circuit Breakers – Out

3. Gunner’s Station:

a. Ejection Seat Arming Levers – Stowed, No. 1 safety pins installed and locked.

If the arming lever(s) has been rotated on a stowed armrest raising the
armrest will fire the arming initiator. If the arming lever(s) has been
rotated or the arming lever(s) safety pin is not installed, call mainte-
nance immediately and stay clear of the seat.

b. Ground Emergency Egress Handle – Stowed, No. 6 safety pin installed

If the ground emergency egress handle has been rotated or the No. 6
safety pin is not installed, call maintenance immediately and stay clear
of the seat.

c. Hot Cup – OFF

d. RWR Intensity Control – Minimum

2-6 Change 12
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

EXTERIOR INSPECTION

1. Forward/Center Exterior Antennas – Checked

Check protruding ECM antenna and antenna covers mounted on the fuselage for condition, security,
and cleanliness. The ALQ-155 antennas should not be painted.

The bomb door actuator struts will be disconnected before entering the
bomb bay if power is applied to the aircraft.

2. ALE-20 Ground Test Switch – OFF

Check that the ALE-20 ground test switch (in forward wheel well) has not been inadvertently left
propped in the ON position. (Switch is spring-loaded to OFF position.)

On aircraft carrying the AGM-86 missile, flight control surfaces may

inadvertently deploy without warning. Remain clear of missile flight
control deployment areas after safety restraints have been removed.

3. Left ALE-24 Wing Chaff Dispenser Ports – Checked

Visually check that exposed chaff packages conform with mission requirements. Ensure that no chaff
packages are engaged by the rollers.

4. Left Aft Exterior Antennas – Checked

Check protruding antennas and antenna covers mounted on fuselage for condition, security, and
cleanliness.

5. Left ALE-20 Flare Ejectors – Checked

Visually check that ejector covers are secure (if flares are not loaded) or that openings are unob-
structed (if flares are loaded).

6. Tail-Mounted Antennas – Checked

Check protruding ECM antennas and antenna covers mounted on the fuselage for condition, security,
and cleanliness. The ALQ-155 antennas and radar absorber panels should not be painted.

7. Right ALE-20 Flare Ejectors – Checked

Visually check that ejector covers are secure (if flares are not loaded) or that openings are unob-
structed (if flares are loaded).

Change 8 2-7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

8. ALE-20 Safety Interlock Switch Door – Check open, remove streamer, and close

Check that the ALE-20 flare ejector safety interlock switch door is open, then remove streamer and
close the door. If the door is found closed, check with maintenance personnel on the status of the
ALE-20 equipment. When the aircraft is on ground alert in a cocked configuration, the streamer will
be removed and the door closed.

9. Right Aft Exterior Antennas – Checked

Check protruding antennas and antenna covers mounted on fuselage for condition, security, and
cleanliness.

10. Right ALE-24 Wing Chaff Dispenser Ports – Checked

Visually check that exposed chaff packages conform with mission requirements. Ensure that no chaff
packages are engaged by the rollers.

INTERIOR INSPECTION

1. Equipment – Stowed

Ensure that no equipment is stowed on or near heating ducts, outlets,

electrical wiring, or electronic equipment.

2. Ejection Seat:

a. Hatch Link – Checked

Check link connecting escape hatch to catapult safety pin-pull initiator.

b. Maintenance Safety Pins No. 2, 3 & 5 – Checked removed

Ensure that no streamer has been torn from a maintenance safety pin,
thus inadvertently leaving the pin installed. If a maintenance safety
pin is installed, the status of the seat will be ascertained prior to re-
moval of the pin.

c. Catapult Initiator Safety Pin-Pull Cylinder – Pin in place

Catapult initiator safety pin should extend through the catapult initiator. If the pin is pulled
out, the initiator may have been fired; call maintenance immediately.

d. Manual Catapult Pin-Pull Lever – Checked

Lever latched, pin-pull cylinder secured.

2-8
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

e. Initiator Tube Runs – Checked connected
Check tubes for condition, and for proper and secure connections.
f. Inertia Reel – Checked
Check inertia reel lock for proper functioning.
g. Shoulder Strap Attachment Fittings – Connected
3. Man-Seat Separator – Checked
Ensure that the nylon man-seat separator straps are placed on the bare seat. Survival kit is then
placed over man-seat separator straps. Ensure the Jack Shaft Cotter Pin is installed and the retain-
ing rod has no lateral movement.

Absence of the Jack Shaft Cotter Pin will result in lateral movement of
the man seat separator retaining rod, resulting in failure of the man
seat separator after ejection.
4. Parachute Preflight:
e. Inspection Record:
(1) Inspection & Repack Date – Checked
(2) Automatic Release Time & Altitude Setting – Checked
f. Personal Locator Beacon Lanyard – Snapped/Unsnapped (as required)
For peacetime operations, the personal locator beacon lanyard must be configured for automatic op-
eration. When mission requirements dictate the necessity to avoid detection and automatic actua-
tion of the beacon is not desired, the lanyard must be configured for nonautomatic (manual) opera-
tion.
g. Bailout Oxygen Bottle Pressure & Hose Connector – Checked
h. Parachute Arming Lanyard Anchor – Installed

Be certain that the parachute arming lanyard anchor is securely fas-

tened in the attachment fitting on the seat. Failure to attach the lan-
yard anchor to the seat will necessitate manual operation after ejec-
tion.
i. Parachute Straps – Adjusted (as required)
j. UWARS – Checked
Check security of fittings.
NOTE
UWARS BIT is a maintenance function. Do not perform UWARS BIT
since excessive BIT checks will degrade battery life.
5. Global Survival Kit:3.
a. Kit Installed & Plunger Depressed – Checked
b. Kit Release Handle – Checked down

Change 14 2-9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

c. Mode Selector Lever – AUTO

d. Kit Straps to Parachute – Checked and attached

Check that the attachment fittings are properly connected to the kit, the attachment straps
threaded through the safety belt, and the quick-disconnect fittings are properly attached to the
parachute (with release buttons on outside). Grasp each survival kit strap and perform a quick
jerk to ensure a positive link between the D-Ring and the survival kit straps.

Care will be taken to ensure that the survival kit attachment straps
are properly threaded through the safety belt.

6. Safety Belt Release Fittings – Connected

7. Circuit Breakers – Set

Check all circuit breakers set to IN position on the ECM circuit breaker panel except those for the
chaff dispenser, flare ejector, rocket pods, RWR warning receiver, and the ALQ-172 (Less DT SYS
15 & 16 IND CONT or DT CDU). Chaff dispenser and flare ejector circuit breakers will be left OUT
until ready to dispense chaff or flares and OUT after activity is completed. The Less DT ALQ-172
SYS 15 & 16 IND CONT, DT ALQ-172(V) CDU, and RWR WARNING RCVR circuit breakers will
be left OUT until required IN by the AFTER TAKEOFF – CLIMB checklist.

8. Air Outlet Knobs:4.

a. Upper – As desired

b. Lower – As desired

NOTE

These knob settings are approximate settings only. After the cabin tem-
perature has stabilized, knob adjustment may then be varied slightly
for crew comfort.

9. Interphone – Monitor

The EW officer will monitor the interphone at the station he is occupying.

10. PIHM Assembly – Connect (as required)5.

a. Blower – Attached and secure

Attach the blower to the blower mounting bracket. Ensure that the blower is fastened securely
in the mounting bracket.

Failure to configure the AERP System properly may result in injury or

death to aircrew member while operating in a contaminated environment.

2-10 Change 12
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

NOTE

• When seated, the crew member should configure the AERP System
with the blower hose connected to ventilation inlet, aircraft oxygen
hose connected to the chemical-biological canister and the crossover
valve in the vertical position.

• When not seated, the crew member should configure the AERP System
with aircraft oxygen hose disconnected, the blower hose connected to
the chemical-biological canister, and the crossover valve in the horizon-
tal position.

b. Blower Electrical Connector – Connected

Remove the dust cover from the blower electrical receptacle and connect the blower into the
electrical receptacle.

c. Oxygen Regulator – Set

While holding breath, position the supply lever to ON and the emergency oxygen toggle lever
to EMERGENCY.

Hold breath until steps d. and e. are complete. This will preclude the
inhaling of toxic chemicals during the changeover from blower air to
the aircraft oxygen system.

d. Blower Hose – Disconnect

Disconnect the blower hose from the quick disconnect (QD) pigtail adapter.

e. Aircraft Oxygen – Connected

Connect the aircraft oxygen hose to the quick disconnect (QD). Resume breathing.

If signs of hypoxia occur at high attitudes, ensure the oxygen system

quick disconnect (QD) fittings are properly connected and descend to a
safe altitude as required.

f. Blower Hose – Connected

Connect the blower hose to the ventilation inlet hose on the PIHM manifold.

Crewmembers using upward ejection seats will ensure that blower hose
is under seat armrest before hooking it up to the PIHM manifold.

g. Crossover Valve – Vertical

Rotate the valve to the vertical position and check that oxygen from the aircraft system is flowing
into the mask and that filtered ambient air from the blower is flowing through the defog tubes.

2-11
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

h. Oxygen Regulator Emergency Toggle Lever – NORMAL

i. Intercom Unit – Disconnect and stow

j. PIHM Communication Cord – Connect

Connect the PIHM communication cord to the aircraft communication cord.

k. PIHM Manifold – Connect

Connect the manifold to the CRU-60/P bracket located on the parachute harness.

l. Emergency Oxygen Hose – Connect

Connect the emergency oxygen hose to the fitting on the manifold.

11. Oxygen System – Checked6.

a. Regulator Diluter Lever – 100% OXYGEN

b. Shutoff Lever – OFF

c. Mask & Hose – Check disconnect, then reconnect mask and hose

Ensure that oxygen supply hose is under seat armrest before hookup
with oxygen mask hose.

d. Diluter Valve – Checked

Attempt to draw air through the oxygen mask. Ability to draw air indicates a defective diluter
valve, oxygen hose, and/or connections or mask.

e. Regulator Diluter Lever – NORMAL

Place the diluter valve to NORMAL position and draw air through the mask; if unable, this
indicates that only 100% oxygen is available.

When the oxygen supply shutoff lever is positioned OFF, on the

CRU-73/A, the regulator diluter lever should automatically move to
100% OXYGEN position or it may only move halfway between the
NORMAL and 100% OXYGEN positions. When the supply shutoff lever
is positioned OFF, do not force regulator diluter lever to NORMAL as
this will break the diluter lever.

2-12 Change 4
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

NOTE

• If the diluter valve is stuck in the 100% position, this will prohibit the
detection of smoke or fumes when use of normal oxygen is required.
• If the CRU-73A regulator is installed, the crewmember will not be able
to draw air through the system with the shutoff lever OFF. The diluter
lever may be moved to NORMAL with the shutoff lever OFF on some
CRU-73A regulators. The diluter valve will be in the 100% oxygen posi-
tion when the shutoff lever is OFF on all CRU-73A regulators.

f. Shutoff Lever – ON

g. Pressure – Checked
Pressure gage reads approximately 300 psi.

h. Emergency Toggle Lever – TEST MASK

With mask disconnected at one side of helmet, the flow indicator should indicate continuous flow.

i. Mask – Test
Attach mask to helmet and hold breath; indicator should indicate no flow.

NOTE

Flow condition may be indicated by a slight leak around the face form.
If light hand pressure against the mask does not stop the flow, the
mask is unacceptable.

j. Emergency Toggle Lever – NORMAL

k. Regulator Diluter Lever – NORMAL/100% (as required)

12. Portable Oxygen Bottle – Serviced and stowed

Pressure should read approximately 300 psi and altitude selector knob positioned to NORM.

Oxygen will rapidly accelerate any ignition source, such as a spark,

into a flash fire. Dirt, grease, and hand lotion all can act as a fuel to
the fire. Therefore, when recharging a portable oxygen bottle, crew-
members will wear Nomex flight gloves and the helmet with visor
down. These gloves should be free of oil and grease.

13. Lights – Checked7.

a. ALQ-122 Power Switch – OFF

Check all panel lights off.

b. ALQ-153(V) Control-Indicator Panel – Checked

Check all panel lights off.

c. ALQ-172 Waveguide Low Pressure Light – Press-to-test

Change 9 2-13
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

14. ECM Equipment Controls Preset:8.

a. DT ALQ-172 Auxiliary Panel Switches:

(1) FWD System Power Switch – FWD

(2) AFT System Power Switch – AFT

(3) CDU Altitude Override Switch – CDU ALT

b. ALQ-172 Blanking Switch – HIGH

c. SI Control Panel Dimming & Audio Controls – Minimum

Rotate intensity and audio control knobs fully ccw.

NOTE

SI audio is obtained thru the SI mixer switch at the EW, gunner, or DI

station.

d. SI Power Switch – ON

e. MFD – Adjusted

Rotate the brightness and contrast knobs fully counterclockwise (ccw). Adjust the brightness
knob clockwise (cw) until MFD illumination is visible, then rotate it ccw until MFD illumination
just disappears. Adjust contrast knob until optimum presentation is obtained.

f. MFD Presentation – Checked

If, after adjusting brightness and contrast, the MFD has no presentation call maintenance.

g. SI Control Panel Dimming & Audio Control – Minimum

Rotate intensity and audio control knobs full counterclockwise.

h. SI SYSTEM Power Button-Indicator – Press and release, all panel lights and MFD off

i. SI Control & Display Circuit Breakers – OUT

j. RWR Intensity & Audio Controls – Minimum

k. Flare & Chaff Counters – Checked

Check all counters for correct loading (should agree with Form 781 entry).

15. Refuel Valve Emergency Control Lever – CENTER

16. Defense Instructor’s Station Oxygen System – OFF and 100%

2-14 Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

17. IFF:

a. IFF Mode 4 Computer – Encoded

Load the cryptographic variables using an electronic fill device.

- - - - - - CYZ-10 Key Loading - - - - - -k.

For CYZ-10 key loading refer to the combat crew communications checklist.

- - - - - - KYK-13 Key Loading - - - - - -l.

(1) Mode Select Switch – OFF/CHECK

(2) Fill Cable – Connect

Remove the dust cover from the fill connector port of the KIT-1C and connect the KYK-13
to the KIT-1C using the fill cable.

NOTE

The KYK-13 may be connected directly to the KIT-1C fill port and keys
loaded without using the fill cable.

(3) Address Select Switch – Set

Set the address select switch to the position where the first key is stored.

(4) Mode Select Switch – ON

(5) Mode Select Switch – OFF/CHECK

(6) Address Select Switch – Set

Set the address select switch to the position where the second key is stored.

(7) Mode Select Switch – ON

Observe that the KIT-1C fill LED flashes once.

NOTE

If the fill LED doesn’t flash after both keys are loaded, the keys did not
load properly. Check the KYK-13 for serviceability and that correct key-
tapes have been loaded. Repeat steps (1) and (3) through (7).

(8) Mode Select Switch – OFF/CHECK

(9) Fill Cable – Disconnect

Disconnect the KYK-13 from the KIT-1C and replace the fill connector port dust cover.

Change 5 2-15
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

- - - - - - KOI-18 Key Loading - - - - - -

(1) Fill Cable – Connect

Remove the dust cover from the fill connector port of the KIT-1C and connect the KOI-18
to the KIT-1C using the fill cable.

(2) First Keytape – Load

Insert the first keytape and slowly pull it through the KOI-18.

NOTE

• Ensure the tape is correctly inserted with the guide holes in the tape
aligned with the dots on the flip-up cover of the KOI-18.

• Never pull the tape backwards through the KOI-18. Doing so could
cause damage to or distortion of the tape, causing the tape to be unus-
able.

(3) Fill Cable – Disconnect, then reconnect

NOTE

The fill cable must be disconnected then reconnected in order to suc-

cessfully load the second key.

(4) Second Keytape – Load

Insert the second keytape and slowly pull it through the KOI-18 while observing that the
fill LED flashes once.

NOTE

• Ensure the tape is correctly inserted with the guide holes in the tape
aligned with the dots on the flip-up cover of the KOI-18.

• Never pull the tape backwards through the KOI-18. Doing so could
cause damage to or distortion of the tape, causing the tape to be unus-
able.

• If the fill LED doesn’t flash after both keys are loaded, the keys did
not load properly. Check the KOI-18 for serviceability and that correct
keytapes are being used. Repeat steps (2) through (4).

(5) Fill Cable – Disconnect

Disconnect the KOI-18 from the KIT-1C and replace the fill connector port dust cover.

2-16
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

(6) Keytapes – Remove and stow

Return the keytapes to the appropriate storage location (Comm kit).

A keytape should not be left in the KOI-18 reader head for an extended
period of time. This will shorten fill battery life.

b. IFF Mode 2 – Set

Set to appropriate setting if required.

18. Bunk Oxygen System – OFF and 100%

19. Gunner’s Station Oxygen System – OFF and 100%

20. Upper Deck Fire Extinguisher – Checked and stowed

Ensure that appropriate safety device (safety wire seal or locking pin lever as applicable) is installed.
Check for fully serviced pressure.

21. Gunner’s Station Portable Oxygen Bottle – Serviced and stowed

Pressure should read approximately 300 psi and altitude selector knob positioned to NORM.

Oxygen will rapidly accelerate any ignition source, such as a spark,

into a flash fire. Dirt, grease, and hand lotion all can act as a fuel to
the fire. Therefore, when recharging a portable oxygen bottle, crew-
members will wear Nomex flight gloves and the helmet with visor
down. These gloves should be free of oil and grease.

22. Sextant Mount Port – Check closed

23. Upper Deck Sliding Hatch – Open and locked

The upper deck sliding hatch will be opened and locked prior to start-
ing engines, takeoff, air refueling, low level activity, planned unusual
maneuvers, penetration, and landings.

Change 9 2-17
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PREFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

24. Crew Report – Completed9.

a. Pilot actuates the emergency alarm switch to ABANDON, switches interphone to call position,
and announces, ‘‘Crew report.’’

b. The sequence for crew reporting is: N, G, EW, RN, CP, P, IN, DI, 10TH, IP.

c. All crewmembers will press call button and report ‘‘(crewmember’s) check complete’’ in sequence.
The check consists of abandon signal and call operation. The EW officer may report from the
DI position. On return to the seat, the interphone call button will be checked with the pilot.

25. Oxygen Regulator – OFF and 100% OXYGEN (if leaving the aircraft for an extended period of time)

All data on pages 2-19 and 2-20 (Deleted)

2-18 Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PRETAKEOFF PROCEDURES

STARTING ENGINES

Whenever contamination is suspected, 100% OXYGEN will be used

during ground operation and takeoff.

1. Interphone, UHF & V/UHF DJ Radios – Monitored

2. Stand By to Taxi – Report if not ready to taxi

3. Parachute & Safety Belt – Fastened

• Tighten the parachute-survival kit attachment straps as tightly as pos-

sible to prevent the safety belt from inflicting facial injuries during
ejection bailout.

• Ensure that the parachute arming lanyard is not entangled in the

parachute harness. Lanyard entanglement could cause failure in seat
separation and failure of the automatic features of the parachute.

NOTE

• If it becomes necessary to leave the seat, the crewmember should open

the safety belt and unbuckle the parachute harness, leaving the para-
chute and survival kit in the seat. If the parachute is worn when leav-
ing the seat, upon returning to the seat, it will be necessary to take
it off in order to reinstall the parachute and safety belt in the seat.

• Steps 3 thru 5 may be accomplished during taxi.

4. Oxygen Hose & Bailout Oxygen Bottle – Connected to mask

Ensure that oxygen supply hose is under the seat armrest before hook-
up with oxygen mask hose.

5. Oxygen Regulator – As required

NOTE

For formation takeoffs, the warning receiver and SI may be turned on

and checked early IAW normal procedures in the AFTER TAKEOFF/
CLIMB and EW CALIBRATION AND INTERFERENCE checklists.
This may be done any time after switching to aircraft power. After com-
pleting the warning receiver and SI check, the systems may then be
used as an aid to monitor the position of other aircraft.

Change 10 2-21
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

PRETAKEOFF PROCEDURES (Cont)

TAXIING AND BEFORE LINEUP CHECKLIST (Copilot/EW reads)

Checklist appears in EW officer’s abbreviated checklist and will be read on request of the pilot.

2-22 Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES

AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB

1. ECM Equipment:

a. WARNING RCVR AC Circuit Breaker – In

b. Less DT SYS 15 & SYS 16 IND CONT Circuit Breaker – In

The SYS 15 AND 16 IND CONT circuit breaker will be pushed in to assure activation of the
ALQ-172 system.

b. DT ALQ-172(V) CDU Circuit Breaker – In

The ALQ-172(V) CDU circuit breaker will be pushed in to assure activation of the ALQ-172 system.

c. SI Control & Display Circuit Breakers – In

d. All ECM equipment power switches (except ALQ-122, chaff, and flare) will be turned on during
climbout after flaps up. Care should be exercised that ECM transmitters are in standby except
when they are to be used.

To prevent accidental actuation of the transmitter switches, extreme

care will be exercised when leaving or returning to the seat.

NOTE

• Temporarily place one AN/ALQ-155 transmitter to STBY 1 to check the

software revision number in the threat engage windows. Then set all
transmitters to STBY 2.

• All RWR indicator control panel lights should illuminate momentarily

and one burst of Launch Audio may be heard when system is turned
on.

• The AN/ALQ-153(V) STBY/OPER pushbutton will be placed in the op-

erate position only when authorized by Air Force and MAJCOM direc-
tives.

• When AN/ALQ-153(V) POWER pushbutton is pressed, the POWER and

TEST/MALF lights come on for duration of warmup period (minimum
of 42 to a maximum of 130 seconds). Following warmup, the POWER
and TEST/MALF lights go off and the STBY/OPER light comes on (am-
ber).

• The AN/ALQ-172 is capable of interfering with precision approach ra-

dars. On training sorties, the Less DT STANDBY/OPERATE pushbut-
tons; DT MASTER STANDBY/OPERATE pushbutton will be placed in
the OPERATE position, only when authorized by Air Force and MAJ-
COM directives.

Change 12 2-23
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

2. Oxygen Check – Completed

a. During the climb, copilot requests an oxygen check at 12,000 feet. The sequence for oxygen report
is EW officer, radar navigator, pilot/copilot. The reporting crewmember will visually check other
crewmembers for alertness. He will report oxygen check for the compartment. Oxygen panel at
each occupied crew position will be checked on all oxygen checks for:

(1) Oxygen Supply Shutoff Lever – ON

(2) Regulator Diluter Lever – As required

(3) Pressure – 300 psi

(4) Flow Indicator – Functions normally

(5) Emergency Toggle Lever – NORMAL

b. EW officer, radar navigator, and pilot/copilot report ‘‘Oxygen panels checked.’’ In addition, pilot/
copilot reports ‘‘Cabin altitude ______________________ feet.’’

c. Copilot requests oxygen check at level-off and during cruise at 1-hour intervals when cabin alti-
tude is below 12,000 feet, at 30-minute intervals when cabin altitude is 12,000 to 25,000 feet,
and at no longer than 10-minute intervals when cabin altitude is above 25,000 feet.
Crewmembers will report when complete.

3. Level-Off Station Check – Accomplished

Crewmembers will accomplish station checks at level-off, at approximately 30 minute intervals dur-
ing cruise, and prior to leaving crew position during flight. A check for systems operation and proper
switch settings for prevailing conditions will be made during each station check. Station checks will
include circuit breakers and equipment stowage.

2-24
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

EW CALIBRATION AND INTERFERENCE

The calibration of ECM equipment and interference to and from other aircraft systems will be determined
as soon as practical after takeoff. The purpose of this check is to determine whether the equipment meets
the minimum requirements for dependable operation. If this abbreviated check reveals a malfunction or
failure and conditions permit, refer to the applicable portion of T.O. 1B-52H-1-13 and T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1
Malfunction, Analysis, and Emergency Operation Section. Each transmitter will be checked for normal effi-
ciency by comparing the output with like systems, taking the antenna position into consideration. Transmit-
ters will be momentarily activated in a clear band, consistent with clearance and operating restrictions. On
training missions only, when the mission profile precludes accomplishing the entire check prior to the HHCL/
HEW, only systems and frequency bands programmed for use will be checked. Deviations from checklist
sequence to comply with local area clearances are authorized. The entire crew must be alerted for coordina-
tion during this check. UHF guard frequency must be monitored throughout the check.

NOTE

• Receivers and appropriate transmitters may be checked during climb

commensurate with clearance and crew coordination.

• ALQ-155 transmitters will be placed in STBY 2 mode no more than 30

minutes prior to ECM activity and placed in STBY 1/warmup mode
after completion of ECM activity unless scheduled for activity within
30 minutes.

• Items that are circled will be repeated for each receiver band trace and
like transmitter.

1. Mixer Switches – As required

2. ALR-20A Less DS :

a. Sweep Width Controls (7) – Full CW

b. RF Level Controls (7) – Checked, adjust for optimum signal presentation

Check for a change in signal amplitude by varying each RF level control, then set to optimum
level.

NOTE

Use RF test if no signals are available.

c. Scale Illumination – Optimum

d. Scope Presentation – Checked

Check for presence of known signals and interference.

e. RF Test Button – Pressed, signals checked

f. Expansion Trace Selectors A & B – Checked

Set expansion A selector on the desired trace. Monitor expansion trace A for display of this trace.
RF test may be used. Repeat procedures for expansion trace B.

Change 5 2-25
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

g. Right & Left Mark Controls – Checked

Vary the mark control. Mark should move across both expansion traces. Repeat procedure for
left mark control.

h. Sweep Width Control – Checked, then full CCW

Rotate the sweep width control CCW from the full CW position to select a segment approximately
1/4 of the trace. Vary the manual frequency control and the segment should move across the
trace. Continue rotation of the sweep width control to the full CCW position (in detent).

i. Manual Frequency Control – Adjust to signal frequency

NOTE

Use RF test if no signals are present.

j. Volume Control – Adjusted

k. Sweep Width Control – Full CW

2. ALR-20A DS :

a. Sweep Width Controls (7) – Full CW

b. RF Level Controls (7) – Checked, adjust for optimum signal presentation

Check for a change in signal amplitude by varying each RF level control, then set to optimum
level.

NOTE

Use RF test if no signals are available.

c. Master Illumination – Optimum

d. Edge Illumination – Optimum

e. Scale Illumination – Optimum

f. Scope Presentation – Checked

Check for presence of known signals and interference.

g. Persistence – Checked and set

Check control of persistence levels P0 through P4 and set for optimum viewing of transmitter
operation and calibration.

h. RF Test Button – Pressed, signals checked

2-26 Change 5
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

i Expansion Trace Selectors A & B – Checked

Set expansion A selector on the desired trace. Monitor expansion trace A for display of this trace.
RF test may be used. Repeat procedures for expansion trace B.

j. Right & Left Mark Controls – Checked

Vary the mark control. Mark should move across both expansion traces. Repeat procedure for
left mark control.

k. Sweep Width Control – Checked, then full CCW

Rotate the sweep width control CCW from the full CW position to select a segment approximately
1/4 of the trace. Vary the manual frequency control and the segment should move across the
trace. Continue rotation of the sweep width control to the full CCW position (in detent).

l. Manual Frequency Control – Adjust to signal frequency

NOTE

Use RF test if no signals are present.

m. Volume Control – Adjusted

n. Sweep Width Control – Full CW

o. BIT Select Switch – BIT 1

BIT Status checked.

p. BIT Select Switch – OFF

3. RWR:

a. Warning Receiver Mixer Switch – Set

b. Audio & Intensity Controls – Optimum

Adjust intensity control clockwise until an optimum display of symbols is obtained on the RWR.
It may be necessary to activate the test function for symbol presentation.

c. Self-Test – Accomplished

Any panel light that does not illuminate should be pressed to verify it comes on. Verify correct
software version is loaded as annotated in Form 781.

d. CRT Indicator – Check for interference

NOTE

If interference is received, have radar navigator place the OAS radar in

STANDBY, as necessary, to isolate interference source.

Change 7 2-26A/(2-26B blank)

BLA
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

4. ALQ-153(V):

a. ALQ-153 Mixer Switch – Set

b. LAMPS PUSH TO TEST Control – Pressed, brightness adjusted

All control indicator lights should come on and may be adjusted to desired brightness by rotating
the control knob. Range indicator reads 8.8.

c. TONE PUSH TO TEST Control – Pressed, volume adjusted

Missile warning tone should be audible (EW and G) for approximately 3 seconds. Adjust volume
as desired by rotating the control knob.

d. TTI ENAB/INHBT Pushbutton – INHBT

e. MIN RNG ENAB/INHBT – ENAB, set to fourth setting

f. TEST/MALF Pushbutton – Pressed, self-test accomplished

(1) TEST, MIN RNG ENAB, and 0-3 lights – ON
Lights remain on for duration of the test (approximately 15 seconds). Initial reading in the
range indicator should be approximately equal to the groundspeed readout (within 5%) of
the OAS ground speed.
(2) JAM Light – On
It should remain on for approximately 4 seconds.
(3) LMSL & RMSL Lights – On
After approximately 8 1/2 seconds these lights come on, the range indicator reads 1.0 and
a 3 second tone burst sounds.
(4) Range Indicator – Decreases in steps to 0.5
The CM TRIG light should come on at the time specified and remains on until 0.5.
(5) 0-3, LMSL, RMSL & TEST Lights – Off, system to STBY
After 15 seconds, these lights should go out and the range indicator is blank. STBY light
is on and the system is ready for normal operation.

g. STBY/OPER Pushbutton – OPER (if applicable)

Check receivers for presentation and interference. The MALF light will illuminate momentarily
while transitioning from standby to operate or operate to standby. Although the automatic BIT
occurs every 1.5 seconds, it may take from 15 to 70 seconds before a BIT failure is displayed
on the C/I.

NOTE

Before going back into the OPER mode after the test, the system
should remain in STBY for approximately 3 seconds, otherwise a bit er-
ror will occur.

h. STBY/OPER Pushbutton – STBY

Change 12 2-27
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

5. ALT-16A:

a. Channel Selector Buttons – Pressed as desired

b. Power Selector – TRANSMIT

c. Signal Presentation, Calibration & Interference – Checked

d. Look-Thru Panel Controls – Checked

Check for proper operation of the Look-Thru buttons applicable to each transmitter.

e. Power Selector – STANDBY

6. ALQ-122 Power Switch – ON

NOTE

ALT-16A transmitters will not operate in the normal barrage mode

with the ALQ-122 system power turned on.

7. ALT-32:

a. Spot A & B Bandwidth Controls – CCW to minimum

b. Spot A & B Frequency Controls – Set to clear frequencies

c. Transmit Channel Selector – A

d. Signal Presentation, Calibration & Interference – Checked

e. Spot A Bandwidth Control – Checked and CCW

f. Transmit Channel Selector – B

g. Signal Presentation, Calibration & Interference – Checked

h. Spot B Bandwidth Control – Checked and CCW

i. Transmit Channel Selector – A & B

Check that both A & B signals are present.

j. Transmit Channel Selector – BARRAGE 1, 2, 3, and 4

k. Signal Presentation, Calibration & Interference – Checked

l. Look-Thru Panel Controls – Checked

Check for operation of the Look-Thru Buttons applicable to each transmitter.

m. Transmit Channel Selector – STBY1.2.3.4.5.6.7.

2-28 Change 12
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)a.b.c.d.e.

8. ALQ-155 D/E Band:

a. Program Selector – BARR

b. Manual Rate Control – Full CW

c. RF Bandwidth Control – FM OFF

d. Center Frequency Control – Set to clear frequency

e. JOG/RES Switch – Pressed

Pressing the switch will ensure no ERR malfunction exists within the system.

f. Mode Selector – MAN

g. Signal Presentation, Calibration & Interference – Checked

h. RF Bandwidth Control – Checked and FM OFF

Increasing RF bandwidth may cause the center frequency knob to

move. Do not use excessive force or damage to the geartrain will occur.
Instead, rotate the center frequency knob to allow free movement of the
RF bandwidth knob.

i. DES Switch – Pressed, signal checked

Check for clear band around system search width. The LOK light should not illuminate and the
center frequency control should operate normally.

j. ALR-20A Expansion Trace Selector – Set to required trace

k. ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Set

Select approximately 1/4 of main trace. Position selected segment around transmitter signal.

l. Programmer – Checked

NOTE

Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1, ALQ-155 Normal Operation/ECIC, steps 1

through 3 for steps (1) through (3) below.

(1) Program Selector – 6

(2) RF Bandwidth – Set as required

Check visually for modulation.

(3) RF Bandwidth – Set as required

(4) Program Selector – MAN, check for coincidence and modulation

(5) ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Full CCW

Tune to transmitter signal.

Change 12 2-29
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

(6) Manual Rate Control – Checked and full CW

Check for audible increase/decrease in pulse rate.

(7) Program Selector – A2

Check audible change in pulse rate.

(8) Program Selector – A1

Check audible change in pulse rate.

m. Program Selector – BARR

n. ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Full CW

NOTE

Steps p and q must be accomplished within 30 seconds after initiating

step o.

o. Mode Selector – BIT, check for signal presence

Switch is spring-loaded to the AUTO position. If test is successful, all lights except FAU will come
on. If self-test is not successful, the ERR light will come on and the THREAT ENGAGED indica-
tor will display a character relating to the specific malfunction.

p. DES Switch – Pressed, signal checked

Signal frequency and bandwidth should increase.

q. JOG/RES Switch – Pressed, signal checked

Signal should disappear.

r. Mode Selector – Warmup mode

9. ALQ-155 E/F Band:

a. Program Selector – BARR

b. Manual Rate Control – Full CW

c. RF Bandwidth Control – FM OFF

d. Center Frequency Control – Set to clear frequency

e. JOG/RES Switch – Pressed

Pressing the switch will ensure no ERR malfunction exists within the system.

f. Mode Selector – MAN

g. Signal Presentation, Calibration, & Interference – Checked

2-30 Change 12
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

h. RF Bandwidth Control – Checked and FM OFF

Increasing RF bandwidth may cause the center frequency knob to

move. Do not use excessive force or damage to the geartrain will occur.
Instead, rotate the center frequency knob to allow free movement of the
RF bandwidth knob.

i. DES Switch – Pressed, signal checked; set signal to expected threat frequency

Check for clear band around system search width. The LOK light should not illuminate and the
center frequency control should operate normally. Set to an expected threat frequency for the
coincidence check.

j. ALR-20A Expansion Trace Selector – Set to required trace

k. ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Set

Select approximately 1/4 of main trace. Position selected segment around transmitter signal.

l. (Deleted)

m. Programmer – Checked

NOTE

Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1, ALQ-155 Normal Operation/ECIC, steps 1

through 3 for steps (1) through (3) below.

(1) Program Selector – 6

(2) RF Bandwidth – Set as required

Check visually for modulation.

(3) RF Bandwidth – Set as required

(4) Program Selector – MAN, check for coincidence and modulation

(5) ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Full CCW

Tune to transmitter signal.

(6) Manual Rate Control – Checked and full CW

Check for audible increase/decrease of pulse rate.

(7) Program Selector – 2

Check for audible change in pulse rate.

Change 10 2-31
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

(8) Program Selector – A2

Check for audible change in pulse rate.

(9) Program Selector – A1

Check for audible change in pulse rate.

n. Slave Function (Systems 5 & 8) – Checked

(1) Program Selector – Slave

(2) Master Program Selector – 2

Check visually for modulation.

o. Program Selector(s) – BARR

p. ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Full CW

NOTE

Steps r and s must be accomplished within 30 seconds after initiating

step q.

q. Mode Selector – BIT, check for signal presence

Switch is spring-loaded to the AUTO position. If test is successful, all lights except FAU will come
on. If self-test is not successful, the ERR light will come on and the THREAT ENGAGED indica-
tor will display a character relating to the specific malfunction.

r. DES Switch – Pressed, signal checked

Signal frequency and bandwidth should increase.

s. JOG/RES Switch – Pressed, signal checked

Signal should disappear.

t. Mode Selector – Warmup mode

10. ALQ-155 G/H/I Band:

a. Antenna Selector – FWD (Systems 1 and 2)

b. Program Selector – BARR

c. Manual Rate Control – Full CW

d. RF Bandwidth Control – FM OFF

e. Center Frequency Control – Set to clear frequency

f. JOG/RES Switch – Pressed

Pressing the switch will ensure no ERR malfunction exists within the system.

2-32 Change 10
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)11.a.b.c.d.e.f.

g. Mode Switch:

(1) ALQ-172 FWD Waveguide Light (System 1 and 2) - Checked OFF

(2) Mode Selector Switch - MAN

h. Signal Presentation, Calibration & Interference – Checked

NOTE

When the ALQ-155 systems 1 and/or 2 transmitters are transmitting

with the forward looking antenna selected, and the ALQ-172 FWD PD
is in OPER, system 1 and/or 2 will be blanked at a low duty cycle at
ALQ-155 frequencies above approximately 1.73 GHz below the maxi-
mum dial indication. This blanking also occurs with the ALQ-155 sys-
tem 1 and/or 2 omni-directional antenna selected, and either the
ALQ-172 FWD PD or AFT PD in OPER.

i. RF Bandwidth Control – Checked and FM OFF

Increasing RF bandwidth may cause the center frequency knob to

move. Do not use excessive force or damage to the geartrain will occur.
Instead, rotate the center frequency knob to allow free movement of the
RF bandwidth knob.

j. DES SWITCH – Pressed, signal checked; set signal to expected threat frequency

Check for clear band around system search width. The LOK light should not illuminate and the
center frequency control should operate normally. Set to an expected threat frequency for the
coincidence check.

k. ALR-20A Expansion Trace Selector – Set to required trace

l. ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Set

Select approximately 1/4 of main trace. Position selected segment around transmitter signal.

m. Program Selector – MAN, check for coincidence and modulation

Adjustments of manual rate control and RF level may be necessary to properly display coinci-
dence of back and peak power levels. Check visually for modulation.

n. Programmer – Checked (G band)

(1) Programmer Selector – 2

Check visually for modulation.

(2) Program Selector (Systems 4 & 6) – Slave

(3) Master Program Selector – 2

Check visually for modulation.

Change 5 2-33
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

n. Programmer – Checked (H/I band)

(1) ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Full CCW

Tune to transmitter signal.

(2) Manual Rate Control – Checked and Full CW

Check for audible increase/decrease of pulse rate.

(3) ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Set

Select approximately 1/4 of main trace. Position selected segment around transmitter signal.

NOTE

Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1, ALQ-155 Normal Operation/ECIC – H/I

for steps (4) thru (7).

(4) Program Selector – 6

(5) RF Bandwidth – Set as required

Check visually for modulation.

(6) RF Bandwidth – Set as required

(7) Program Selector – 4

Check visually for modulation.

o. Program Selector(s) – BARR

p. ALR-20A Sweep Width Control – Full CW

q. Antenna Selector – Checked (Systems 1 & 2)

(1) OMNI – Pressed

(2) Signal Presentation and Interference – Checked

r. Omni Antenna Monitor Switch – Pressed, signal presentation checked

NOTE

Steps t and u must be accomplished within 30 seconds after initiating

step s.

s. Mode Selector – BIT, check for signal presence

Switch is spring-loaded to the AUTO position. If test is successful, all lights except FAU will come
on. If self-test is not successful, the ERR light will come on and the THREAT ENGAGED indica-
tor will display a character relating to the specific malfunction.

2-34
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

t. DES Switch – Pressed, signal checked

Signal frequency and bandwidth should increase.

u. JOG/RES Switch – Pressed, signal checked

Signal should disappear.

v. Mode Selector – Warmup mode

11. ALQ-122:1.

a. Lamp Test – Accomplished

b. Mode Switch – XMIT

c. ALT-16A Power Selectors – TRANSMIT

d. Test-in-Progress Switch – Pressed, self-test accomplished

e. ALT-16A Power Selectors – STANDBY

f. Mode Switch – STBY

12. DT ALQ-172:2.

a. ALQ-172 Waveguide Low Pressure Warning Lights – Press to test, ensure off

b. MASTER STANDBY/OPERATE Indicator – Press, indicator displays OPER

c. CDU Status Page – Select

d. CDU Go Indicator – Press, fixed lights and indicators checked

e. FWD & AFT STANDBY/OPERATE Indicators – Press, until all systems are in operate

f. CDU TEST Switch – Press

Press to accomplish self-test. Verify the correct software versions are loaded for the ALQ-172
FWD, AFT, CDU, and HI/LO Symbol files. Verify LRU status.

g. FWD & AFT STANDBY/OPERATE Indicators – Press, until all systems are in standby

h. MASTER STANDBY/OPERATE Indicator – Press, indicator displays STBY

Change 12 2-35
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

12. Less DT ALQ-172:3.

a. Lamp Test Pushbutton – Pressed, indicators checked

Press to test ALQ-172 indicator control panel, monitor and waveguide low pressure indicator
lights.

b. Self-Test Selector – Pressed, self-test accomplished

Check for receiver interference during self-test cycle. Verify correct software version is loaded
for the ALQ-172 as annotated in AFTO Form 781.

NOTE

The ALQ-172 blanking switch will be in the high position to ensure a

valid self-test.

13. SI System: 4.

a. System Power – Check on

Check operational data and status appears on the SI MFD.

b. SI Mixer Switch – Set

c. Audio Controls – Optimum

d. System Test – Accomplished

Press and release SYS TEST button. Ensure missile launch tone is audible and verify initiated
BIT display. Set audio control to mid range. Press and release SYS TEST button again to return
to the operational data and status presentation.

e. BIT Status – Verified, note software version

Press and release BIT STATUS button and verify operational BIT status on the SI MFD. Note
software versions of respective sensors for optimum operational employment. Press and release
BIT STATUS button again to return to the operational data and status display.

2-36 Change 12
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

EW EQUIPMENT SET

Operational ECM equipment will be preset for use as soon as practical after completing the EQUIPMENT
CALIBRATION AND INTERFERENCE CHECK. Additionally, applicable portions of this checklist may be
used throughout penetration and withdrawal to verify equipment readiness and settings. On training mis-
sions, applicable portions of this checklist will be used prior to and after all ECM activity. (Successive runs
against a single site do not require reaccomplishment of this checklist.) Transmitters will not be reactivated.
Antenna locations, intelligence data, and the results of the calibration and interference check will be consid-
ered when presetting equipment.

NOTE

• ALQ-155 transmitters will be placed in STBY 2 mode no more than 30

minutes prior to ECM activity and placed in WARMUP mode after
completion of ECM activity unless scheduled for activity within 30 min-
utes.

• Items that are circled will be repeated for each receiver band trace and
like transmitter.

1. Mixer Switches – As required

2. ALR-20A:

a. Controls – Optimum

b. Expansion Traces – Set

Adjust the expansion traces to monitor a threat frequency band.

c. Persistence – Optimum DS

3. RWR:

a. Audio Control – Optimum

b. Dimming Control – Optimum

c. Mode Button – As required

d. Altitude Button – As required

e. Unknown Button – As required

f. Threat File – As required

Change 7 2-37
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

4. ALQ-122:

a. Program Switch – As required

b. Cover Switch – As required

c. Mode Switch – As required

d. ALT-16A Power Selector – As required

NOTE

For proper operation of the ALQ-122, both ALT-16A transmitters will

be in radiate and should be placed in standby when operation is no
longer required to conserve TWT life.

5. ALT-16A:

a. Channel Buttons – Pressed as required

6. ALT-32:

a. Frequency & Bandwidth Controls – As required

7. ALQ-155:

a. Transmitter Mode – As required

b. Ctr Freq & RF Bandwidth Controls – As required

Increasing RF bandwidth may cause the center frequency knob to

move. Do not use excessive force or damage to the geartrain will occur.
Instead, rotate the center frequency knob to allow free movement of the
RF bandwidth knob.

c. Program Selector – As required

d. Manual Rate Control – As required

e. G/H Antenna Selector – As required

8. ALE-24:

a. Power Switch – OFF

b. Programmer Selector Switches – As required

c. Dispense Switches – OFF

2-38
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

d. Circuit Breaker – In or as directed

NOTE

All chaff circuit breakers available to the EW officer will be pulled at

all times except when accomplishing this checklist in preparation for
actual dispensing of chaff. The proper positioning of circuit breakers
will then be governed by existing directives.

e. Power Switch – ON or as directed

f. Press-to-Test Lights – Tested

g. Auto Mode Switch – As required

9. ALE-20:

a. Power Switch – OFF

b. Flare Program – As required

c. Transfer Switch – Checked OFF

d. Pilot’s Flare Set Power Switch – ON or as directed

NOTE

The pilot’s ALE-20 flare set power switch will be in the OFF position
and flare circuit breakers pulled at all times except when accomplish-
ing this checklist in preparation for actual dispensing of flares or to dry
fire the system. (This check is only necessary for initial accomplish-
ment of this checklist unless flares are actually programmed to be dis-
pensed.) The proper positioning of appropriate ALE-20 switches during
preparation for actual dispensing will then be governed by existing di-
rectives.

e. Circuit Breakers – In or as directed

f. Power Switch – ON or as directed

Removing power from the system while a program is in progress can

result in the clutch coil cam being stuck in the detent position making
program mode inoperative.

g. Press-to-Test Lights – Tested

h. Auto Mode Switch – As required

i. Crew Notified – Accomplished

NOTE

Prior to any normal dispensing or emergency jettisoning of flares, the

EW officer will notify all crewmembers of his intended action.

2-39
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

10. DT ALQ-172:10.

a. Altitude – As required

b. FWD & AFT Systems Standby/Operate – As required

c. File Select – As required

NOTE

The ALQ-172 blanking switch will be in HIGH position at all times ex-
cept when excessive OAS interference is experienced.

10. Less DT ALQ-172:

d. Mode Selector – As required

e. Standby/Operate Function Selector – As required

f. Secure Switch – As required

NOTE

The ALQ-172 blanking switch will be in HIGH position at all times ex-
cept when excessive OAS interference is experienced.

11. ALQ-153(V):

a. TTI Control – As required

b. MIN RNG Control – As required

c. TTI & MIN RNG ENAB/INHBT Pushbutton – As required

d. HI/LO ALT Pushbutton – As required

e. STBY/OPER Pushbutton – As required

12. Master Expendables Control Panel:

a. Flare Burst Interval Selector – Set

b. Flare Interval Selector – As required

13. SI System Control Panel

a. Audio Control – Optimum

b. Dimming Control – Optimum

c. ALQ-155 MODE Button-Indicator – As required

d. Unknown Button – As required

2-40 Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

INFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

PRELANDING OPERATIONAL CHECK

1. Periscopic Sextant – Stowed, port closed

2. Special Weapons Manual Lock Handle – Stowed, door closed

3. Prelanding Operational Check – Completed

All ECM equipment not used for ECM runs during the sortie or checked during the EW CALIBRA-
TION AND INTERFERENCE CHECK will be checked for operation prior to landing in accordance
with procedures for the condensed check as outlined in the EW CALIBRATION AND INTERFER-
ENCE checklist, consistent with clearance requirements and operating restrictions. Discrepancies
will be entered in the appropriate forms.
4. ECM Equipment:
a. ALQ-155 – WARMUP
b. ALQ-122 and ALT-16/32A – STANDBY
c. Chaff & Flare Power Switches – OFF
d. Chaff, Flare, and Rocket Circuit Breakers – Out
e. RWR Intensity Control – Minimum
f. RWR Power Button – Pressed, POWER light out
g. WARNING RCVR AC Circuit Breaker – Out
h. ALQ-153 Power Pushbutton – Pressed, all panel lights off
i. ALR-20A Power Switch – OFF
j. DT ALQ-172 CDU Power Pushbutton – Pressed, Go Indicator (FWD, AFT, CDU) OFF
k. DT ALQ-172 Auxiliary Panel System Forward Power Pushbutton/Indicator – FWD OFF
l. DT ALQ-172 Auxiliary Panel System AFT Power Pushbutton/Indicator – AFT OFF
m. DT ALQ-172(V) CDU Circuit Breaker – Out
The ALQ-172(V) CDU circuit breaker will be pulled to assure deactivation of the ALQ-172 system.
n. Less DT ALQ-172 Power Pushbutton – Pressed, all panel lights off
o. Less DT SYS 15 & 16 IND CONT Circuit Breaker – Out
The SYS 15 & 16 IND CONT circuit breaker will be pulled to assure deactivation of the ALQ-172
system.
p. SI Control Panel Intensity & Audio Controls – Minimum
q. SI SYSTEM POWER Button-Indicator – Press and release, all panel lights off
r. SI Control & Display Circuit Breakers – Out

If one or more generators are off the line, all electronic warfare equip-
ment not required for defense of the aircraft will be turned off prior to
descent for landing.

5. Safety Belt & Parachute Harness – Fastened

Change 12 2-41
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AIR REFUELING PROCEDURES

RENDEZVOUS

During air refueling, a possibility exists that fuel may enter the verti-
cal fin air scoop and form a combustible mixture in the aft equipment
compartments. Placing the ALT-16A, ALT-32A and ALQ-122 in
STANDBY, and ALQ-155s in WARMUP, 15 minutes prior to initial con-
tact until 15 minutes after termination of final contact will allow equip-
ment to cool prior to refueling and ensure dissipation of combustible
mixtures after refueling. This procedure is applicable to all refueling
contacts. Both forward and aft transmitters will be placed in STAND-
BY to preclude the inadvertent turning on of the aft transmitters.

NOTE

• Normally, the rendezvous checklist will be started at least 30 minutes

prior to the planned rendezvous control time.

• The EW officer should use all available ECM receivers to monitor the
position of the tanker throughout rendezvous. This is especially critical
during an overrun condition when the tanker is aft of the four – eight
o’clock position.

1. ALT-16A, ALT-32A & ALQ-122 – STANDBY

Not later than 15 minutes prior to the first contact.

2. ALQ-172 FWD & AFT Systems – Standby

3. ALQ-155s – WARMUP

Not later than 15 minutes prior to the first contact.

4. ALQ-153 – OFF

Not later than 15 minutes prior to the first contact.

Due to the high operating temperature of the ALQ-153 in the standby

mode, the ALQ-153 will be turned OFF 15 minutes prior to initial con-
tact until 15 minutes after termination of final contact. This will allow
the equipment to cool prior to refueling and ensure dissipation of com-
bustible mixtures after refueling. This procedure is applicable to all
contacts.

5. Periscopic Sextant – Stowed, port closed

2-42 Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AIR REFUELING PROCEDURES (Cont)

6. Upper Deck Sliding Hatch – Open and locked

• Upper deck sliding hatch will be open and locked prior to air refueling.

• If the control cabin is not pressurized, all unnecessary electrical equip-

ment should be turned off.

CONTACT

1. Fuel & Hydraulic Lines – Check for leaks

Check visually from seat for evidence of fuel or hydraulic leaks. Report only if leaks occur.

Do not transmit on the HF radio when in contact with or when in close

proximity to the KC-10 air refueling boom. Transmitting on the HF
radio under these conditions may cause uncommanded movement of
the KC-10 air refueling boom, endangering the tanker or receiver air-
craft and crews.

POST AIR REFUELING

1. ALT-16A, ALT-32A & ALQ-122 – STANDBY

Allow ECM transmitters and ALQ-122 to remain in standby not less than 15 minutes after termina-
tion of final contact.

2. ALQ-172 FWD & AFT Systems – Standby

3. ALQ-155s – WARMUP

Allow ALQ-155 transmitters to remain in WARMUP not less than 15 minutes after termination of
final contact.

4. ALQ-153 – OFF

The ALQ-153 will remain off not less than 15 minutes after termination of final contact. After 15
minutes the ALQ-153 should be placed to the STANDBY mode.

Change 9 2-43
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

POSTFLIGHT PROCEDURES

AFTER LANDING

NOTE

The AFTER LANDING checklist will be performed in the event the

mission is ground aborted after preflight has been initiated and after
all alert exercises.

1. Arming Lever Safety Pins (No. 1) – Installed

2. Armrests – Stowed

3. ECM Power Switches – OFF

Aircraft electrical power must be maintained for 5 minutes after turn-

ing off ECM equipment to allow cooling systems to cycle-out thus pre-
venting damage to the systems.

NOTE

• If channel buttons on ALT-16A control-indicators are pressed and

power selector switch is in TRANSMIT, power can be radiated if
ALQ-122 system is turned off before ALT-16A system is turned off.

• Check all ECM power switches OFF and recheck all chaff and flare
power switches OFF prior to leaving position to prevent inadvertent
jamming or jettisoning of ECM expendables with the application of
ground power.

• If taxi-back landings are accomplished, the ECM equipment will be

turned OFF on the first landing.

4. Ejection Seat – Down and forward

5. PIHM Assembly – Disconnect (as required)

a. PIHM Manifold – Disconnect

Disconnect the manifold from the CRU-60/P bracket located on the parachute harness.

b. Emergency Oxygen Hose – Disconnect

Disconnect the emergency oxygen hose from the fitting on the manifold.

2-44 Change 1
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

POSTFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

c. Aircraft Oxygen Hose – Disconnect

While holding breath, disconnect the aircraft oxygen hose from the QD pigtail adapter.

Hold breath until steps d. and e. are complete. This will preclude the
inhaling of toxic chemicals during the changeover from blower air to
the aircraft oxygen system.

d. Blower Hose:

Disconnect blower hose from the ventilation inlet hose on the PIHM manifold, remove from
under right armrest and connect the QD on chemical-biological canister.

e. Crossover Valve – Horizontal

Rotate the valve to the horizontal position. Resume breathing.

f. Oxygen Regulator – OFF and 100% OXYGEN

g. PIHM Communication Cord – Disconnect

Disconnect PIHM communication cord from the aircraft communication cord.

h. Intercom Unit – Connect

Connect the intercom unit to the PIHM communication cord.

i. Blower Electrical Connector – Disconnect

Disconnect the blower from the blower electrical receptacle and replace the receptacle dust cover.

j. Blower – Remove

Remove the blower from the aircraft mounting bracket.

6. Oxygen Regulator – OFF and 100% OXYGEN

7. Gunner Station:

a. Regulator – OFF and 100% OXYGEN

b. Supply Hose & Interphone Cord – Stowed

8. Bunk Station:

a. Oxygen Regulator – OFF and 100% OXYGEN

b. Supply Hose and Interphone Cord – Stowed

9. DI Station:

a. Regulator – OFF and 100% OXYGEN

b. Supply Hose & Interphone Cord – Stowed

Change 9 2-45
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

POSTFLIGHT PROCEDURES (Cont)

POSTFLIGHT

1. ALE-20 Safety Interlock Switch Door – Open, streamer installed

The EW officer will ensure that the ALE-20 flare ejector safety interlock switch door is open and
the streamer is installed.

NOTE

Aircraft accepted for alert status will have the streamer removed and
the ALE-20 safety interlock switch door closed.

2. Required Forms – Completed

3. Crew Debriefing – Completed

Forms, logs, and classified material turned in as briefed.

2-46 Change 9

ALERT PROCEDURES (SIOP)
The normal checklists in this section are designed
to permit use during alert. The additional check-
lists in this section are used in situations peculiar
only to the alert cycle. Any time bombs/missiles are
aboard, the normal two-man policy will be ob-
served. After maintenance has declared an aircraft
ready for alert and the bombs/missiles have been
loaded, the aircrew will conduct an initial accep-
tance check. When the aircrew declares the aircraft
ready for alert and the aircraft is on the alert line,
it will be placed in a ‘‘cocked’’ configuration. The
daily alert preflight will be accomplished once each
24 hours, normally at a predesignated time.
A fully loaded CSRL mated to an aircraft does not
provide the crew the ability to accomplish a com-
plete weapons preflight. Timers, baro settings, and
other required preflight items are not readily acces-
sible to the aircrew. As a result the following proce-
dures will be used. The munitions maintenance
load team will load the weapons loaded CSRL and
complete all required checks up to and including
the post load check. During the post load check, the
wing air weapons officer (must be certified), the al-
ternate wing air weapons officer or a designated
representative (must be certified by the air weap-
ons officer) will be called to the aircraft. These indi-
viduals will perform a weapons preflight, examine
the general condition of the bomb bay, preflight the
CSRL, its associated equipment and will verify the
quantity of weapons and the launcher number. Af-
ter completing checks and preflight, the individual
accomplishing the required checks will make the
following entry into the AFTO Form 781: A com-
plete weapons preflight has been accomplished.
Weapons status and settings have been verified.
Upon arriving at the aircraft, the aircraft com-
mander will check the AFTO Form 781 to ensure
the required entry is in the forms. The aircrew will
conduct a check of the general condition of the
bomb bay, preflight the CSRL and validate the
launcher number, then validate the correct number
and types of weapons. During engine runs, the ra-
dar navigator will monitor the status of the weap-
ons through Format 7. The command post will be
notified that the aircraft is ready to be ‘‘cocked’’ on
alert.
During crew changeover, the radar navigator’s and
navigator’s BEFORE EXTERIOR (POWER OFF)
checklist will be accomplished by the new crew. The
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
AGM-86B EXTERIOR INSPECTION/AGM-129 EX-
TERIOR INSPECTION/EXTERIOR INSPECTION
(BOMB BAY INTERIOR) checklists (as applicable)
may be deferred until after an alert force exercise
when engines are started.
INSTRUCTIONS
Thermal Curtains
During initial acceptance for an alert aircraft or
prior to deploying to assume satellite alert, the pi-
lots will ensure that all thermal curtains at trans-
parent openings in the cockpit are installed,
checked for proper fit, and positioned as required.
Curtains for cockpit windows No. 6L&R, and the pi-
lot/copilot escape hatches will remain closed while
the aircraft is on alert. Curtains for cockpit win-
dows No. 1, 2L&R, 3L&R, 4L&R and 5L&R will be
returned to the open/stowed position. The pilot/copi-
lot flash divider curtains will be positioned on top of
the instrument panel cover with the lower tapes
fastened. For information regarding inspection ac-
ceptance criteria, see THERMAL CURTAINS, Sec-
tion I.
Thermal curtains will be kept free from
grease, oil, and mold as any discoloration
will seriously impair the value of the cur-
tains. Oil or grease base material will ignite
upon exposure to thermal radiation. Use ex-
treme care when handling the curtains dur-
ing installation. Dirty or cracked curtains
will be replaced.
All thermal and flash divider curtains will be
placed in the open/stowed position or appropriate
storage containers when deploying to and from the
satellite alert base. When assuming initial satellite
alert, thermal/flash divider curtains need not be re-
checked; however, they will be positioned in accor-
dance with the initial alert acceptance procedures.
When assuming alert duty, the pilot and copilot will
check that the flash blindness goggle case seal is
not broken and the cases positioned where they are
readily available. Monocular eyeshields for remain-
ing crewmembers will be positioned where they are
readily available.
Change 1 2-47
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
Security
Entrance to the designated ‘‘No Lone Zone’’ of a
‘‘cocked’’ configured aircraft will be in accordance
with command directives.
Maintenance While On Alert
At any time while the aircraft is cocked, if a re-
quirement exists to refuel (except wing tanks), the
aircrew will uncock the aircraft using the UN-
COCKING checklist. Normal servicing require-
ments for oxygen, hydraulics, or pneumatics, which
do not require access to the cockpit, may be accom-
plished on a cocked aircraft. Maintenance may be
performed without uncocking provided force timing
is not degraded, power is not placed on the aircraft,
access to the cockpit or bomb bay area is not re-
quired, and no electrical component is involved.
When the aircraft is uncocked for maintenance/re-
fueling and the maintenance/refueling is complete,
the aircraft will be recocked by the alert crew using
the EXTERIOR INSPECTION checklist as applica-
ble, INTERIOR INSPECTION checklist, and BE-
FORE STARTING ENGINES checklist. If other
than the alert flightcrew personnel have had access
to the bomb bay and/or missiles during the required
maintenance, the navigator’s BEFORE EXTERIOR
INSPECTION and the bomb preflight and/or mis-
sile preflight inspections must also be completed.
2-48
NOTE
If the aircraft has been towed for tire rota-
tion, etc, ensure that the ground locks and
bypass keys are removed upon completion
of the towing operation.
EW Officer Procedures
1. AIRCRAFT ACCEPTANCE
a. Before Exterior Inspection
b. Exterior Inspection
c. Interior Inspection
d. ECM equipment operational check, as re-
quired
e. After Landing
2. SCRAMBLE
a. Starting Engines
b. Read over interphone the TAXIING check-
list and BEFORE LINEUP checklist.
3. DAILY ALERT PREFLIGHT. There are no spe-
cific items that are to be accomplished by the EW
officer other than those called for by the copilot on
his DAILY ALERT PREFLIGHT checklist.
4. UNCOCKING. Items to be accomplished by
the EW officer are on the pilot’s UNCOCKING
checklist and will be accomplished at his direction.
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Defensive Systems Abnormal Operations

and Malfunction Analysis section III

table of contents page

DESCRIPTION 3-3

RECEIVER SYSTEMS 3-3

AN/ALR-20A ABNORMAL OPERATION 3-3

AN/ALR-20A MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-4

RADAR WARNING RECEIVER ABNORMAL OPERATION 3-7

RADAR WARNING RECEIVER MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-8

SENSOR INTEGRATION ABNORMAL OPERATION 3-11

SENSOR INTEGRATION BIT ADVISORY MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS 3-12

TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS 3-15

AN/ALT-16A MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-15

AN/ALT-32A MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-15

RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS 3-17

Less DT AN/ALQ-172 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-17

DT AN/ALQ-172 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-20D

AN/ALQ-122 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-21

AN/ALQ-153(V) MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-22

AN/ALQ-155 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-23

EXPENDABLE COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEMS 3-25

AN/ALE-24 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-25

AN/ALE-20 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST 3-25

DEFENSIVE SYSTEMS CIRCUIT BREAKERS 3-27

Change 9 3-1/(3-2 blank)

BLA

DESCRIPTION
Abnormal procedures and malfunction analysis
checklists are presented in this section categorized
in the same order as in section I. Additional classi-
fied information for the systems is contained in T.O.
1B-52H-1-13-1.
The malfunction and analysis checklist should be
performed when the equipment is not functioning
normally. Effort should be made while still airborne
to determine the nature of the malfunction to aid
ground maintenance efforts; and in certain tactical
situations to investigate the possibility of emer-
gency inflight use of equipment. In all malfunctions
involving apparent loss of equipment power, or sig-
nal reception, accessible circuit breakers should be
checked and reset. Additionally, accessible cabling
should be checked for proper connection.
Due to the high voltages associated with
most ECM equipment, extreme care must
be used when accomplishing inflight correc-
tive action to ensure that applicable ECM
equipment is placed to OFF before remov-
ing and replacing the fuses.
Emergency operation of ECM equipment
may result in damage to the equipment.
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
Inflight corrective action for systems malfunctions
consists of the malfunction and analysis checklist
and procedures for abnormal operation of the
equipment. The malfunction and analysis checklist
should be performed for all specific systems mal-
functions. Emergency operation procedures should
be accomplished only when dictated by the tactical
situation.
RECEIVER SYSTEMS
AN/ALR-20A ABNORMAL OPERATION
The only emergency operation with the ALR-20A
would be with adjustments to the indicator. If one
or more traces jump halfway left or right of scope,
adjust the horizontal position control for the trace.
If one or more traces are positioned into or down
into the next trace, adjust the vertical position con-
trol for the trace.
Less DS Adjustments of the intensity, focus,
HP, V, AST, and width control should be
accomplished only by ground maintenance
personnel or during SIOP/contingency
operations. The use of extreme care and an
insulated screwdriver is recommended due
to the fragile potentiometers and possible
contact with high voltages.
Change 10 3-3
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALR-20A MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

The following conditions are caused by blown fuses. These conditions require checking fuses in the
power supply located behind and left of the pilot’s seat. Power supply can be reached by opening
the small panel with three spring latches. Blown fuses can be isolated by using the power indicator
and monitor switch located to the right of the indicator. The power selector must be ON when check-
ing power supply voltage readings.

NOTE

Use the appropriate type fuse. There are two types of fuses: 1) fast blow
fuses with single elements; and 2) slow blow fuses with glass envelopes
and wire wound thermistor devices resembling springs. The fuse suffix
will aid in determining the difference between a fast blow (FB) and a
slow blow (SB) fuse. A FB fuse has a suffix of “A” (eg. F02A). A SB fuse
has a suffix of “B” (eg. F02B).

1. No scale illumination and no traces.

a. Check three AC phase circuit breakers and one DC circuit breaker.

(1) Circuit Breakers Out – Reset

(2) Circuit Breakers In – Proceed to step (1.b.)

b. Check fuses F-1, F-2, and F-3.

(1) One or More Illuminated – Turn power off, replace illuminated fuse(s)

(2) None Illuminated – Proceed to step (1.c.)

NOTE

SB denotes SLOW BLOW FUSE, FB denotes FAST BLOW FUSE.

When replacing fuses turn off ALR-20A.

c. Check power supply voltage monitor meter readings.

Indication Replace Fuses

All fuses bad SB-4 (1A)

All fuses bad, except F-4, 7 SB-5 (10A)
All fuses bad, except F-4, 5, 7 SB-6 (5A)
All fuses good, except F-7 SB-7 (2A)
All fuses good, except F-12 SB-12 (2A)
All fuses good, except F-19 SB-19 (1/4A)

2. Have scale illumination, but no trace, no meter reading on F-10 only.

• Replace fuse FB-10 (2A).

3-4 Change 5
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALR-20A MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST (Cont)

3. No video or test signals on . . .

Trace No. Check and Replace

1 FB-11 (1A)
2 SB-13 (1/2A)
3 SB-14 (1/2A)
4 SB-15 (1/2A)
5 SB-16 (1/2A)
6 SB-8 (1/2A)
7 SB-9 (1/2A)

4. No video or test signal on any trace, three strobes appear on right edge of trace 3.
• Check and replace SB-18 (1/2A).
5. No test signals on any trace.
• Check and replace SB-20 (1/4A).
6. Traces 1-3-5-7 disappear completely, traces 2-4-6 shrink to about 1/2 inch on right side of scope.
• Check and replace SB-17 (1A).
7. Loss of OAS blanking occurs for ALR-20A:

• Some trace 6 strobing and marker jittering is considered normal operation. The degree of
strobing and jitter requiring maintenance will be determined by the EW officer in coordination
with the maintenance technician.

• Check the BNS blanking amplifier circuit breaker is in.

• Check and replace fuse on front of BNS blanking amplifier.

Prior to removing fuse ensure that the BNS blanking amplifier circuit
breaker located on the auxiliary BNS circuit breaker panel is pulled.
• May possibly be eliminated for one piece of ECM equipment by switching cables on the blank-
ing amplifier. Interchange of cables will depend on the tactical situation.

J2 (ALQ-172 SYS No. 15 & No. 16)

J3 (RWR)
J4 (ALR-20A)

Change 7 3-5/(3-6 blank)

BLA

RADAR WARNING RECIEVER ABNORMAL
OPERATION
Inflight corrective action for systems malfunctions
consists of the malfunction and analysis checklist
and procedures for abnormal operation of the
equipment. The malfunction and analysis checklist
should be performed for all specific systems mal-
functions. Abnormal operation procedures should
be accomplished only when dictated by the tactical
situation.
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
Abnormal operation of ECM equipment
may result in damage to the equipment.
Should loss of video display occur with the EW offi-
cer’s indicator (scope), the gunner’s indicator may
be used. The indicator may be removed by use of
the four screws on the face. Pull the indicator out
and remove the cable attached at the rear. Replace
with gunner’s indicator.
Change 7 3-7
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RADAR WARNING RECEIVER MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

Due to the high voltages associated with most ECM equipment,

extreme care must be used when accomplishing inflight corrective
action. Ensure that applicable ECM equipment is placed to OFF before
removing and replacing the fuses.

1. System power light fails to illuminate, no audio, or no CRT display when power button is depressed.
A 9 second delay occurs for the CRT display.

• Pull and reset WARNING RCVR AC on ECM circuit breaker panel.

• Change ac fuse on front panel of signal processor with spare.

2. Will not restart after momentary ac power fluctuation or loss.

• Recycle system power button manually.

3. Threshold bar flickering or missing.

• Check for presence of interference or known signals.

• Check that cable connectors are securely connected on processor front panel. This can be
checked by gently tugging on cannon plug.

Cannon plugs must not be forced on or pins will be bent causing the
system to be inoperative. Check that WARN RCVR circuit breaker is
out to prevent blowing fuse before moving connectors.

NOTE

If J1, J2, or J3 is found loose or disconnected, align cannon plug guide

marks (blue in color), hold the locking ring back, ensure pins are
aligned, and gently insert plug. After plug is inserted, push locking
ring full forward.

4. System will not self-test.

• Hold in test button for approximately 2 seconds.

• Recycle system power switch.

• Check gunner’s indicator during test, EW indicator may be defective.

3-8 Change 7
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RADAR WARNING RECEIVER MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST (Cont)

5. Test quadrant dots present, but not on third ring.

• Processor or indicator alignment fault. System lethal range, defined by dots, must be consid-
ered when evaluating threats.

6. Test quadrant dot or band symbol missing.

• Repeat test checking gunner’s indicator.

• Dot missing indicates processor failure. All threats that should appear on that half of indicator
will now appear distorted or as flat lines on axis of missing dot.

• Symbol missing indicates amplifier-detector, test oscillator, or processor failure. Repeat self-
test three times. Check for presence of known band radars in quadrant.

7. Extra test band symbols present.

• If radars are in area, no malfunction.

• No radars in area, check for interference from onboard systems.

8. Test band symbols present – no audio.

• Check audio volume adjustment.

• Check WARNING RCVR interphone mixer switch position.

• Check for normal audio after self-test. Aircraft interphone or processor failure.

9. Flashing or missing version number in test.

• Processor memory failure, no inflight repair.

10. R appears on the CRT Less DZ

• Error in the processor ram memory has been detected.

11. M appears on the CRT Less DZ

• Error in the loader software exists. This error will not affect operation of the OFP but could
adversely affect the reprogramming process.

Change 7 3-9
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RADAR WARNING RECEIVER MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST (Cont)

12. Selected indicator control (IC) button legends will not illuminate.

• Check dim knob for adjustment.

• Replace bulbs in buttons that do not light from known good buttons.

• Check for proper system operation controlled by button as function within processor may be
defective.

13. Loss of OAS blanking occurs for RWR:

• Check the BNS blanking amplifier circuit breaker is in.

• Check and replace fuse on front of BNS blanking amplifier.

Prior to removing fuse ensure that the BNS blanking amplifier circuit
breaker located on the auxiliary BNS circuit breaker panel is pulled.

• May possibly be eliminated for one piece of ECM equipment by switching cables on the blank-
ing amplifier. Interchange of cables will depend on the tactical situation.

J2 – (ALQ-172 SYS No. 15 & No. 16)

J3 – (RWR)
J4 – (ALR-20A)

3-10 Change 7

SENSOR INTEGRATION ABNORMAL OPERATION
A built-in-test (BIT) function is provided to check
any failure of the Line Replaceable Units (LRUs).
The BIT is initiated by pressing the SI control
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
panel SYS TEST and BIT button indicators. The
respective code of a failed LRU is displayed on the
SI MFD initiated BIT display or the operational
BIT status display. LRU failure codes are shown in
figure 3-1.
3-11
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Sensor Integration BIT Advisory

Malfunction Analysis
FAULT INDICATION POSSIBLE CAUSES

SI BIT Error No.

01 – 03 (U) SP defective

04 OFP incorrectly loaded: SP defective

05 UDM incorrectly loaded: SP defective

06 – 19 SP defective

30 – 42 SP defective

50 – 52 SP defective: SP-to-MFD wiring defective

60 SP defective, ALR-46-to-SP wiring defective

ALR-46 BIT Error No.

01 – 03 RWR SP defective

99 RWR SP defective: RWR-to-SP wiring defective

ALQ-155 BIT Error No.

01 – 03 SP defective

04 OFP incorrectly loaded: SP defective

05 UDM incorrectly loaded: SP defective

06 – 19 SP defective

30 – 86 Associated R/T defective: SP defective

99 SP defective

Figure 3-1 (Sheet 1 of 2)

3-12 Change 7
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

FAULT INDICATION POSSIBLE CAUSES

ALQ-172 BIT Error No. Forward and Aft

01 ALQ-172 LRU #1 defective; SP defective

02 ALQ-172 LRU #2 defective; SP defective

03 ALQ-172 LRU #3 defective; SP defective

04 ALQ-172 LRU #4 defective; SP defective

07 ALQ-172 LRU #7 defective; SP defective

8L ALQ-172 LRU #8L defective; SP defective

8R ALQ-172 LRU #8R defective; SP defective

09 ALQ-172 LRU #9 defective; SP defective

10 ALQ-172 LRU #10 defective; SP defective

12 ALQ-172 LRU # 12 defective; SP defective

99 SP defective; ALQ-172-to-SP wiring defective

0A SP defective; MIL-STD-1553 bus wiring defective

0B SP defective; MIL-STD-1553 bus wiring defective

Figure 3-1 (Sheet 2 of 2)

3-13/(3-14 blank)
BLA
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS

AN/ALT-16A MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. Fault light illuminates.

• Place power selector switch to OFF and return to original position.

AN/ALT-32A MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. Fault light illuminates.

• Place power selector switch to OFF and return to original position.

3-15/(3-16 blank)
BLA
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS

Less DT AN/ALQ-172 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. Fail indicator light illuminates.

• Depress applicable STBY/OPER pushbutton. If the fault was temporary, the system will
return to the operate mode.

2. Hot indicator light illuminates.

• Allow applicable subset to cool until Hot indicator light goes out and then depress the applica-
ble STBY/OPER pushbutton. If the Hot indicator light has not gone out within 10 minutes,
turn the system off for the remainder of the flight.

• If immediate system operation is required, depress the HOT/OVRD pushbutton. This action
places the system back into operation for 60 seconds. This action may be repeated as required
with the understanding that it may cause damage to the system.

Forcing the system into operation with an overtemperature indication

may cause damage to the system. Normally this procedure will be con-
fined to tactical situations.

3. Cold indicator light illuminates.

• Allow applicable subset to warm up until cold indicator light goes out then press the applicable
STBY/OPER pushbutton.

4. Test status light illuminates.

• Light illuminates for 5 to 10 seconds, then goes off (Soft Fault) – associated subsystem has
fault which may cause degraded operation.

• Light illuminates and remains on until system power is removed or another self-test is initi-
ated (Hard Fault) – the associated subsystem is inoperative.

Change 9 3-17
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Less DT AN/ALQ-172 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST (Cont)

5. Waveguide low pressure warning light(s) illuminated.

• Pull and reset associated pressure pump circuit breaker(s) located on the overhead A117
DECM CB panel.

• If light(s) remain on, leave the associated pressure pump circuit breaker in for the remainder
of the flight. Do not place affected ALQ-172 FWD/AFT subset(s) to operate unless use of the
system is required for a tactical situation. The unaffected system may be operated normally.

• If the forward ALQ-172 low pressure light remains on do not transmit with ALQ-155 Systems
1 and 2 unless barometric altitude is at or below 24,000 MSL (FL240), or use of the system
is required for a tactical situation.

• If the warning light(s) extinguish, the affected system may be operated normally.

• A continually lit low pressure warning light normally indicates a wave-

guide leak. The corresponding pressure pump is continually operating
and is not able to maintain waveguide pressure above the low pressure
switch setting. Allowing a waveguide pressurization pump to operate
continuously may cause damage to the pump.

• Operating ALQ-172 FWD or AFT transmitter subsystems with

unpressurized waveguides may cause damage to the transmitters. Op-
erating the ALQ-155 Systems 1 and 2 transmitter subsystems trans-
mitters with unpressurized waveguides at altitudes above 24,000 MSL
(FL240) may cause damage to the transmitters

NOTE

• ALQ-155 Systems 1 and 2 waveguides are connected and pressurized

on the same line as FWD ALQ-172 System 16.

• Moisture saturation within waveguides may result in a reduction of

effective radiated power for the associated transmitter subsystem. and
will hasten waveguide corrosion. The pressure pumps are left on with
the low pressure warning lights on to prevent water intrusion into the
waveguides.

• The warning light(s) may extinguish after descent into the low altitude
environment due to a decrease in the required pressure differential,
between the inside and outside of the waveguide. With a leaky
waveguide, the pressure pump may be able to maintain pressure at low
altitude but not at high altitudes. This condition does not necessarily
indicate that a pressurization malfunction has corrected itself. Mainte-
nance action should be taken.

3-18 Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Less DT AN/ALQ-172 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST (Cont)

6. Loss of OAS blanking occurs for ALQ-172.

• Check the BNS blanking amplifier circuit breaker in.

• Check and replace fuse on front of BNS blanking amplifier.

Prior to removing fuse, ensure that the BNS blanking amplifier circuit
breaker on the auxiliary BNS circuit breaker panel is pulled.

• May possibly be eliminated for one piece of ECM equipment by switching cables on the blank-
ing amplifier. Interchange of cables will depend on the tactical situation.

J2 (ALQ-172 System No. 15 & No. 16)

J3 (RWR)
J4 (ALR-20A)

Change 9 3-19
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-172(V) Autonomous Self-Test

Fault Indications
Less DT

FAILURE DESCRIPTION WEDGE VALUE LRU

PR FAILURES: HI MODE (NOTE A)

EAROM Failure 1 1
Bit and Comm Fail (any LRU-1 Proc.) 2 1
Receiver Chan 1 Failure 4 1
PR Receiver Chan 2 Failure 8 1
PR Receiver Chan 3 Failure 16 1
PR Receiver Chan 4 Failure 32 1
PR Receiver Overflow Failure 64 1, 2
IFM Calibration Failure 128 1, 10
Amplitude Calibration Failure 256 1, 10
PR ECM Failure 1 or 2 512 1, 2
PR ECM Failure 3 or 4 1024 1, 2
PR Overflow Jam Failure 2048 1, 2

PD FAILURES: LO MODE

EAROM Failure 1 10
PDSC Bit and Comm Fail 2 10
MRC Bit and Comm Fail 4 10
SRC Bit and Comm Fail 8 10
MRC Data Received Chan 1 Failed 16 10, 4
MRC Data Received Chan 2 Failed 32 10, 4
Short Path Calibration Path Failed 64 10, 4
Long Path Calibration Path Failed 128 10, 4
SRC Calibration Failure 256 10
Discriminator Failure 512 10
FS-1 Phase Lock Failure 1024 10
FS-2 Phase Lock Failure 2048 10

NOTE A: These failures may illuminate on the LRU-6 without a corresponding PR RX or PR TX light illumi-
nated on LRU-5 if a PD RX failure is reported.

NOTE B: If no self-test faults are detected, the LRU-6 C-11270/ALQ-172(V) control monitor will function as
normal and the LRU-5 C-11213/ALQ-172(V) control indicator TEST STATUS – FWD and/or AFT will not
flash.

Figure 3-2

3-20 Change 9

DT AN/ALQ-172 FAULTS
ALQ-172 CDU Failure
If the ALQ-172 fails, both FWD and AFT systems
default to the HIGH altitude mode. LOW altitude
mode can be selected for both systems by selecting
OVRD LO on the ALQ-172 Auxiliary Panel CDU
Altitude Override Switch.
[AMI] ALQ-172 Fault Status
ALQ-172 status is provided to the OAS via the Offen-
sive/Defensive Interface software and the 1553A data
bus. The OAS displays the ALQ-172 status and its
bus B and D communication status on FRMT-6 on the
Navigator’s and Radar Navigator’s MFDs (Refer to
the FRMT-6 display in T.O. 1B-52H-1-12).
ALQ-172 CDU Fault Display
In order to determine if there are faults in the AN/
ALQ-172 system there are many features built into
the CDU. On the Situation page, in the SYSTEM
STATUS box, the user can look under the active
threat bars. If there are numbers here displayed in
CDU Fault Display
DT
Figure 3-2A (Sheet 1 of 3)
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
red, yellow or orange, then there is a fault in the corre-
sponding LRU. The user can then switch to the Status
screen and see a pictorial diagram of the LRUs in the
systems and determine any faults based on the LRU
colors. For more information on the types of faults
that occurred, the user can switch screens by pressing
the DETAILS button followed by the button for the
system the user wants to obtain information. This
will bring up the Details screen, which indicates what
faults have occurred by displaying an X in the ap-
propriate area on the screen. The user then has the
option of switching to the number of the fault by
pressing the NUMBER/X button. This button will
change the X’s on the screen to their corresponding
numbers. If the user then wants to know specifically
what LRU or boards within the LRU may be causing
the fault, the user can press the ANALYZE button for
the currently selected system. This will bring up
another screen that will describe to the user the type
of faults that have occurred along with the most likely
cause of the problems. This list is in order of most like-
ly fault to least likely. The user can scroll down this
list if it is longer then one page using the PAGE UP
and PAGE DOWN buttons.
Change 13 3-20A
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

CDU Fault Display (Cont)

DT

NO. FAULT TYPE FAULT DESCRIPTION RESULT

1 PR Processor Global
Fault
PR PR Supervisor Processor Failed PR Subsystem inoperative.
PD maybe inoperative.
AA Environment Processor Failed PR Subsystem partially inoperative.
PR will not identify complex pulse trains.
2 PD Processor Global PD (Supervisor) Processor Failed PD Subsystem inoperative.
Fault

SRC (Swept Receiver) Processor PD Subsystem inoperative.

Failed

MRC (Mod Recovery) Processor PD Subsystem inoperative.

Failed

3 EID FAULT PR or PD EID failed software con- PR Subsystem may be inoperative.

figuration. PD Subsystem may be inoperative.

4 PR Receiver Fault No frequency report over part or PR Subsystem inoperative.

all of PR frequency range.
No/wrong amplitude report over
part or all of PR frequency range.

5 1553 Comm Fault No 1553 Communications PR Subsystem inoperative.

CDU (LRU-21) inoperative

6 LRU # Indicates which LRU is reported LRU inoperative:

failed.
LRU-1, 2 PR Subsystem
LRU-4, 10 PD Subsystem
LRU-7, 8R, 8L, 9 Antenna Subsystem
LRU-12 PD Special Technique

7 BIT Type None Indicates whether self test was autono-

mous or operator initiated.

8 EID Version Indicates mission database ver-

sion loaded into system.

9 ECM CONFIG Fault Indicates if a software configura- PR subsystem and/or PD subsystem may
tion error has been detected. be partially or completely inoperative.

Figure 3-2A (Sheet 2 of 3)

3-20B Change 9

NO. FAULT TYPE FAULT DESCRIPTION
10 Configuration & Fault Indicates if a software configura-
tion error has been detected.
Also indicates mission database
version loaded into the system.
11 PD Receiver Global No frequency report over part or
Fault all of PD frequency range.
12 PD Receiver & Trans- MRC, YIG, Long/Short indicates
mitter Channelized no receive frequency or amplitude
Fault report over part or all of PD fre-
quency range by channel.
BRF FAIL indicates that the band
reject filter(s) protecting the PR re-
ceiver are not tuning.
LRU-4 JAM – PD Transmitter
Fault
LRU-12 JAM – PD Special Trans-
mitter Fault
PD Fail – Digital Device Fault
13 PR Channelized Indicated channel will not receive,
Fault identify, track or jam a signal.
14 PR Processor Chan- Indicated channel processor will
nelized Fault not receive, identify or track a sig-
nal.
Figure 3-2A (Sheet 3 of 3)
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
RESULT
PR Subsystem may be partially or com-
pletely inoperative.
PD Subsystem may be partially or com-
pletely inoperative.
None
PD Subsystem inoperative.
PD Subsystem partially inoperative (if
only one channel failed).
PD Subsystem inoperative if both chan-
nels.
PR Subsystem may be partially inopera-
tive.
PD Subsystem partially inoperative (if
only one channel failed).
PD Subsystem inoperative if both chan-
nels.
PD Special transmitter partially inopera-
tive (if only one channel).
PD Special transmitter inoperative if both
channels.
PD Subsystem partially inoperative some
ECM techniques inoperative.
Indicated PR channel(s) inoperative.
PR subsystem inoperative if all channels.
Indicated PR channel(s) inoperative.
PR subsystem inoperative if all channels.
Change 9 3-20C
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

DT AN/ALQ-172 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. Fail indicator light illuminates.

• Depress applicable STBY/OPER pushbutton. If the fault was temporary, the system will
return to the operate mode.

2. Hot indicator light illuminates.

• Allow applicable subset to cool until Hot indicator light goes out and then depress the applica-
ble STBY/OPER pushbutton. If the Hot indicator light has not gone out within 10 minutes,
turn the system off for the remainder of the flight.

• If immediate system operation is required, depress the HOT/OVRD pushbutton. This action
places the system back into operation for 60 seconds and can be reversed by pressing the
HOT/OVRD pushbutton again. This action may be repeated as required with the understand-
ing that it may cause damage to the system. The Override operation can be terminated at
any time during the 60 seconds by pressing the HOT/OVRD pushbutton.

Forcing the system into operation with an overtemperature indication

may cause damage to the system. Normally this procedure will be con-
fined to tactical situations.

3. Cold indicator light illuminates.

• Allow applicable subset to warm up until cold indicator light goes out then press the applicable
STBY/OPER pushbutton.

4. Test status light illuminates.

• Light/LRU number illuminates in yellow – associated subsystem has fault which may cause
degraded operation.

• Light/LRU number illuminates in red until system power is removed or another self-test is
initiated – the associated subsystem is inoperative.

• Light/LRU number illuminates in orange – a software configuration fault has been detected
in the LRU-1 and/or LRU-10. The associated subsystem and/or system may be degraded or
may be inoperative.

NOTE

Placing the Master STBY/OPER switch to OPER before all subsystems

have timed in to STBY as indicated on the display will cause erroneous
fail indications.

3-20D Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

DT AN/ALQ-172 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST (Cont)

5. Waveguide low pressure warning light(s) illuminated.

• Pull and reset associated pressure pump circuit breaker(s) located on the overhead A117
DECM CB panel.

• If light(s) remain on, leave the associated pressure pump circuit breaker in for the remainder
of the flight. Do not place affected ALQ-172 FWD/AFT subset(s) to operate unless use of the
system is required for a tactical situation. The unaffected system may be operated normally.

• If the forward ALQ-172 low pressure light remains on do not transmit with ALQ-155 Systems
1 and 2 unless barometric altitude is at or below 24,000 MSL (FL240), or use of the system
is required for a tactical situation.

• If the warning light(s) extinguish, the affected system may be operated normally.

• If the light illuminates and flashes continuously a software fault has been detected. The asso-
ciated subsystem or the entire ALQ-172 system may be degraded or inoperative depending
on the configuration error detected (orange light).

• A continually lit low pressure warning light normally indicates a wave-

guide leak. The corresponding pressure pump is continually operating
and is not able to maintain waveguide pressure above the low pressure
switch setting. Allowing a waveguide pressurization pump to operate
continuously may cause damage to the pump.

• Operating ALQ-172 FWD or AFT transmitter subsystems with

unpressurized waveguides may cause damage to the transmitters. Op-
erating the ALQ-155 Systems 1 and 2 transmitter subsystems trans-
mitters with unpressurized waveguides at altitudes above 24,000 MSL
(FL240) may cause damage to the transmitters

NOTE

• ALQ-155 Systems 1 and 2 waveguides are connected and pressurized

on the same line as FWD ALQ-172 System 16.

• Moisture saturation within waveguides may result in a reduction of

effective radiated power for the associated transmitter subsystem. and
will hasten waveguide corrosion. The pressure pumps are left on with
the low pressure warning lights illuminated to prevent water intrusion
into the waveguides.

• The warning light(s) may extinguish after descent into the low altitude
environment due to a decrease in the required pressure differential,
between the inside and outside of the waveguide. With a leaky
waveguide, the pressure pump may be able to maintain pressure at low
altitude but not at high altitudes. This condition does not necessarily
indicate that a pressurization malfunction has corrected itself. Mainte-
nance action should be taken.

Change 9 3-20E
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

DT AN/ALQ-172 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST (Cont)

6. Loss of OAS blanking occurs for ALQ-172.

• Check the BNS blanking amplifier circuit breaker in.

• Check and replace fuse on front of BNS blanking amplifier.

Prior to removing fuse, ensure that the BNS blanking amplifier circuit
breaker on the auxiliary BNS circuit breaker panel is pulled.

• May possibly be eliminated for one piece of ECM equipment by switching cables on the blank-
ing amplifier. Interchange of cables will depend on the tactical situation.

J2 (ALQ-172 System No. 15 & No. 16)

J3 (RWR)
J4 (ALR-20A)

7. Failure of ALQ-172 Control Display Unit.

• If the ALQ-172 fails, both FWD and AFT systems default to the HIGH altitude mode. If HIGH
altitude mode is desired check that OVRD LO has not been selected on the ALQ-172 Auxiliary
Panel CDU Altitude Override Switch.

• If LOW altitude mode is desired select OVRD LO on the ALQ-172 Auxiliary Panel CDU Alti-
tude Override Switch.

3-20F Change 9
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-122 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. Fault light illuminates.

• Depress power switch off momentarily and then back on. The POWER switch can be depressed
for a period of approximately 2 seconds or less without reinitiating the 5 minute warmup
interval.

• If fault indicator light stays on, check AN/ALR-20A to determine whether system is radiating
power against threat(s). If no transmission is observed, turn off ALQ-122 system and use two
ALT-16As (if operative) in the normal barrage mode.

2. Malfunction indicated by BITE self-test.

Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1.

3-21
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-153(V) MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. MALF light (white) with R/T, ADSP, or DSP light(s) (white) illuminates.

• Reset system by cycling OPER/STANDBY switch.

• If the MALF and LRU lights remain on, continued operation is possible by depressing the
OVRD pushbutton. System operation may be degraded.

2. HOT/POWER light (white) illuminates.

• Depress power switch off momentarily and then back on.

• If the HOT/POWER light remains on, continued operation is possible by depressing the OVRD
pushbutton. (Exception: DSP HOT light cannot be overridden).

Forcing the system into operation (OVRD MODE) with an overtemper-

ature indication may cause damage to the system. This procedure will
be confined to tactical situations.

• Depress power switch off for a short period of time.

3. Indicator light(s) fail to come on.

• Depress LAMPS PUSH TO TEST control to determine defective lamp(s).

• If lamp is defective, normal system operation can be expected.

4. Operator initiated BIT check is satisfactory except CM TRIG light (green) does not come on.

• Reposition the appropriate MIN RNG or TTI controls.

• It may be possible to inhibit a malfunctioning MIN RNG or TTI control to permit the other
control to be utilized.

3-22
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-155 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. TUN light illuminates but transmitter does not time out.

• Press JOG/RESET. “5” in THREAT ENGAGE and TUN lights will illuminate. TUN light
should extinguish after 5 minutes. System has modified heat exchanger.

2. TUN light illuminates in transmit mode and transmission stops.

• Coolant overtemperature condition. System will cool off and recycle automatically.

3. FAU and TUN lights illuminate in transmit mode and transmission stops.

• Transmitter overload condition. Press JOG/RESET. System should resume transmission

immediately. If FAU and TUN lights again illuminate, turn set off for remainder of flight.

4. FAU light in STBY 1 or STBY 2.

• FAU light remains on after pressing JOG/RESET. Turn set off for remainder of flight.

5. FAU light illuminates in transmit mode, transmission stops.

• Press JOG/RESET. If FAU light goes off and stays off, the malfunction was a phase fault.

6. FAU light remains on in transmit mode after JOG/RESET has been pressed.

• Phase fault is permanent and is in heat exchanger. Turn set off for remainder of flight.

7. FAU light goes out after pressing JOG/RESET but comes on again after set has recycled through
STBY 1 and STBY 2.

• Phase fault is permanent and is in the transmitter. Turn set off for remainder of flight.

8. FAU light remains on when mode switch is in MAN.

• No flow condition. Turn mode switch OFF until fault goes off (approximately 30 seconds), then
turn mode switch to STBY. If FAU light comes back on, the condition is permanent. Turn set
off for remainder of flight. If FAU light stays out, resume normal use after time delay.

9. FAU light remains on in transmit mode after JOG/RESET has been pressed (center frequency is in
lower or top quarter of frequency band).

• Move center frequency away from previous setting. Press JOG/RESET. If transmission
returns, use in MAN mode only. If no transmission, turn set off for remainder of night.

10. FAU light illuminates every 5 or 6 seconds in transmit mode and transmission stops while FAU is
on.

• Recycle Mode Switch to OFF for less than 2 seconds and see if FAU light remains off. If FAU
light and transmission return, use in MAN mode in tactical situations only.
• If not transmitting, turn off set for remainder of flight.

3-23
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

AN/ALQ-155 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST (Cont)

11. FAU light blinks in any position.

• Press JOG/RESET. If transmission is present, use in MAN mode in tactical situations only.

12. Sweeping Transmitters.

• If system sweeps only 8 times (a sweep is one cycle), perform BIT test. If “3” does not appear
in Threat Engage window, system is useable. If package sweeps more than 8 times, turn set
off for remainder of flight.

13. PROCESSOR FAULT

• Recycle power switch.

• If the fault still exists, turn off all power switches, then pull and reset circuit breakers simul-
taneously.

14. ERROR LIGHTS

• Refer to T.O. 1B-52H-1-13-1.

15. BIT FAILURES – During BIT

If any of the below error codes are received, reattempt BIT. Refer to the usable modes column
for unsuccessful BIT.

Error Code Problem Usable Modes

0 Memory Failure (ROM or RAM) MAN

1 Party Line Failure MAN

2 Party Line Failure (Wrong Receiver Responded) MAN

3 PRI Filter Failure SEMI, MAN-DES, MAN

4 Automatic Frequency Control Failure MAN

5 Not Used for BIT (STBY) N/A

6 BIT Not Completed Within 30 Seconds NONE – Reaccomplish BIT

0, 1, 2, 4, 6 Reattempt BIT – If still unsuccessful, system usable only in manual mode.

3 Reattempt BIT – If still unsuccessful, all modes except AUTO are usable.

3-24
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

EXPENDABLE COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEMS

AN/ALE-24 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. Fault indicator light(s) illuminate during dispensing.

• Cycle power switch off and then back on to extinguish light(s). During subsequent dispensing,
note if same light(s) illuminate, indicating permanent malfunction.

2. All (SUD) (DOC) (SPD) fault indicator lights illuminate during programmed dispensing.

• Check counters for system affected to assure all chaff has not been dispensed.

• (SPD) If counters indicate chaff remaining, revert to “continuous” operation.

• (DOC or SUD) If lights continue to light, change from SUD to DOC or vice versa.

• Check if gunner has actuated chaff deactivate switch. If the gunner does not have the deacti-
vate switch depressed, pull the CHAFF DISP DEACTIVATE circuit breaker on the ECM cir-
cuit breaker panel. This will disable the chaff deactivate switch.

AN/ALE-20 MALFUNCTION ANALYSIS CHECKLIST

1. Firing program does not start when release button is depressed.

• Reset circuit breakers.

• Check with pilot to ensure flare ejector power switch on pilot’s auxiliary side panel is ON.

• Check fuses on flare programming control panel.

2. With an illuminated RH Empty light, the system is inoperative.

3-25/(3-26 blank)
BLA
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Defensive Systems Circuit Protection and Location

CIRCUIT
BREAKER POWER
EQUIPMENT TITLE CB PANEL SOURCE

Blanking System SYS 15 & 16 HTR & BLKG CON- ECM Rt. TR
TROL
SYS 15 BLKG MDL ECM Left TR
SYS 16 BLKG MDL ECM Left TR
BLANKING AMP AUX BNS Left TR

ECM Systems Miscellaneous

Indicator Light Dimming Control ECM IND DIMMING ECM Left TR

Wave Guide Pressurization ECM PRESS PUMP ECM AC Bus 5

Compressor

ECM Test Receptacles

Nose Radome MISCELLANEOUS –

NOSE ECM TEST RECP – AC LLC AC Bus 3
NOSE ECM TEST RECP – DC LLC Left TR

Expendable Countermeasures
Systems

AN/ALE-20 Flare Ejector Set FLARE EJECTOR POWER ECM AC Bus 5

FLARE EJECTOR PROGRAM ECM Rt. TR
POWER
AN/ALE-25 Rocket Pod ROCKET POD – LH ECM Rt. TR
ROCKET POD – RH ECM Rt. TR

AN/ALE-24 Dispenser Set CHAFF DISP DEACTIVATE ECM Rt. TR

WING CHAFF CONT PWR ECM Rt. TR

Receiver Systems

AN/ALR-20A Search Receiver AN/ALR-20 AC
A ECM AC Bus 5

AN/ALR-20 AC
B ECM AC Bus 5
AN/ALR-20 AC
C ECM AC Bus 5
AN/ALR-20 DC ECM Rt. TR

Radar Warning Receiver (RWR) WARNING RCVR AC ECM AC Bus 5

Sensor Integration Systems SI CONTROL DC ECM Rt. TR

SI DISPLAY AC ECM AC Bus 5
SI DISPLAY DC ECM Rt. TR

Figure 3-3 (Sheet 1 of 2)

Change 7 3-27
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Defensive Systems Circuit Protection and Location

(Cont)
CIRCUIT
BREAKER POWER
EQUIPMENT TITLE CB PANEL SOURCE

Receiver-Transmitter Systems

AN/ALQ-153 Tail Warning RIGHT ESSENTIAL DC POWER –

System CM SET RLC Rt. TR

AN/ALQ-155(V) Power MEMORY LOAD VERIFIER ECM

Management System MEMORY LOAD VERIFIER ECM
MEMORY LOAD VERIFIER ECM
MISCELLANEOUS – ECM PMS
A RLC AC Bus 5
MISCELLANEOUS – ECM PMS
B RLC AC Bus 5
MISCELLANEOUS – ECM PMS
C RLC AC Bus 5

AN/ALQ-172 Countermeasures PRESS PUMP IND ECM Left TR

Set PRESSURE TEST ECM Left TR
Less DT SYS 15 & 16 IND CONT ECM Left TR
Less DT SYS 15 & 16 MON CONT ECM Left TR
DT ALQ-172(V) CDU ECM Left TR
SYS 15 & 16 HTR & BLKG ECM Rt. TR
CONTROL
SYS 15 PRESS PUMP ECM Left TR
SYS 16 PRESS PUMP ECM Left TR

AN/ALT-28(V) Jamming SYS NO.1 AN/ALT-28 ANT SELECT ECM Left TR

Transmitter SYS NO.2 ECM Left TR

ECM ECM CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL RLC RIGHT LOAD CENTRAL CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
LLC LEFT LOAD CENTRAL CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL AUX BNS AUXILIARY BNS CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL

Figure 3-3 (Sheet 2 of 2)

3-28 Change 9

Glossary
AAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Aircraft Artillery
AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternating Current
ACU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avionics Control Unit
AFSATCOM . Air Force Satellite Communications
AGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Gain Control
AJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Jam
ANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna
AOA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angle-of-Attack
BIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Built-In-Test
BITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Built-In-Test Equipment
BNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bomb Navigation System
BWO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backward Wave Oscillation
CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Breaker
CCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit card Assembly
CDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Display Unit
CFAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constant False Alarm Rate
CMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Countermeasures Dispenser
COMSEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications Security
CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cathode Ray Tube
CSRL . . . . . . . . Common Strategic Rotary Launcher
CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Wave
DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Current
ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Counter Measures
EEROM . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronically Erasable Read
Only Memory
EID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emitter Identification Data
EMCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emission Control
EMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromagnetic Interference
EMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromagnetic Pulse
EW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Warfare
FDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Force Direction Message
FPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front-Panel Programmable
Read-Only Memory
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13
GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Positioning System
HSAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heavy Stores Adapter Beam
ICSMS . . . . . . . . . . Integrated Conventional Stores
Management System
INS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inertial Navigation Set/System
IFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identification Friend or Foe
IFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument Flight Rules
LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liquid Crystal Display
LF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Frequency
LMSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Left Missile Light
LNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Noise Amplifier
LRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Replaceable Unit
MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multifunction Display
MRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miniature Receive Terminal
NAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation, Navigator
OAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offensive Avionics System
PD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse Doppler
PRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse Recurrence Frequency
PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse Recurrence Interval
PROM . . . . . . . . Programmable Read-Only Memory
RMSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right Missile Light
RTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radar-Transmitter Modulator
RWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radar Warning Receiver
SAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surface to Air Missile
SI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensor Integration
SIOP . . . . . . . . . . Single Integrated Operations Plan
STALO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stable Local Oscillator
TRANSEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Security
TH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track While Scan
TX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit
VLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Very Low Frequency
Change 10 Glossary-1/(Glossary-2 blank)
BLA
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

*DENOTES ILLUSTRATION

Page Page

Functional Description 1-63

A Keyboard Commands 1-74D
Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-17, 3-20D
Normal Operation 1-73
Abnormal Operation and Malfunction Waveguide Low Pressure Warning
Analysis 1-5, Section III and Blanking Panel 1-72G*
After Landing Checklist 2-44 AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A
After Takeoff/Climb Checklist 2-23 Countermeasures System 1-75
Aircraft, The 1-3 Built-In-Test Equipment
Coding v (BITE) Self-Test 1-76
Description 1-3 Component Description 1-75
Dimensions 1-4 Component Locations 1-77*
Special Features 1-3 Controls and Indicators 1-79*
Aircrew Emergency Procedures 1-5 Functional Description 1-75
Air Refueling Procedures 2-42 Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-21
Contact 2-43 AN/ALQ-153(V) Tail Warning System 1-83
Post Air Refueling 2-43 Component Description 1-83
Rendezvous 2-42 Component Locations 1-85*
AN/ALE-20 Flare Ejector Set 1-113 Controls and Indicators 1-86*
Component Description 1-113 Functional Description 1-83
Component Locations 1-115* Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-22
Controls and Indicators 1-116* Normal Operation 1-91
Functional Description 1-113 AN/ALQ-155(V) Power Management System 1-92
Malfunction Analysis Antenna Selector Panel 1-100*
Checklist 3-25 Component Description 1-92
Normal Operation 1-120 Component Locations 1-95*
Pilot’s ALE-20 Flare Ejector Panel 1-119* Control Indicator Programmer 1-99*
Stepping Switch and Flare Functional Description 1-92
Ejector Case 1-114* Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-23
AN/ALE-24 Dispenser Set 1-103 Normal Operation 1-101
Component Description 1-103 Signal Processor 1-98*
Component Locations 1-105* AN/ALR-20A Search Receiver 1-13
Controls and Indicators 1-106* Abnormal Operation 3-3
Functional Description 1-103 Blanking Amplifier 1-22*
Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-25 Component Description 1-15
Normal Operation 1-111 Component Locations 1-17*
AN/ALQ-172 Countermeasures Set 1-63 Controls and Indicators 1-23*, 1-26*
Auxiliary Panel 1-72G, 1-72H* Functional Description 1-13
CDU Detailed Status Screen 1-72U* IP-1168B Bit 1 Screen 1-26D, 1-26D*
CDU Fault Display 3-20A* IP-1168B Bit 2 Screen 1-26F, 1-26F*
CDU Normal Operation 1-74 IP-1168B Indicator Align Screen 1-26G*
CDU Select Key Matrix 1-72Q* Look-Thru Panel 1-20*
CDU Situation Display 1-72K* Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-4
CDU Status Display 1-72P* Power Supply 1-21*
CDU Symbol Set 1-72V* Receiver-Control, C-9449/ALR-20A 1-15, 1-19*
Component Block Diagram 1-66* RF Tuners 1-21*
Component Locations 1-67* AN/ALT-16A 1-57
Control Display Unit 1-65, 1-66A*,1-72B* AN/ALT-28(V) Jamming Transmitter 1-57
Control Display Unit Operation 1-72J AN/ALT-32A Jamming Transmitter 1-57
Controls and Indicators 1-72* Component Locations 1-58*
Control Monitor 1-72A* Controls and Indicators 1-60*
Faults 3-20A

Change 9 Index-1
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Page Page

B E
Before Exterior Inspection – Safety Check 2-5 ECM Antennas 1-5
Blanking Amplifier, ALR-20A 1-22* Antenna Locations 1-8*
Blanking System 1-55 Antenna Patterns 1-5
Equipment Locations 1-56* Transmitter Antenna Types 1-5, 1-10*
Functional Description 1-55 ECM Equipment Operation Requirements 2-4
Equipment Circuit Protection and System
C Data Flow Diagrams 1-4
EW Calibration and Interference Checklist 2-25
EW Equipment Set Checklist 2-37
C-9449/ALR-20A Receiver-Control, 1-15, 1-19* EW Officers Station 1-5, 1-6*
Contact, Air Refueling Procedures 2-43 Expendable Countermeasures Systems 1-103
Countermeasures Set, AN/ALQ-172 1-63 AN/ALE-20 Flare Ejector Set 1-113
Component Locations 1-65* Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-25
Controls and Indicators 1-70* AN/ALE-24 Dispenser Set 1-103
Control Monitor 1-71* Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-25
Functional Description 1-63 Exterior Inspection Checklist 2-7
Normal Operation 1-73
Waveguide Low Pressure Warning
and Blanking Panel 1-72G* F
Countermeasures System
AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A 1-75 Flare Ejector Set, AN/ALE-20 1-113
Built-In-Test Equipment Component Description 1-113
(BITE) Self-Test 1-76 Component Locations 1-115*
Component Description 1-75 Controls and Indicators 1-116*
Component Locations 1-77* Functional Description 1-113
Controls and Indicators 1-79* Normal Operation 1-120
Functional Description 1-75 Pilot’s ALE-20 Flare Ejector Panel 1-119*
Stepping Switch and Flare
D Ejector Case 1-114*

Defensive Systems 1-4 G

Circuit Breakers 3-27*
Dispenser Set AN/ALE-24 1-103 Ground Cooling 1-4
Component Description 1-103
Component Locations 1-105* H I
Controls and Indicators 1-106*
Functional Description 1-103
Normal Operation 1-111 Inflight Procedures 2-23
After Takeoff/Climb Checklist 2-23
EW Calibration and Interference
Checklist 2-25
EW Equipment Set Checklist 2-37
Prelanding Operational Check
Checklist 2-41
Interior Inspection Checklist 2-8

Index-2 Change 12
 T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Page Page

J K L Q R
Look-Thru Panel, ALR-20A 1-20* Radar Warning Receiver, (RWR) 1-27
Component Description 1-31
M N Component Locations 1-32*
Controls and Indicators 1-36*
Functional Description 1-27
Nuclear Alert Procedures 2-47 Gunner Station 1-31
Indications 1-42*
O P Normal Operation 1-42K
Operational Modes 1-28
Pilot’s ALE-20 Flare Ejector Panel 1-119* Signal Processor 1-34*
Post Air Refueling Procedures 2-43 Receiver-Control, C-9449/ALR-20A 1-15, 1-19*
Postflight Procedures 2-44 Receiver Systems 1-13
After Landing Checklist 2-44 AN/ALR-20A Search Receiver 1-13
Postflight Checklist 2-46 Abnormal Operation 3-3
Power Management System, Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-4
AN/ALQ-155(V) 1-92 Radar Warning Receiver 1-27
Antenna Selector Panel 1-100* Abnormal Operation 3-7
Component Description 1-92 Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-8
Component Locations 1-95* Sensor Integration System 1-43
Control Indicator Programmer 1-99* Abnormal Operation 3-11
Functional Description 1-92 BIT Advisory Malfunction Analysis 3-12
Normal Operation 1-101 Receiver-Transmitter Systems 1-63
Signal Processor 1-98* AN/ALQ-172 (V) Countermeasures Set 1-63
Power Supply, ALR-20A 1-21* Autonomous Self-Test 1-73
Preflight and Operational Checks 1-5 Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-17
Preflight Procedures 2-5 AN/ALQ-122/AN/ALT-16A
Before Exterior Inspection – Safety Check 2-5 Countermeasures System 1-75
Exterior Inspection Checklist 2-7 Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-21
Interior Inspection Checklist 2-8 AN/ALQ-153(V) Tail Warning System 1-83
Prelanding Operational Check Checklist 2-41 Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-22
Pretakeoff Procedures 2-21 AN/ALQ-155(V) Power Management
Starting Engines Checklist 2-21 System 1-92
Taxiing and Before Lineup Checklist 2-22 Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-23
Preparation for Flight 2-3 Rendezvous, Air Refueling Procedures 2-42
Checklists 2-3 RF Tuners ALR-20A 1-21*
Entrance 2-3

Change 9 Index-3
T.O. 1B-52H-1-13

Page Page

S T
Search Receiver, AN/ALR-20A 1-13 Tail Warning System, AN/ALQ-153(V) 1-83
Abnormal Operation 3-3 Component Description 1-83
Blanking Amplifier 1-22* Component Locations 1-85*
Component Description 1-15 Controls and Indicators 1-86*
Component Locations 1-17* Functional Description 1-83
Controls and Indicators 1-23*, 1-26* Normal Operation 1-91
Functional Description 1-13 Taxiing and Before Lineup Checklist 2-22
IP-1168B Bit 1 Screen 1-26D, 1-26D* Transmitter Systems 1-57
IP-1168B Bit 2 Screen 1-26F, 1-26F* AN/ALT-16A 1-57
IP-1168B Indicator Align Screen 1-26G* Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-15
Look-Thru Panel 1-20* AN/ALT-28(V) Jamming Transmitter 1-57
Power Supply 1-21* AN/ALT-32A Jamming Transmitter 1-57
Receiver-Control, C-9449/ALR-20A 1-15, 1-19* Component Locations 1-58*
RF Tuners 1-21* Controls and Indicators 1-60*
Sensor Integration System 1-43 Malfunction Analysis Checklist 3-15
Abnormal Operation 3-11 Transmitter Antenna Types 1-5, 1-10*
BIT Advisory Malfunction Analysis 3-12
BIT Displays 1-52* U V W
Component Description 1-43
Component Locations 1-45*
Controls and Indicators 1-46* Waveguide Low Pressure Warning and Blanking
Functional Description 1-43 Panel, ALQ-172 1-72*
Normal Operation 1-53
Signal Processor, ALQ-155 1-98* X YZ
Signal Processor, (RWR) 1-34*
Starting Engines Checklist 2-21
Stepping Switch and Flare
Ejector Case 1-114*

Index-4 Change 9